diff options
Diffstat (limited to '7070.txt')
| -rw-r--r-- | 7070.txt | 13205 |
1 files changed, 13205 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/7070.txt b/7070.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9ad2410 --- /dev/null +++ b/7070.txt @@ -0,0 +1,13205 @@ +The Project Gutenberg EBook of The Treasure of the Incas, by G. A. Henty + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: The Treasure of the Incas + A Story of Adventure in Peru + +Author: G. A. Henty + +Posting Date: June 1, 2012 [EBook #7070] +Release Date: December, 2004 +First Posted: March 5, 2003 + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ASCII + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE TREASURE OF THE INCAS *** + + + + +Produced by Anne Soulard, Charles Franks and the Online +Distributed Proofreading Team. + + + + + + + + + +The Treasure of the Incas + +A Story of Adventure in Peru + + +BY + +G. A. HENTY + + + + +[Illustration: IT DID NOT TAKE LONG TO TRANSFER THE SACKS INTO THE BOAT +_Page 339_] + + + + +PREFACE TO THE ORIGINAL EDITION + + +The mysterious loss of a large portion of the treasure of the Incas has +never been completely cleared up. By torturing the natives to whom the +secret had been entrusted, the Spaniards made two or three discoveries, +but there can be little doubt that these finds were only a small +proportion of the total amount of the missing hoards, although for +years after their occupation of the country the Spaniards spared no +pains and hesitated at no cruelty to bring to light the hidden wealth. +The story of the boat which put to sea laden with treasure is +historical, and it was generally supposed that she was lost in a storm +that took place soon after she sailed. It was also morally certain that +the Peruvians who left the country when the Spaniards became masters +carried off with them a very large amount of treasure into that part of +South America lying east of Peru. Legends are current that they founded +a great city there, and that their descendants occupy it at the present +time. But the forests are so thick, and the Indian tribes so hostile, +that the country has never yet been explored, and it may be reserved +for some future traveller, possessing the determination of my two +heroes, to clear up the mystery of this city as they penetrated that of +the lost treasure-ship. It need hardly be said that the state of +confusion, misrule, and incessant civil wars which I have described as +prevailing in Peru presents a true picture of the country at the period +in which this story is laid. + +G. A. HENTY. + + + + +CONTENTS + + +CHAP. + + I. HOW IT CAME ABOUT + + II. THE START + + III. AT LIMA + + IV. A STREET FRAY + + V. AMONG THE MOUNTAINS + + VI. A TROPICAL FOREST + + VII. AN INDIAN ATTACK + + VIII. DEFEAT OF THE NATIVES + + IX. THE SIGNAL STAR + + X. A FRESH START + + XI. BRIGANDS + + XII. PRISONERS + + XIII. LETTERS FROM HOME + + XIV. THE CASTLE OF THE DEMONS + + XV. INVESTIGATIONS + + XVI. THE SEARCH BEGINS + + XVII. AT WORK + +XVIII. DISAPPOINTMENT + + XIX. THE TREASURE + + XX. HOME + + + + +ILLUSTRATIONS + + +IT DID NOT TAKE LONG TO TRANSFER THE SACKS INTO THE BOAT. + +AN INDIAN SPIES THE EXPEDITION. + +THEY SAW APPROACHING A PEASANT WOMAN SITTING ON A MULE. + +HARRY DROPPED THE BARREL OF HIS RIFLE INTO THE PALM OF HIS LEFT HAND. + +Map of Peru + +[Illustration: MAP OF PERU] + + + + +THE TREASURE OF THE INCAS + + + + +CHAPTER I + +HOW IT CAME ABOUT + + +Two men were sitting in the smoking-room of a London club. The room was +almost empty, and as they occupied arm-chairs in one corner of it, they +were able to talk freely without fear of being overheard. One of them +was a man of sixty, the other some five or six and twenty. + +"I must do something," the younger man said, "for I have been kicking +my heels about London since my ship was paid off two years ago. At +first, of course, it didn't matter, for I have enough to live upon; but +recently I have been fool enough to fall in love with a girl whose +parents would never dream of allowing her to marry a half-pay +lieutenant of the navy with no chance in the world of getting employed +again, for I have no interest whatever." + +"It is an awkward case certainly, Prendergast," the other said; "and +upon my word, though I sympathize with you, I cannot blame Fortescue. +He is not what you might call a genial man, but there is no doubt that +he was a splendid lawyer and a wonderful worker. For ten years he +earned more than any man at the bar. I know that he was twice offered +the solicitor-generalship, but as he was making two or three times the +official salary, he would not take it. I believe he would have gone on +working till now had he not suddenly come in for a very fine estate, +owing to the death, in the course of two or three years, of four men +who stood between him and it. Besides, I fancy he got hints that in the +general opinion of the bar he had had a wonderfully good innings, and +it was about time that younger men had a share in it. What his savings +were I do not know, but they must be very large. His three sons are all +at the bar, and are rising men, so there was no occasion for him to go +on piling up money for them. But, as I say, he has always had the +reputation of being a hard man, and it is practically certain that he +would never allow his daughter to marry a man whom he would regard as +next door to a pauper. Now, what are you thinking of doing?" + +"Well, sir, Miss Fortescue has agreed to wait for me for two years, and +of course I am eager to do something, but the question is what? I can +sail a ship, but even could I get the command of a merchantman, it +would not improve my position in the eyes of the parents of the lady in +question. Now, you have been knocking about all over the world, I do +wish you would give me your advice. Where is there money to be got? I +am equally ready to go to the North Pole or the Equator, to enter the +service of an Indian prince, or to start in search of a treasure hidden +by the old bucaneers." + +"You talk Spanish, don't you?" + +"Yes; all my service has been in the Mediterranean. We were two years +off the coast of Spain, and in and out of its ports, and as time hung +heavily on our hands, I got up the language partly to amuse myself and +partly to be able to talk fluently with my partners at a ball." + +The elder man did not speak for a minute or two. + +"You have not thought of South America?" he said at last. + +"No, Mr. Barnett; I don't know that I have ever thought of one place +more than another." + +The other was again silent. + +"I don't think you could do better anywhere," he said slowly. "It is a +land with great possibilities; at any rate it is a land where you could +be understood, and of course it would be folly to go anywhere without a +knowledge of the language. I was, as you know, five years out there, +and came home when the war broke out between Chili and the Spaniards. I +have been more in Peru than in Chili, and as Peru was still in the +hands of the Spanish, it would have been impossible for me to go there +again as long as the war lasted. Knocking about as I did, I heard a +great deal from the natives (I mean the Indians). I gathered from them +a number of their traditions, and I am convinced that they know of any +number of gold mines that were formerly worked, but were blocked up +when the Spaniards invaded the country, and have been kept secret ever +since. + +"The natives have never spoken on the subject at all to the Spaniards. +If they had, they would have been flogged until they revealed all they +knew--that is to say, they would have been flogged to death, for no +tortures will wring from an Indian anything he knows about gold. They +look upon that metal as the source of all the misfortunes that have +fallen upon their race. With an Englishman whom they knew and trusted, +and who, as they also knew, had no wish whatever to discover gold +mines, they were a little less reticent. I never asked them any +questions on a subject in which I had not a shadow of interest, but I +certainly had some curiosity, not of a pecuniary kind, because the +matter had always been a riddle as to the hiding-place of the Incas' +treasures. And from what I learned I should say it is absolutely +certain that a great portion of these escaped the search of their +Spanish tyrants. + +"Whether the men who were employed in the work all died without +revealing the secret, or whether it had been trusted to a chosen few, I +know not; but the natives believe that there are still a few among them +to whom the secret has been passed down from father to son. Anyhow, all +had heard vague traditions. Some said that part of the treasure was +carried hundreds of miles inland and given over to a tribe of fierce +savages, in a country into which no European can enter. Another +tradition is that a portion of it was carried off by sea in a great +canoe, which was never heard of again and was believed to have been +lost. I am not for a moment supposing, Prendergast, that if you went +out there you would have the most remote chance of discovering what the +Spaniards, ever since they landed there, have been in vain trying to +find, and I certainly should not think of recommending a mad-brained +adventure, but undoubtedly there are many rich gold mines yet to be +found. There are openings for trade, too; and I can give you +introductions to merchants both in Chili and Peru. It is not a thing I +should recommend to everyone, far from it; but if you want to combine +adventure with a chance, however small, of making money, I don't know +that you can do better than go to South America. You are fitted for no +calling here; your income, counting your half-pay, would suffice to +keep you out there, and a couple of years of such a life would do you +no harm." + +"It is just what I should like," the young man said enthusiastically; +"though I don't know how I should set to work if I did find a mine." + +"You would have to bring home specimens, with particulars of the width +of the lode. Of course you would crush pieces up and wash them +yourself, or get your Indian to wash them; that would give you an +approximate idea of the percentage of gold. If it were rich, I could +introduce you to men who would advance money for working it, giving you +a share of the profits. They would send out a mining expert with you. +He would verify your report, and then you would take up the concession. +I don't know whether there have been any changes in the regulations, +but there is no difficulty in learning how to proceed from one or other +of the men to whom I will give you introductions. The thing would not +be worth thinking of were it not that the man who always went with me +as guide and muleteer is an Indian, and has, I am convinced, a +knowledge of some of these places. He was with me all the time I was +out there. I saved his life when a puma sprang upon him, and he more +than once hinted that he could make me a rich man, but I had no +inclination that way, my income being sufficient for all my wants. +Still, on the chance that he is alive--and he was about thirty when he +was with me fifteen years ago, so it is probable that he is still to +the fore--I will give you a letter to him telling him that you are a +dear friend of mine, and that I trust to him to do any service he can +for you just as he would have done for myself. Had it not been for that +I should never have mentioned the matter to you. These old mines are +the dream of every Peruvian. They have been searching for them ever +since the conquest of the country, and as they have failed, it is +absurd to think that an Englishman would have the slightest chance of +lighting upon a mine, still less of finding any of the Incas' +treasures. But with the Indian's aid it is just possible that you may +find something, though I should advise you most strongly not to build +in any way upon the chance. I consider that you cannot possibly win +Miss Fortescue; that being so, two years of knocking about will not +make your position worse, and by the time you come back, you may have +ceased to struggle against fate. It will afford you a remote--but +distinctly remote--opportunity of bettering your position, will give +you something else to think about besides that young lady's charms, and +you may even come to recognize that life is, after all, possible +without her. You may shake your head, lad; but you know children cry +for the moon sometimes, yet afterwards come to understand that it would +not be a desirable plaything." + +"Well, at any rate, Mr. Barnett, I am extremely obliged for your +suggestion and for your offer of introductions. It is just the life +that I should enjoy thoroughly. As you say, the chance that anything +will come of it is extremely small, but at least there is a +possibility, and I take it as a drowning man catches at a straw." + +"By the way, you mustn't think only of gold; silver is, after all, the +chief source of the riches of Peru, and there are numbers of +extraordinarily rich mines. It is calculated that three hundred +millions have been produced since the first occupation by the +Spaniards. Quicksilver is also very abundant; copper and lead are found +too, but there is not much to be done with them at present, owing to +the cost of carriage. There is good shooting in the mountains on the +eastern side of the Andes, and you will find plenty of sport there." + +They talked over the matter for some time before they separated, and +Harry Prendergast became quite excited over it. On his return to his +rooms he was astonished to find the candles alight and a strong smell +of tobacco pervading the place. A lad of about sixteen leapt from the +easy-chair in which he had been sitting, with his feet on another. + +"Hullo, Harry, I didn't expect you back so soon! The maid said you were +dining out, and I suppose that generally means one o'clock before you +are back." + +"Well, what brings you here, Bert? I thought I had got you off my hands +for a year at least." + +"I thought so, myself," the lad said coolly; "but circumstances have +been too strong for me. We were running down the Channel the night +before last, when a craft that was beating up ran smack into us. I +don't know that it was his fault more than ours; the night was dark, +and it was very thick, and we did not see each other until she was +within a length of us. Luck was against us; if she had been a few +seconds quicker we should have caught her broadside, but as it was she +rammed us, knocking a hole in our side as big as a house, and we had +just time to jump on board her. Our old craft went down two minutes +after the skipper, who was of course the last man, left her. The other +fellow had stove his bow in. Luckily we were only about a couple of +miles off Dungeness, and though she leaked like a sieve, we were able +to run her into the bay, where she settled down in two and a half +fathoms of water. As soon as it was light we landed and tramped to +Dover. A hoy was starting for the river that evening, and most of us +came up in her, arriving at the Pool about three hours ago. It is a bad +job, Harry, and I am horribly put out about it. Of course nothing could +be saved, and there is all the new kit you bought for me down at the +bottom. I sha'n't bother you again; I have quite made up my mind that I +shall ship before the mast this time, and a five-pound note will buy me +a good enough outfit for that." + +"We need not talk about that now, Bertie. You are certainly an unlucky +beggar; this is the second time you have been wrecked." + +"It is a frightful nuisance," the boy said. "It is the kit I am +thinking of, otherwise I should not mind. I didn't care for the +skipper. He seemed all right and decent enough before we started, but I +soon heard from fellows who had sailed with him before that he was a +tartar; and what was worse, they said he was in the habit of being +drunk two nights out of three. However, that has nothing to do with it. +I am really awfully sorry, Harry. You have been a thundering good elder +brother. I hated to think that you had to shell out last time, and I +have quite made up my mind that you sha'n't do it again." + +"Well, it cannot be helped; it is no fault of yours; still, of course, +it is a nuisance. Thank God that no harm has come to you, that is the +principal thing. Now, sit down and go on with your pipe, you young +monkey. I did not think you had taken to smoking." + +"One has to," the lad said, "everyone else does it; and there is no +doubt that, when you have got the middle watch on cold nights with foul +winds, it is a comfort." + +"Well, go on smoking," his brother said. "I will light up too. Now shut +your mouth altogether. I want to think." + +They were silent for fully ten minutes, then Harry said; + +"I told you about that business of mine with Miss Fortescue." + +Bertie grinned all over his face, which, as he sat, was not visible to +his brother. Then with preternatural gravity he turned towards him. + +"Yes, you told me about it; an uncomfortable business wasn't it?--surly +old father, lovely daughter, and so on." + +"I will pull your ear for you, you young scamp," Harry said wrathfully, +"if you make fun of it; and I have a good mind not to say what I was +going to." + +"Say it, Harry, don't mind my feelings," the lad said. "You can't say I +did not stand it well when I was here last week, and gave you no end of +sympathy. Go ahead, old fellow; I dare say I shall be taken bad some +day, and then I shall be able to make allowances for you." + +"I'll have nothing more to say to you, you young imp." + +"Don't say that, Harry," the lad said in a tone of alarm. "You know how +sympathizing I am, and I know what a comfort it is for you to unburden +yourself; but I do think that it won't be necessary to go into personal +descriptions, you know, or to tell me what you said to her or she said +to you, because you told me all that ten days ago, also what her +tyrannical old father said. But really seriously I am awfully sorry +about it all, and if there is anything that I can possibly do for you I +shall be only too pleased. I don't see that it would be any advantage +for me to go and give the old gentleman my opinion of him; but if you +think it would, and can coach me in some of his sore points, we might +see how we could work upon them." + +"I always thought you were a young ass, Bertie," Harry said sternly, +"but I have not realized before how utterly assified you are." + +"All right, Harry!" the lad said cheerfully; "hit me as hard as you +like, under the circumstances I feel that I cannot kick." + +Harry said nothing for another five minutes. + +"This is a serious matter," he said at last, "and I don't want any +tomfoolery." + +"All right, Harry! I will be as serious as a judge." + +"I am thinking of going away for two years." + +The lad turned half round in his chair and had a good look at his +brother. + +"Where are you going to?" seeing by Harry's rather gloomy face that he +was quite in earnest. + +"I believe I am going to Peru." + +"What are you going there for, Harry?" the lad said quietly. + +"I told you," the other went on, "that Mr. Fortescue said that he had +no personal objection to me, but that if I was in a position to give +his daughter a home equal to that which I wanted her to leave, he would +be content." + +Bertie nodded. + +"This seemed to me hopeless," Harry went on. "I told you that she was +willing to wait for two years, but that she couldn't promise much +longer than that, for her father had set his mind on her making a good +match; he has certainly put a tremendous pressure upon her. When I was +talking at the club this evening to Mr. Barnett--you know that he is +our oldest friend and is one of our trustees--I told him about it, and +said that though I was ready to do anything and go anywhere I could not +see my way at all to making a big fortune straight away. He agreed with +me. After talking it over he said he knew of but one way by which such +a thing would be at all possible, but the betting would be twenty +thousand to one against it. Of course I said that if there was even a +possibility I would try it. Well, you know he was in Peru for some +years. He says that the natives have all sorts of legends about rich +mines that were hidden when the Spaniards came first, and that it is +certain that, tremendous as was the amount of loot they got, a great +part of the Incas' treasure was hidden away. Once or twice there had +been great finds-in one case two million and a half dollars. It is +believed that the secret is still known to certain Indians. When he +went out there he had a muleteer, whose life he saved when he was +attacked by some beast or other, and this man as much as hinted that he +knew of a place where treasure might be concealed; but as Barnett was +interested in beasts and plants and that sort of thing, and had a +comfortable fortune, he never troubled himself about it one way or +another. Well, he offered to give me a letter to this man, and he +regarded it as just possible that the fellow, who seems to be a +descendant of some of the people who were members of the Incas' court +at the time the Spaniards came, may have some knowledge of the rich +mines that were then closed down, and that he may be able to show them +to me, from his feeling of gratitude to Barnett. It is but one chance +in a million, and as I can see no other possibility of making a fortune +in two years, I am going to try it." + +"Of course you will," the lad said excitedly, "and I should think that +you would take me with you." + +"I certainly had not dreamt of doing so, Bertie. But if I have to keep +on getting fresh outfits for you, the idea has come into my mind during +the last half-hour that I could not do better." + +"Harry, you are sure to be disappointed lots of times before you hit on +a treasure, and then if you were all by yourself you would get down in +the mouth. Now, I should be able to keep you going, pat you on the back +when you felt sick, help you to fight Indians and wild beasts, and be +useful in all sorts of ways." + +"That is like your impudence, Bertie," the other laughed. "Seriously, I +know I shall be a fool to take you, and if I really thought I had any +chance to speak of I should not do so; but though I am going to try, I +don't expect for a moment that I shall succeed. I feel that really it +would be a comfort to have someone with me upon whom I could rely in +such a life as I should have to lead. It certainly would be lonely work +for one man. The only doubt in my mind is whether it will be fair to +you--you have got your profession." + +"But I can go back to it if nothing good turns up, Harry. I can visit +the firm and tell them that I am going to travel with you for a bit, +and hope that on my return they will take me back again and let me +finish my apprenticeship. I should think they would be rather glad, for +they always build and never buy ships, and it will take them six months +to replace the _Stella_. Besides, it will do me a lot of good. I shall +pick up Spanish--at least, I suppose that is the language they speak +out there--and shall learn no end of things. As you know, we trade with +the west coast of America, so I should be a lot more useful to the firm +when I come back than I am now." + +"Well, I will think it over, and let you know in the morning. I must +certainly consult Mr. Barnett, for he is your trustee as well as mine. +If we go I shall work my way out. It will be a big expense, anyhow, and +I don't mean, if possible, to draw upon my capital beyond three or four +hundred pounds. I believe living is cheap out there, and if I buy three +or four mules I shall then have to pay only the wages for the +muleteers, and the expenses of living. Of course I shall arrange for my +income and half-pay to be sent out to some firm at Lima. Now, you had +better go off to bed, and don't buoy yourself up with the belief that +you are going, for I have by no means decided upon taking you yet." + +"You will decide to take me, Harry," the lad said confidently, and then +added with a laugh: "the fact that you should have adopted a plan like +this is quite sufficient to show that you want somebody to look after +you." + +Harry Prendergast did not get much sleep that night. He blamed himself +for having mentioned the matter at all to Bertie, and yet the more he +thought over it the more he felt that it would be very pleasant to have +his brother with him. The lad was full of fun and mischief, but he knew +that he had plenty of sound sense, and would be a capital companion, +and the fact that he had been three years at sea, and was accustomed to +turn his hand to anything, was all in his favour. If nothing came of it +he would only have lost a couple of years, and, as the boy himself had +said, the time would not have been altogether wasted. Bertie was down +before him in the morning. He looked anxiously at his brother as he +came in. + +"Well, Harry?" + +"Well, I have thought it over in every light. But in the first place, +Bertie, if you go with me you will have to remember that I am your +commanding officer. I am ten years older than you, and besides I am a +lieutenant in the King's Navy, while you are only a midshipman in the +merchant service. Now, I shall expect as ready obedience from you as if +I were captain of my own ship and you one of my men; that is absolutely +essential." + +"Of course, Harry, it could not be otherwise." + +"Very well, then; in the next place I shall abide by what Mr. Barnett +says. He is your guardian as well as trustee, and has a perfect right +to put a veto upon any wild expedition of this sort. Lastly, I should +hope, although I don't say that this is absolutely necessary, that you +may get your employer's promise to take you back again in order that +you may complete your time." + +"Thank you very much, Harry!" the lad said gratefully. "The first +condition you may rely upon being performed, and I think the third will +be all right, for I know that I have always been favourably reported +upon. Old Prosser told me so himself when he said that I should have a +rise in my pay this voyage. As to Mr. Barnett, of course I can't say, +but I should think, as it was he who put you up to this, he must see +that it would be good for you to have someone to take care of you." + +"I think he is much more likely to say that I shall have quite enough +to do to take care of myself, without having the bother of looking +after you. However, I will go and see him this morning. You had better +call upon your employers." + +"Don't you think I had better go to Mr. Barnett with you, Harry?" + +"Not as you are now anyhow, Bertie. Your appearance is positively +disgraceful. You evidently had on your worst suit of clothes when you +were wrecked, and I can see that they have not been improved by the +experience. Why, there is a split right down one sleeve, and a big rent +in your trousers!" + +"I got them climbing on board, for I had no time to pick and choose, +with the _Stella_ sinking under my feet." + +"Well, you may as well go as you are, but you had better borrow a +needle and thread from the landlady and mend up the holes. You really +cannot walk through the city in that state. I will see about getting +you some more clothes when we get back, for I cannot have you coming +here in these in broad daylight. Here are three guineas; get yourself a +suit of pilot cloth at some outfitter's at the East End. It will be +useful to you anyhow, whether you go with me or ship again here." + +"There is a good deal in what you say, Harry," Mr. Barnett said when +Prendergast asked his opinion as to his taking his brother with him. +"Two years would not make any material difference in his career as a +sailor; it simply means that he will be so much older when he passes as +mate. There is no harm in that. Two or three and twenty is quite young +enough for a young fellow to become an officer, and I don't think that +many captains care about having lads who have just got their +certificate. They have not the same sense of responsibility or the same +power of managing. Then, too, Bertie will certainly have a good deal of +knocking about if he spends a couple of years in South America, and the +knowledge he will gain of Spanish will add to his value with any firm +trading on that coast. As far as you are concerned, I think it would be +a great advantage to have him with you. In a long expedition, such as +you propose, it is a gain to have a companion with you. It makes the +work more pleasant, and two men can laugh over hardships and +disagreeables that one alone would grumble at; but apart from this, it +is very important in case of illness. + +"A lonely man laid up with fever, or accidental injury, fares badly +indeed if he is at a distance from any town where he can obtain medical +attendance, and surrounded only by ignorant natives. I was myself at +one time down with fever for six weeks in a native hut, and during that +time I would have given pretty nearly all that I was worth for the +sight of a white face and the sound of an English voice. As to the fact +that it is possible that the lad might catch fever, or be killed in an +affray with natives, that must, of course, be faced; but as a sailor he +runs the risk of shipwreck, or of being washed overboard, or killed by +a falling spar. Everything considered, I think the idea of his going +with you is a good one. I don't suppose that many guardians would be of +the same opinion, but I have been so many years knocking about in one +part of the world or another, that I don't look at things in the same +light as men who have never been out of England." + +"I am glad you see it in that way, sir. I own that it would be a great +satisfaction to have him with me. He certainly would be a cheery +companion, and I should say that he is as hard as nails, and can stand +as much fatigue and hardship as myself. Besides, there is no doubt that +in case of any trouble two men are better than one." + +"I cannot advance any money out of the thousand pounds that will come +to him when he is of age. By your father's will it was ordered that, in +the event of his own death before that time, the interest was to +accumulate. Your father foresaw that, like you, probably Bertie would +take to the sea, and as the amount would be fully two thousand pounds +by the time he comes of age, it would enable him to buy a share in any +ship that he might, when he passed his last examination, command; but I +will myself draw a cheque for a hundred pounds, which will help towards +meeting expenses. I feel myself to some extent responsible for this +expedition. I somewhat regret now having ever spoken to you on the +subject, for I cannot conceal from myself that the chance of your +making a discovery, where the Spaniards, with all their power of +putting pressure on the natives for the past two or three hundred +years, have failed, is so slight as to be scarcely worth consideration. + +"I tell you frankly that I broached the subject chiefly because I +thought it was much better for you to be doing something than kicking +your heels about London, and mooning over this affair with Miss +Fortescue. There is nothing worse for a young man than living in London +with just enough to keep him comfortably without the necessity of +working. Therefore I thought you would be far better travelling and +hunting for treasure in Peru, than staying here. Even if you fail, as I +feel is almost certain, in the object for which you go out, you will +have plenty to occupy your thoughts, and not be dwelling continually +upon an attachment which in all probability will not turn out +satisfactorily. I do not suppose that you are likely to forget Miss +Fortescue, but by the time you return you will have accustomed yourself +to the thought that it is useless to cry for the moon, and that, after +all, life may be very endurable even if she does not share it. +Therefore I propounded this Peruvian adventure, feeling sure that, +whatever came of it, it would be a benefit to you." + +"No doubt it will, sir. I see myself the chance of success is small +indeed, but there is none at all in any other way. It is just the sort +of thing I should like, and I quite feel myself that it would be good +for me to have plenty to think about; and now that you have consented +to Bertie's going with me, I feel more eager than before to undertake +the expedition. The place is in rather a disturbed state, isn't it?" + +"If you are going to wait until Peru ceases to be in a disturbed state, +Harry, you may wait another hundred years. The Spanish rule was bad, +but Peru was then a pleasant place to live in compared with what it is +now. It is a sort of cock-pit, where a succession of ambitious rascals +struggle for the spoils, and the moment one gets the better of his +rivals fresh intrigues are set on foot, and fresh rebellions break out. +There are good Peruvians--men who have estates and live upon them, and +who are good masters. But as to the politicians, there is no principle +whatever at stake. It is simply a question of who shall have the +handling of the national revenue, and divide it and the innumerable +posts among his adherents. But these struggles will not affect you +largely. In one respect they will even be an advantage. Bent upon their +own factious aims, the combatants have no time to concern themselves +with the doings of an English traveller, whose object out there is +ostensibly to botanize and shoot. Were one of them to obtain the +undisputed control of affairs he might meddle in all sorts of ways; +but, as it is, after you have once got pretty well beyond the area of +their operations, you can regard their doings with indifference, +knowing that the longer they go on fighting the fewer scoundrels there +will be in the land. + +"But even were they to think that it was mining, and not science or +sport that took you out there, they would scarcely interfere with you. +It is admitted by all the factions that Peru needs capital for her +development, and at present that can best be got from this country. The +discovery of a fresh mine means employment to a large number of people, +and the increase of the revenues by a royalty or taxation. English +explorers who have gone out have never had any reason to complain of +interference on the part of the authorities. You will find the average +better class of Peruvians a charming people, and extremely hospitable. +The ladies are pretty enough to turn the head of anyone whose +affections are not already engaged. The men are kindly and courteous in +the extreme. However, you would have little to do with these. + +"In the mountains you would largely depend upon your rifle for food, +and on what you could get in the scattered native villages. The Indians +have no love for the Peruvians. They find their condition no better off +under them than it was under the Spaniards. Once they find out that you +are English they will do all in their power for you. It is to Cochrane +and the English officers with him that they owe the overthrow and +expulsion of their Spanish tyrants, and they are vastly more grateful +than either the Chilians or Peruvians have shown themselves to be." + +On returning to their lodgings Harry met his brother, who had been into +the city. + +"Old Prosser was very civil," said Bertie. "He said that as their ships +were chiefly in the South American trade it would be a great advantage +for me to learn to speak Spanish well. They had not yet thought +anything about whether they should order another ship to replace the +_Stella_; at any rate, at present they had no vacancy, and would gladly +give me permission to travel in South America, and would find me a +berth to finish my apprenticeship when I returned. More than that, they +said that as I had always been so favourably reported upon they would +put me on as a supernumerary in the _Para_, which will sail in a +fortnight for Callao. I should not draw pay, but I should be in their +service, and the time would count, which would be a great pull, and I +should get my passage for nothing." + +"That is capital. Of course I will take a passage in her too." + +"And what does Mr. Barnett say?" + +"Rather to my surprise, Bertie, he did not disapprove of the plan at +all. He thought it would be a good thing for me to have you with me in +case of illness or anything of that sort. Then no doubt he thought to +some extent it would keep you out of mischief." + +"I don't believe he thought anything of the sort. Did he say so?" + +"Well, no, he didn't; but I have no doubt he felt it in some way a sort +of relief." + +"That is all very fine. I know, when I have been down to his place in +the country between voyages, I have always been as well behaved as if I +had been a model mid." + +"Well, I have heard some tales of your doings, Bertie, that didn't seem +quite in accord with the character you give yourself." + +"Oh, of course I had a few larks! You cannot expect a fellow who has +been away from England for a year to walk about as soberly as if he +were a Methodist parson!" + +"No, I should not expect that, Bertie. But, on the other hand, I should +hardly have expected that he would, for example, risk breaking his neck +by climbing up to the top of the steeple and fastening a straw-hat on +the head of the weathercock." + +"It gave it a very ornamental appearance; and that weathercock was +never before watched so regularly by the people of the village as it +was from that time till the hat was blown away in a gale." + +"That I can quite believe. Still, Mr. Barnett told me that the rector +lodged a complaint about it." + +"He might complain as much as he liked; there is no law in the land, as +far as I know, that makes the fixing of a straw-hat upon a weathercock +a penal offence. It did no end of good in the village, gave them +something to talk about, and woke them up wonderfully." + +"And there were other things too, I think," his brother went on. + +"Oh, well, you need not go into them now! they are an old story. +Besides, I fancy I have heard of various tricks played by Mr. +Midshipman Harry Prendergast, and, as I heard them from your lips, I +cannot doubt but that they were strictly veracious. Well, this is jolly +now. When are we going to begin to get our outfit?" + +"We will lose no time about that. But really there is not much to +get--a couple of good rifles and two brace of pistols, with a good +store of ammunition, those clothes you have just bought, and two or +three suits of duck for the voyage. I shan't get any special kit until +we arrive there, and can take the advice of people at Lima whether we +had better travel in European clothes or in those worn by the +Peruvians. Of course saddles and bridles and all that sort of thing we +can buy there, and we shall want a small tent to use when we get into +out-of-the-way places. I shall take three hundred pounds in gold. I +have no doubt we can exchange it into silver profitably; besides, it is +much more handy for carrying about. I shall go down this afternoon and +see Prosser and secure a berth." + +"I think you will have to arrange that with the captain. Very few of +our ships have accommodation for passengers, but the captains are +allowed to take one or two if they like." + +"All right! At any rate I must go to the office first. They can refer +me to the skipper if they like; that would be better than my going to +him direct." + + + + +CHAPTER II + +THE START + + +Harry Prendergast went down to Leadenhall Street and saw the managing +owner of the _Para_. As Bertie had anticipated, Mr. Prosser, after +hearing Harry's statement that he wished to take a passage to Callao in +the vessel advertised to start in a week's time, and that he was much +obliged to them for giving Bertie a berth as supernumerary midshipman, +said: + +"We shall certainly have pleasure in putting your brother's name on the +ship's books. He has already explained to me his desire to go out with +you; we have had every reason to be satisfied with him since he entered +our service, and he had better draw pay as usual, as his service during +the voyage will then count towards his time. As for yourself, we do not +book passengers, it is more bother than it is worth; but we have no +objection to our masters taking one or two. The addition of a mouth or +so practically makes very little difference in the amount of ships' +stores consumed. The masters pay us a small sum a head and make their +own terms with the passengers they take. In that way we are saved all +complaints as to food and other matters. Of course a passenger would +put on board for himself a stock of such wines, spirits, and little +luxuries as he may choose. + +"You will find Captain Peters down at the docks. The last cargo has +been discharged, and they are giving an overhaul to the rigging and +making a few repairs; he is not a man to leave his ship if he can help +it while work is going on there." + +Harry at once went down. + +"Well, sir," the captain said, when he had told him that he wished to +take a passage to Callao, and that the owners had referred him to him, +"I had fully made up my mind that I would not take passengers again. On +my last voyage they were always grumbling at the food, expecting to be +treated as if they were in a first-class hotel." + +"I am not likely to grumble, Captain; I have been knocking about the +King's service since I was fourteen." + +"Oh, you are a royal navy man, are you, sir?" + +"I am; I am a lieutenant." + +"That makes a difference; and I have no doubt we can arrange the matter +to our satisfaction." + +"I may tell you," Harry said, "that I have a younger brother coming out +with me. He is an apprentice nearly out of his time, and was on board +the _Stella_ when she was sunk in the Channel. Your owners have kindly +arranged that he shall go out with you as a supernumerary; that is one +reason why I wish to go in your ship." + +The Master thought for a minute or two. "Well, Mr. Prendergast," he +said, "I like having one of you naval gentlemen on board; if anything +goes wrong it is a comfort to have your advice. If we have bad weather +round the Horn, could I rely upon you to give me a helping hand should +I need it? I don't mean that you should keep watch or anything of that +sort, but that you should, as it were, stand by me. I have a new first +mate, and there is no saying how he may turn out. No doubt the firm +would make every enquiry. Still, such enquiries don't mean much; a +master doesn't like to damn a man by refusing to give him a good +character. I dare say he is all right. Still, I should certainly feel +very much more comfortable if I had a naval officer with me. Now, sir, +I pay the firm twelve pounds for each passenger I take as his share of +the cabin stores; you pay me that, and I will ask for nothing for your +passage. I cannot say fairer than that." + +"You cannot indeed, Captain, and I feel very much obliged to you for +the offer--very much obliged. It will suit me admirably, and in case of +any emergency you may rely upon my aid; and if you have a spell of bad +weather I shall be quite willing to take a watch, for I know that in +the long heavy gales you meet with going round the Horn the officers +get terribly overtaxed." + +"And how about your brother?" the captain said; "as he is to be a +supernumerary, I suppose that only means that the firm are willing that +he shall put in his time for his rating. I have never had a +supernumerary on board, but I suppose he is to be regarded as a +passenger rather than one of the ship's complement." + +"No, Captain, he is to be on the pay-sheet; and I think he had much +better be put into a watch. He would find the time hang very heavy on +his hands if he had nothing to do, and I know he is anxious to learn +his profession thoroughly. As he is to be paid, there is no reason why +he should not work." + +"Very well; if you think so we will say nothing more about it. I +thought perhaps you would like to have him aft with you." + +"I am much obliged to you, but I think the other way will be best; and +I am sure he would feel more comfortable with the other apprentices +than as a passenger." + +"Are you going out for long, may I ask you, Mr. Prendergast?" + +"For a couple of years or so. I am going to wander about and do some +shooting and exploring and that sort of thing, and I am taking him with +me as companion. I speak Spanish fairly well myself, and shall teach +him on the voyage, if you will allow me to do so. A knowledge of that +language will be an advantage to him when he comes back into Prosser & +Co.'s service." + +"A great advantage," the captain agreed. "Most of us speak a little +Spanish, but I have often thought that it would pay the company to send +a man who could talk the lingo well in each ship. They could call him +supercargo, and I am sure he would pay his wages three or four times +over by being able to bargain and arrange with the Chilians and +Peruvians. In ports like Callao, where there is a British consul, +things are all right, but in the little ports we are fleeced right and +left. Boatmen and shopkeepers charge us two or three times as much as +they do their own countrymen, and I am sure that we could get better +bargains in hides and other produce if we had someone who could knock +down their prices." + +"When do you sail, Captain?" + +"This day week. It will be high tide about eight, and we shall start to +warp out of dock a good half-hour earlier, so you can either come on +board the night before or about seven in the morning." + +"Very well, sir; we shall be here in good time. I shall bring my things +on board with me; it is of no use sending them on before, as they will +not be bulky and can be stored away in my cabin." + +"This will be your state-room," the captain said, opening a door. "I +have the one aft, and the first mate has the one opposite to you. The +others are empty, so you can stow any baggage that you have in one of +them; the second and third officers and the apprentices are in the +deck-house cabins." + +"In that case, Captain, I will send the wine and spirits on board the +day before. Of course I shall get them out of bond; I might have +difficulty in doing that so early in the morning. You will perhaps be +good enough to order them to be stowed in one of the empty cabins." + +"That will be the best plan," the captain said. + +"When do the apprentices come on board?" + +"The morning before we sail. There is always plenty to be done in +getting the last stores on board." + +"All right! my brother will be here. Good-morning, Captain, and thank +you!" + +The following morning at eleven Harry Prendergast was standing in front +of the entrance to the British Museum. A young lady came up. "It is +very imprudent of you, Harry," she said, after the first greeting, "to +ask me to meet you." + +"I could not help it, dear; it was absolutely necessary that I should +see you." + +"But it is of no use, Harry." + +"I consider that it is of particular use, Hilda." + +"But you know, Harry, when you had that very unpleasant talk with my +father, I was called in, and said that I had promised to wait two years +for you. When he found that I would not give way, he promised that he +would not press me, on the understanding that we were not to meet again +except in public, and I all but promised." + +"Quite so, dear; but it appears to me that this is surely a public +place." + +"No, no, Harry; what he meant was that I was not to meet you except at +parties." + +"Well, I should have asked you to meet me to-day even if I had had to +storm your father's house to see you. I am going away, dear, and he +could scarcely say much if he came along and found us talking here. You +see, it was not likely that I should stumble across a fortune in the +streets of London. I have talked the matter over with Barnett--you know +our trustee, you have met him once or twice--and we came to the +conclusion that the only possible chance of my being able to satisfy +your father as to my means, was for me to go to Peru and try to +discover a gold mine there or hidden treasure. Such discoveries have +been made, and may be made again; and he has supplied me with a letter +to an Indian, who may possibly be able to help me." + +"To Peru, Harry! Why, they are always fighting there." + +"Yes, they do a good deal of squabbling, but the people in general have +little to do with it; and certainly I am not going out to take any part +in their revolutions. There is not a shadow of doubt that a number of +gold mines worked by the old people were never discovered by the +Spaniards, and it is also certain that a great portion of the treasures +of the Incas is still lying hid. Barnett saved the life of a muleteer +out there, and from what he said he believed that the man did know +something about one of these lost mines, and might possibly let me into +the secret. It is just an off chance, but it is the only chance I can +see. You promised your father that you would never marry without his +consent, and he would never give it unless I were a rich man. If +nothing comes of this adventure I shall be no worse off than I am at +present. If I am fortunate enough to discover a rich mine or a hidden +treasure, I shall be in a position to satisfy his demand. I am going to +take Bertie with me; he will be a cheerful companion, and even now he +is a powerful young fellow. At any rate, if I get sick or anything of +that sort, it would be an immense advantage to have him with me." + +"I don't like the idea of your going, Harry," she said tearfully. "No, +dear; and if I had the chance of seeing you sometimes, and of some day +obtaining your father's consent to the marriage, all the gold mines in +Peru would offer no temptation to me. As it is, I can see nothing else +for it. In some respects it is better; if I were to stay here I should +only be meeting you frequently at dances and dinners, never able to +talk to you privately, and feeling always that you could never be mine. +It would be a constant torture. Here is a possibility--a very remote +one, I admit, but still a possibility--and even if it fails I shall +have the satisfaction of knowing that I have done all that a man could +do to win you." + +"I think it is best that you should go somewhere, Harry, but Peru seems +to be a horrible place." + +"Barnett speaks of it in high terms. You know he was four or five years +out there. He describes the people as being delightful, and he has +nothing to say against the climate." + +"I will not try to dissuade you," she said bravely after a pause. "At +present I am hopeless, but I shall have something to hope and pray for +while you are away. We will say good-bye now, dear. I have come to meet +you this once, but I will not do so again, another meeting would but +give us fresh pain. I am very glad to know that your brother is going +with you. I shall not have to imagine that you are ill in some +out-of-the-way place without a friend near you; and in spite of the +dangers you may have to run, I would rather think of you as bravely +doing your best than eating your heart out here in London. I shall not +tell my father that we have met here; you had better write to him and +say that you are leaving London at once, and that you hope in two years +to return and claim me in accordance with his promise. I am sure he +will be glad to know that you have gone, and that we shall not be +constantly meeting. He will be kinder to me than he has been of late, +for as he will think it quite impossible that you can make a fortune in +two years he will be inclined to dismiss you altogether from his mind." + +For another half-hour they talked together, and then they parted with +renewed protestations on her part that nothing should induce her to +break her promise to wait for him for two years. He had given her the +address of one of the merchants to whom Mr. Barnett had promised him a +letter of introduction, so that she might from time to time write, for +the voyage would take at least four months and as much more would be +required for his first letter to come back. He walked moodily home +after parting with her. + +"Hullo, Harry! nothing wrong with you, I hope? why, you look as grave +as an owl." + +"I feel grave, Bertie. I have just said good-bye to Hilda; and though I +kept up my spirits and made the best of this expedition of ours, I +cannot but feel how improbable it is that we shall meet again--that is +to say, in our present relations; for if I fail I certainly shall not +return home for some years; it would be only fair to her that I should +not do so. I know that she would keep on as long as there was any hope, +but I should not care to think that she was wasting her life. I was an +ass to believe it could ever be otherwise, and I feel that the best +thing for us both would have been for me to go away as soon as I found +that I was getting fond of her." + +"Well, of course I cannot understand it, Harry, and it seems to me that +one girl is very like another; she may be a bit prettier than the +average, but I suppose that comes to all the same thing in another +twenty years. I can understand a man getting awfully fond of his ship, +especially when she is a clipper. However, some day I may feel +different; besides, how could you tell that her father would turn out +such a crusty old beggar?" + +"I suppose I did not think about it one way or the other, Bertie," +Harry said quietly. "However, the mischief is done, and even if there +was no chance whatever of making money I should go now for my own sake +as well as hers. Well, it is of no use talking more about it; we will +go out now and buy the rifles. I shan't get them new, one can pick up +guns just as good at half the price, and as I know something about +rifles I am not likely to be taken in. Of course I have got my pistols +and only have a brace to buy for you. You will have time on the voyage +to practise with them; if you did not do that you would be as likely to +shoot me as a hostile Indian." + +"Oh, that is bosh!" the boy said; "still, I certainly should like to be +a good shot." + +After getting the rifles and pistols, Harry went into the city and +ordered six dozen of wine and three dozen of brandy to be sent on board +out of bond; he also ordered a bag of twenty pounds of raw coffee, a +chest of tea, and a couple of dozen bottles of pickles and sauces, to +be sent down to the docks on the day before the _Para_ sailed. Another +suit of seafaring clothes and a stock of underclothing was ordered for +Bertie. Harry spent the intervening time before the vessel sailed in +looking up his friends and saying good-bye to them, and drove down to +the docks at the appointed time, his brother having joined the ship on +the previous day. + +The _Para_ was a barque-rigged ship of some eight hundred tons. At +present she did not show to advantage, her deck being littered with +stores of all kinds that had come on board late. The deck planks where +they could be seen were almost black, the sails had been partly loosed +from the gaskets, and to an eye accustomed to the neatness and order of +a man-of-war her appearance was by no means favourable; but her sides +shone with fresh paint, and, looking at her lines from the wharf, Harry +thought she would be both fast and a good sea-boat. She was not heavily +laden, and stood boldly up in the water. Nodding to Bertie, who was +working hard among the men, he went up on to the poop, from which +Captain Peters was shouting orders. + +"Glad to see you, sir," the captain said; "she looks rather in a litter +at present, doesn't she? We shall get her all ataunto before we get +down to the Nore. These confounded people won't send their stores on +board till the last moment. If I were an owner I should tell all +shippers that no goods would be received within five or six hours of +the ship's time for sailing; that would give us a fair chance, instead +of starting all in a muddle, just at the time, too, when more than any +other one wants to have the decks free for making short tacks down +these narrow reaches. I believe half the wrecks on the sands at the +mouth of the river are due to the confusion in which the ships start. +How can a crew be lively in getting the yards over when they have to go +about decks lumbered up like this, and half of them are only just +recovering from their bout of drink the day before?" + +Up to the last moment everyone on board was hard at work, and when the +order was given to throw off the hawsers the deck was already +comparatively clear. Half an hour later the vessel passed out through +the dock gates, with two boats towing ahead so as to take her well out +into the river; the rest of the crew were employed in letting the sails +drop. As soon as she gathered way the men in the boats were called in, +the boats themselves being towed behind in case they might again be +required. + +The passage from the Pool to the mouth of the river was in those days +the most dangerous portion of the voyage. There were no tugs to seize +the ships and carry them down to the open water, while the channels +below the Nore were badly buoyed and lighted, and it was no uncommon +thing for twenty vessels to get upon the sands in the course of a +single tide. + +The wind was light, and being northerly helped them well on their way, +and it was only in one or two reaches that the _Para_ was unable to lay +her course. She overtook many craft that had been far ahead of her, and +answered the helm quickly. + +"She is both fast and handy, I see," Harry Prendergast, who had been +watching her movements with interest, remarked. + +"Yes; there are not many craft out of London can show her their heels +when the wind is free. She does not look quite so well into the wind as +I should wish; still, I think she is as good as most of them." + +"I suppose you will get down to Gravesend before the tide turns?" + +"Yes, we shall anchor there. The wind is not strong enough for us to +stem the tide, which runs like a sluice there. Once past the Nore one +can do better, but there is no fighting the tide here unless one has a +steady breeze aft. I never feel really comfortable till we are fairly +round the South Foreland; after that it is plain sailing enough. Though +there are a few shoals in the Channel, one can give them a wide berth; +fogs are the things we have to fear there." + +"Yes. I have never been down the river, having always joined my ships +either at Portsmouth or Plymouth, so I know very little about it; but I +know from men who have been on board vessels commissioned at Chatham or +Sheerness that they are thankful indeed when they once get round the +Goodwins and head west." + +"Well, Mr. Prendergast, I am against these new-fangled steamboats--I +suppose every true sailor is; but when the _Marjory_ began to run +between London and Gravesend eighteen years ago--in '15 I think it +was--folks did say that it would not be long before sailing craft would +be driven off the sea. I did not believe that then, and I don't believe +it now; but I do say that I hope before long there will be a lot of +small steamers on the Thames, to tow vessels down till they are off the +North Foreland. It would be a blessing and a comfort to us master +mariners. Once there we have the choice of going outside the Goodwins, +or taking a short cut inside if the wind is aft. Why, sir, it would add +years to our lives and shorten voyages by weeks. There we are, now, +sometimes lying off the Nore, five hundred sail, waiting for the wind +to shift out of the east, and when we do get under weigh we have always +to keep the lead going. One never knows when one may bump upon the +sands. Some masters will grope their way along in the dark, but for my +part I always anchor. There are few enough buoys and beacons in +daytime, but I consider that it is tempting Providence to try and go +down in a dark night. The owners are sensible men and they know that it +is not worth while running risks just to save a day or two when you +have got a four months' voyage before you. Once past Dover I am ready +to hold on with anyone, but between the Nore and the North Foreland I +pick my way as carefully as a woman going across a muddy street." + +"You are quite right, Captain; I thoroughly agree with you. More ships +get ashore going down to the mouth of the Thames than in any other part +of the world; and, as you say, if all sailing ships might be taken down +by a steamer, it would be the making of the port of London." + +"Your brother is a smart young chap, Mr. Prendergast. I was watching +him yesterday, and he is working away now as if he liked work. He has +the makings of a first-rate sailor. I hold that a man will never become +a first-class seaman unless he likes work for its own sake. There are +three sorts of hands. There is the fellow who shirks his work whenever +he has a chance; there is the man who does his work, but who does it +because he has to do it, and always looks glad when a job is over; and +there is the lad who jumps to his work, chucks himself right into it, +and puts his last ounce of strength on a rope. That is the fellow who +will make a good officer, and who, if needs be, can set an example to +the men when they have to go aloft to reef a sail in a stiff gale. So, +as I understand, Mr. Prendergast, he is going to leave the sea for a +bit. It seems a pity too." + +"He will be none the worse for it, Captain. A year or so knocking about +among the mountains of Peru will do more good to him than an equal time +on board ship. It will sharpen him up, and give him habits of reliance +and confidence. He will be all the better for it afterwards, even +putting aside the advantage it will be to him to pick up Spanish." + +"Yes, it may do him good," the captain agreed, "if it does not take +away his liking for the sea." + +"I don't think it will do that. If the first voyage or two don't sicken +a lad, I think it is pretty certain he is cut out for the sea. Of +course it is a very hard life at first, especially if the officers are +a rough lot, but when a boy gets to know his duty things go more easily +with him; he is accustomed to the surroundings, and takes to the food, +which you know is not always of the best, with a good appetite. Bertie +has had three years of it now, and when he has come home I have never +heard a grumble from him; and he is not likely to meet with such +luxuries while we are knocking about as to make him turn up his nose at +salt junk." + +The tide was already turning when they reached Gravesend. As soon as +the anchor was down the steward came up to say that dinner was ready. + +"I am not at all sorry," Harry said as he went below with the captain. +"I ate a good breakfast before I started at half-past six, and I went +below and had a biscuit and bottle of beer at eleven, but I feel as +hungry as a hunter now. There is nothing like a sea appetite. I have +been nearly two years on shore, and I never enjoyed a meal as I do at +sea." + +The crew had been busy ever since they left the dock, and the deck had +now been scrubbed and made tidy, and presented a very different +appearance from that which met Harry's eye as he came on board. + +Johnson, the first mate, also dined with the skipper. He was a tall, +powerfully-built man. He was singularly taciturn, and took no share in +the conversation unless directly asked. He seemed, however, to be able +to appreciate a joke, but never laughed audibly, contenting himself +with drawing his lips apart and showing his teeth. + +The wind was light and baffling, so that they did not round the South +Foreland until the seventh day after leaving dock. After that it was +favourable and steady, and they ran without any change until they +approached the line; then there was a fortnight of calm. At last they +got the wind again, and made a rapid run until within five hundred +miles of Cape Horn. The captain was in high glee. + +"We have done capitally so far, Mr. Prendergast. I don't think I ever +made so rapid a run. If she goes on like this we shall reach Callao +within three months of starting." + +"I don't think the weather will continue like this," the mate said. + +This was the first original observation he had made since he had +sailed, and Harry and the captain looked at him in surprise. + +"You think there is going to be a change, Mr. Johnson?" the captain +said, after a short pause to recover from his astonishment. + +The mate nodded. + +"Glass falling, sky hazy." + +"Is the glass falling? I am ashamed to say I have not looked at it for +the past twenty-four hours. It has stuck so long at the same point that +I have quite ceased to look at it two or three times a day as I usually +do." + +"It has not fallen much, but it is sinking." + +The captain got up from the table, and went to look at the glass. + +"You are right, it has fallen a good eighth; but that may mean a change +of wind. Did you notice any change, Mr. Prendergast?" + +"No, I can't say that I did. I looked up, as a sailor always does, when +I was on deck this morning, but it was clear enough then, and I have +not noticed it particularly since." + +But when they went up on deck half an hour later both agreed that the +mate was right. The change overhead was slight, but away to the west a +dull reddish mist seemed to obscure the horizon. + +"We will get the upper sails off at once, Mr. Johnson. These storms +come so suddenly off the coast that it is as well to lose no time in +shortening sail when one sees any indication of such a change." + +The mate at once gave the necessary orders. The sailors started up with +looks of surprise. + +"Look sharp, men!" the mate said. "We shall have wind, and plenty of +it. It will be here before long." + +The men, who were by no means sorry for a spell of work after going so +long without shifting sail or tack, worked hard, and the white sheets +of canvas were soon snugly furled. By this time all the sailors who had +been to sea for any time recognized the utility of their work. The low +bank had risen and extended the whole width of the western horizon. + +"What do you think, Mr. Prendergast? Have we got enough off her?" + +"I don't know about your storms here, Captain; but if it were in the +Levant I should get every stitch of canvas off her excepting +closely-reefed topsails, a storm jib, and fore stay-sail. The first +burst over, one can always shake out more canvas. However, you know +these seas, and I do not." + +"I think you are right. These pamperos, as we call them, are not to be +trifled with." + +"In that case there is no time to be lost, Captain, and with your +permission I will lend a hand." + +"All hands take in sail!" the captain shouted. + +The mate led the way up the starboard shrouds, while Harry, throwing +off his coat, mounted those to port, closely followed by Bertie. Five +minutes' hard work, and the _Para_ was stripped for the struggle. + +"That is a good job done," the skipper said to Harry as he reached the +deck. + +"A very good job, sir. The wind may come, but we are prepared for it; +there is nothing like being ready in time." + +"She is in good trim for it," said the captain, "not above two-thirds +laden, and as the wind is off the land, there is nothing to worry us +except the Falklands. I shall go outside them. Of course that will +lengthen the voyage, but with this westerly wind I should not care +about being between them and the mainland. You think the same, Mr. +Prendergast?" + +"I do, sir; they are a scattered group, and it would not be pleasant to +have them under lee." + +It had grown sensibly darker, but the line of mist had not risen +higher. Harry remarked upon this. + +"I almost doubt whether it is coming after all," he said. + +The captain shook his head. + +"It does not spread over the sky," he said, "because it is largely dust +blown off the land. After the first burst you will see that we shall +have a bright blue sky and a roaring wind, just as one gets it +sometimes in an easterly gale in the Channel. We shall have it in +another five minutes, I fancy. I don't think it will be very strong, or +we should have had it here before this." + +It was not long before a dull, moaning sound was heard, the brown-red +fog changed its appearance, swirls of vapour seemed to dash out in +front of it, and the whole swelled and heaved as if it were being +pushed forward by some tremendous pressure in its rear. + +The ship's head was pointing nearly east, the canvas hung down +motionless, and there was not a breath of wind. + +"Hold on all!" the captain shouted. Half a minute later the billowly +clouds swept across the vessel, and a sudden darkness overspread them. +Then there was a glow of white light, a line of foam approached as +fleet as a race-horse, and with a shriek the gale was upon them. The +vessel shook from stem to stern as if she had struck against a rock, +and her bow was pressed down lower and lower until she seemed as if she +were going to dive head-foremost. But as she gathered way, her bow +rose, and in a minute she was flying along at some eighteen knots an +hour. + +"She is all right now, Mr. Prendergast," the captain said. "It is well +we stripped her so thoroughly, and that she is not heavily laden." + +Four men had been placed at the wheel, and it needed all their strength +to keep her from yawing. In half an hour the sea began to get up, and +the captain laid her course south-east, which put the wind on her +quarter. + +"It is well we were not a degree or so farther south, Captain." + +"Yes; it would have been as much as we could do to weather the +Falklands; for with this small amount of sail we should have made a +terrible amount of leeway. As it is, all is fair sailing." + +The darkness gradually passed away, and in an hour after the gale had +struck her the _Para_ was sailing under a bright blue sky. Although but +few points off the wind, she was lying down till her lee scuppers were +under water. The spray was flying over her sparkling in the sun; the +sailors were crouched under the weather bulwark, lashed to +belaying-pins and stanchions to prevent themselves from shifting down +to leewards. Six hours later it was evident that there was some slight +diminution in the force of the wind. + +"She is going about fourteen knots now," the captain said; "we can head +her more to the south. We must be nearly abreast of the islands, and +according to my reckoning forty or fifty miles to the east of them." + +It was now dark, and the watch was sent below. + +"To-morrow morning we shall be able to get some more sail on her," the +master said, "and I hope by the next morning the squall will be over, +for we shall then have made our southing, and the wind will be right in +our teeth when we turn her head west. There is no saying which way it +will come when the squall dies out. What do you think, Johnson?" + +"We are pretty sure to get it hot from one quarter or another," the man +said. "I should say most likely from the south." + +"Except for the cold that would be better than west," Harry remarked. + +"Yes, if it is not too strong; but it is likely to be strong. After +such a gale as we have had, it seldom settles down for some time. As +like as not there will be bad weather for the next month." + +The next morning when Harry went on deck he saw that the reefs had been +shaken out of the topsails and the spanker hoisted. There was still a +fresh wind, but it had backed round more to the south, and there was so +sharp a nip in it that he went below and put on a pea-jacket. Then he +beckoned to Bertie, who was off duty, to join him on the poop. + +"That has been a smart blow, Bertie." + +"Yes, but I had it worse than that the last time I came round the Horn. +I think we shall be shortening sail again before long. The clouds are +banking up to the south-west. She is a good sea-boat, isn't she?" + +"She has behaved uncommonly well. We shall want all our clothes before +night, Bertie. It was May when we started, and it is nearly mid-winter +down here." + +"There is one thing, we shan't have so much risk of coming across +drifting icebergs, most of them will be frozen up hard and fast down in +the south. They don't matter much when the weather is clear, but if it +is thick one has an awful time of it. On my first voyage it was like +that, and I tell you I didn't think I was going to see England again. +We had some desperately close shaves." + +The wind speedily freshened, and by evening the ship was under +close-reefed canvas again. The clouds were flying fast overhead and the +air was thick. Before the evening watch was set the ship was brought +round on the other tack, and was running to the east of south. + +"We will lie on this course till morning, Mr. Prendergast," said the +captain, "and then if the wind holds, I think we shall be able to make +a long leg and weather the Horn." + +For six days the storm raged with unabated violence. The cold was +intense, the spray breaking over the bows froze as it fell, and the +crew were engaged for hours at a time in breaking up the masses of ice +thus formed. Harry had volunteered to take a watch in turn with the +first and second mates. The captain was almost continuously on deck. +Twice they encountered icebergs, and once in a driving snow-storm +nearly ran foul of one. Fortunately it was daylight, and the whole crew +being on deck, they were able to put the vessel about just in time. +During this time the vessel had only gained a few miles' westing. All +on board were utterly exhausted with the struggle against the bitter +wind; their hands were sore and bleeding through pulling upon frozen +ropes, their faces inflamed, and their eyelids so swollen and sore that +they could scarcely see. Then the wind began to abate, and more sail +being got on the _Para_, she was able to lie her course. + + + + +CHAPTER III + +AT LIMA + + +Three days later the sky cleared, and the captain, getting an +observation, found that they had rounded the southernmost point of the +Cape. Another day and the _Para's_ head was turned north, and a week +later they were running smoothly along before a gentle breeze, with the +coast of Chili twenty miles away. The heavy wraps had all been laid +aside, and although the air was still frosty, the crew felt it warm +after what they had endured. The upper spars and yards had all been +sent up, and she was now carrying a crowd of canvas. The mate had +thawed out under the more congenial surroundings. He had worked like a +horse during the storm, setting an example, whether in going aloft or +in the work of clearing off the ice from the bows, and even when his +watch was relieved he seldom went below. + +"Well, I hope, Mr. Johnson, we shall sail together until you get your +next step," the captain said. "I could not wish for a better first +officer." + +"I want nothing better, sir. She is a fine ship, well manned and well +commanded. I begin to feel at home in her now; at first I didn't. I +hate changes; and though the last captain I sailed with was a surly +fellow, we got on very well together. I would rather sail with a man +like that than with a skipper who is always talking. I am a silent man +myself, and am quite content to eat my meal and enjoy it, without +having to stop every time I am putting my fork into my mouth to answer +some question or other. I was once six months up in the north without +ever speaking to a soul. I was whaling then, and a snow-storm came on +when we were fast on to a fish. It was twenty-four hours before it +cleared off, and when it did there was no ship to be seen. We were in +an inlet at the time in Baffin's Bay. We thought that the ship would +come back, and we landed and hauled up the boat. The ship didn't come +back, and, as I learned long afterwards, was never heard of again. I +suppose she got nipped between two icebergs. + +"Winter was coming on fast, and the men all agreed that they would +rather try and make their way south overland than stay there. I told +them that they were fools, but I admit that the prospect of a winter +there was enough to frighten any man. I did not like it myself, but I +thought it was wiser to remain there than to move. Some of the men went +along the shore, or out in the boat, and managed to kill several +sea-cows. They made a sledge, piled the meat on it, and started. + +"Meanwhile I had been busy building a sort of hut. I piled great stones +against the foot of the cliffs, and turned the boat upside down to form +a roof. The men helped me to do that job the last thing before they +started. Then I blocked up the entrance, leaving only just room for me +to crawl in and out. The snow began to fall steadily three days after +the others had gone, and very soon covered my hut two feet deep. I +melted the blubber of the whale in the boat's baler, for we had towed +the fish ashore. The first potful or two I boiled over a few bits of +drift-wood. After that it was easy enough, as I unravelled some of the +boat's rope, dipped it in the hot blubber, and made a store of big +candles. There was a lot of meat left on the sea-cows, so I cut that +up, froze it, and stowed as much as I could in the hut. I was bothered +about the rest, as I knew the bears were likely to come down; but I +found a ledge on the face of the perpendicular rock, and by putting the +boat's mast against it I was able to get up to it. Here I piled, I +should say, a ton of meat and blubber. Then I set to work and collected +some dried grass, and soon I had enough to serve as bed and covers. It +took me a month to do all this, and by that time winter was down on me +in earnest. I had spent my evenings in making myself, out of the skins +of the three cows, breeches, high boots, and a coat with a hood over +the head, and in order to make these soft I rubbed them with hot oil. +They were rough things, but I hoped that I might get a bear later on. +Fortunately the boat had two balers, for I required one in which to +melt the snow over the lamp. + +"Well, sir, I lived there during that winter. I did not find it +altogether dull, for I had several bits of excitement. For a month or +so bears and wolves came down and fought over the carcass of the whale. +When that was eaten up they turned their attention to me, and over and +over again they tried to break in. They had better have left me alone, +for though they were strong enough to have pulled away the rocks that +blocked the entrance, they could not stand fire. As I had any amount of +rope, I used to soak it in rock-oil, set it on fire, and shove it out +of the entrance. Twice small bears managed to wriggle up the passage, +but I had sharpened the boat-hook and managed to kill them both. One +skin made me a whole suit, and the other a first-rate blanket. Not that +it was ever unpleasantly cold, for a couple of my big candles, and the +thick coating of snow over it, kept the place as warm as I cared for. +Occasionally, when the bears had cleared off, I went out, climbed the +mast, and got fresh supplies down. They had made desperate efforts to +get at the meat, but the face of the rock was luckily too smooth for +them to get any hold. When spring came and the ice broke up, I planted +the mast on the top of the cliff with the sail fastened as a flag, and +a month after the sea was clear a whaler came in and took me off. That +was how I pretty well lost the use of my tongue, and though I am better +than I was, I don't use it much now except on duty." + +"That certainly accounts for it," Harry said; "you must have had an +awful time." + +"I don't think I minded it very much, sir. Except when I was bothered +by the bears I slept a good lot. I think at first I used to talk out +loud a good deal. But I soon dropped that, though I used to whistle +sometimes when I was cooking the food. I don't think I should have held +on so long if I had only had the sea-cow flesh, but the bears made a +nice change, and I only wished that one or two more had managed to +crawl in." + +"I wonder you were able to kill them with a boat-hook." + +"I didn't, sir. You know every whaler carries an axe to cut the line if +necessary, and I was able to split their skulls as they crawled in +before they could get fairly on to their feet and use their paws. I was +getting very weak with scurvy towards the end; but as soon as the snow +melted plants began to shoot, and I was able to collect green stuff, so +that I was nearly well by the time I was picked up." + +The weather continued fine all the time they were coasting up the +Chilian coast. They were a week at Valparaiso getting out the cargo +they had brought for that town, and did some trading at smaller ports; +but at last, just four months after leaving England, they dropped +anchor off Callao. "Well, it has been a jolly voyage, Harry," his +brother said as they were rowed ashore, after a hearty farewell from +the captain and the first officer. + +"I am glad you enjoyed it, Bertie. I was sorry all the time I hadn't +taken a passage for you aft." + +"I am better pleased to have been at work; it would have been awfully +slow otherwise. The mates were both good fellows, and I got on well +with the other apprentices. I tried at first not to turn out on night +watch, as I was not obliged to do so, but I soon gave it up; it seemed +disgusting to be lying there when the others had to turn out. It has +been a jolly voyage, but I am glad that we are here at last, and are +going to set to work in search of treasures." + +"I had begun to think that we should not get on shore to-day," Harry +said as they neared the landing-place. "What with three hours' waiting +for the medical officer, and another three for that bumptious official +whom they call the port officer, and without whose permission no one is +allowed to land, I think everyone on board was so disgusted that we +should have liked nothing better than to pitch the fellow overboard. It +was rather amusing to watch all those boatmen crowding round shouting +the praises of their own craft and running down the others. But a +little of it goes a long way. It is the same pretty nearly at every +port I have entered. Boatmen are harpies of the worst kind. It is lucky +that we had so little baggage; a tip of a couple of dollars was enough +to render the custom-house officer not only civil but servile." + +As they mounted the steps they were assailed by a motley crowd, half of +whom struggled to get near them to hold out their hands for alms, while +the other half struggled and fought for the right of carrying their +baggage. Accustomed to such scenes, Harry at once seized upon two of +them, gave them the portmanteaux, and, keeping behind them, pushed them +through the crowd, telling them to lead the way to the hotel that the +captain had recommended as being the least filthy in the place. They +crossed a square covered with goods of all kinds. There were long rows +of great jars filled with native spirit, bales of cinchona bark, piles +of wheat from Chili, white and rose-coloured blocks of salt, pyramids +of unrefined sugar, and a block of great bars of silver; among these +again were bales and boxes landed from foreign countries, logs of +timber, and old anchors and chains. Numbers of people who appeared to +have nothing to do sauntered about or sat on logs. In odd corners were +native women engaged in making the picanties upon which the poor +largely exist; these were composed of fresh and salt meat, potatoes, +crabs, the juice of bitter oranges, lard, salt, and an abundance of +pepper pods. + +"That is the sort of thing we shall have to eat, Bertie." + +"Well, I should not mind if I had not got to look on at the making; +they smell uncommonly good." + +The hotel was larger and even more dirty than the captain's description +had led them to expect. However, the dinner that was served to them was +better than they had looked for, and being very hungry after their long +wait, they did full justice to it. + +"It might have been a good deal worse, Bertie." + +"I should think so; after four months of salt junk it is splendid!" + +A cup of really good coffee, followed by a little glass of native +spirits, added to their satisfaction. They had hesitated before whether +to push on at once to Lima or wait there till next morning. Their meal +decided them--they would start at daybreak, so as to get to Lima before +the sun became really hot. Harry asked the landlord to bargain for two +riding mules and one for baggage to be ready at that hour, and they +then strolled out to view the place, although Bertie assured his +brother that there was nothing whatever to see in it. + +"That may be, Bertie; but we are not going to begin by being lazy. +There is always something to see in foreign lands by those who keep +their eyes open." + +After an hour's walk Harry was inclined to think that his brother was +right. The houses were generally constructed of canes, plastered with +mud, and painted yellow. As the result of earthquakes, scarce a house +stood upright--some leaned sideways, and looked as if they were going +to topple over into the road; while others leaned back, as if, were you +to push against them, they would collapse and crush the inmates. + +Their night was not a pleasant one. The beds were simple, consisting +only of hides stretched across wooden frames, but, as they very +speedily found, there were numerous other inhabitants. They therefore +slept but little, and were heartily glad when the first gleam of dawn +appeared. + +Slipping on their clothes, they ran down to the shore and had a bath. +By the time they returned breakfast was ready--coffee, fish, and eggs. +The mules did not appear for another hour, by which time their patience +was all but exhausted. The portmanteaux were speedily strapped on to +the back of the baggage mule, and they mounted the two others. The +muleteer had brought one for himself, and, fastening the baggage animal +behind it, they started. + +It was six miles to Lima, but as the city is five hundred and twelve +feet above the sea, the ascent was steady and somewhat steep. The road +was desperately bad, and the country uninteresting, being for the most +part dried up. Occasionally they saw great mounds of adobe bricks, the +remains of the ancient habitations. As they neared the town vegetation +became general, small canals irrigating the country. Here were fruit +and vegetable gardens, with oranges, plantains, vines, and flowers. + +Passing through a gate in the walls they entered the town, which +afforded a pleasant contrast to the squalid misery of Callao. The city, +however, could not be called imposing; the houses were low and +irregular, fantastically painted in squares or stripes, and almost all +had great balconies shut in with trellis-work. + +Few of the houses had any windows towards the street, the larger ones +being constructed with a central courtyard, into which the rooms all +opened. The streets were all built at right angles, the principal ones +leading from the grand square, in which stood the cathedral and the +palace of the Spanish viceroys, the other sides consisting of private +houses, with shops and arcades below them. The hotel to which they had +been recommended was a large building with a courtyard, with dining and +other rooms opening from it, and above them the bedrooms. In comparison +with the inn at Callao it was magnificent, but in point of cleanliness +it left a great deal to be desired. After settling themselves in their +room they went out. The change in temperature since they had left +Callao had been very great. + +"The first thing to do, Bertie, is to buy ourselves a couple of good +ponchos. You see all the natives are wearing them." + +"We certainly want something of the sort, Harry. I thought it was heat +that we were going to suffer from, but it seems just the other way. To +judge from the temperature we might be in Scotland, and this damp mist +chills one to the bone." + +"I am not much surprised, for of course I got the subject up as much as +I could before starting; and Barnett told me that Lima was altogether +an exceptional place, and that while it was bright and warm during the +winter months, from May till November on the plains only a few miles +away, even in the summer months there was almost always a clammy mist +at Lima, and that inside the house as well as outside everything +streamed with moisture. He said that this had never been satisfactorily +accounted for. Some say that it is due to the coldness of the river +here--the Rimac--which comes down from the snowy mountains. Others +think that the cold wind that always blows down the valley of the river +meets the winds from the sea here, and the moisture contained in them +is thus precipitated. I believe that a few miles higher up we shall get +out of this atmosphere altogether. Still, the ponchos will be very +useful, for it will be really cold up in the mountains. They serve for +cloaks in the daytime and blankets at night. The best are made of the +wool of the guanacos, a sort of llama. Their wool is very fine, and +before we start we will get two of coarser wool to use as blankets to +sleep on, while we have the finer ones to cover us." + +There was no difficulty in finding a shop with the goods they wanted, +and the prices, even of the best, were very moderate. They next bought +two soft felt hats with broad brims. + +"That is ever so much more comfortable. We will wait until to-morrow +before we begin what we may call business, Bertie. Of course I shall +deliver the other letters of introduction that Mr. Barnett gave me; but +the principal one--that to his former muleteer--is more important than +all put together. If anything has happened to him, there is an end of +any chance whatever of finding treasure. Of course he may have moved +away, or be absent on a journey with his mules, in which case we shall +have either to follow him or wait for his return." + +"That would be a frightful nuisance." + +"Yes; still, it is one of the things that we foresaw might happen." + +"I vote we go at once, Harry, and see if he is here." + +"I don't think we shall find him here; for Barnett said that he lived +in the village of Miraflores, five miles away on the north, and that if +he is not there, Senor Pasquez, to whom I have a letter, will be likely +to tell me where he is to be found, for he is often employed by him. +However, I am as anxious as you to see him. As it is only eleven +o'clock yet, there is no reason why we should not go to Miraflores. +They will get mules for us at the hotel, and tell us which road to +take." + +It was not necessary, however, to go into the hotel, for when they +returned, two or three men with mules were waiting to be hired. They +engaged two animals, and as the man of whom they hired them had a +third, and he was ready to accompany them for a small fee, they agreed +to take him with them. + +Before they were a mile out of the town the mist cleared off and the +sun shone brightly. The heat, however, was by no means too great to be +pleasant. Miraflores was a charming village, or rather small town, +nestling among gardens and orchards. + +"I want to find a muleteer named Dias Otero," Harry said to their guide +as they rode into the place. + +"I know him well," he said. "Everyone about here knows Dias. His wife +was a cousin of my mother's." + +"Do you know whether he is at home now?" + +"Yes, senor; I saw him in Lima three days ago. He had just come down +from the mountains. He had been away two months, and certainly will not +have started again so soon. Shall I lead you to his house at once?" + +"Do so; it is to see him that I have come to this town. He worked for a +long time with a friend of mine some years ago, and I have brought a +message from him. I may be some time talking with him, so when I go in +you can tie up your mules for a while." + +"That is his house," the man said presently. + +It lay in the outskirts of the town, and was neater than the generality +of houses, and the garden was a mass of flowers. They dismounted, +handed over the mules to their owner, and walked to the door. An Indian +of some five-and-forty years came out as they did so. + +"Are you Dias Otero?" Harry asked. + +"The same, senor." + +"I have just arrived from England, and bring a letter to you from Senor +Barnett, with whom you travelled for two or three years some time ago." + +The man's face lit up with pleasure. "Will you enter, senor. Friends of +Senor Barnett may command my services in any way. It is a delight to +hear from him. He writes to me sometimes, but in these troubles letters +do not always come. I love the senor; there never was a kinder master. +He once saved my life at the risk of his own. Is there any hope of his +coming out again?" + +"I do not think so, Dias. He is strong and well, but I do not think he +is likely to start again on a journey of exploration. He is my greatest +friend. My brother and I were left under his charge when we were young, +and he has been almost a father to us. It is he who has sent us out to +you. Here is his letter." + +"Will you read it to me, senor. I cannot read; I am always obliged to +get somebody to read my letters, and write answers for me." + +The letter was of course in Spanish, and Harry read: + +"Dear friend Dias, + +"I am sending out to you a gentleman, Mr. Prendergast, an officer of +the British Navy, in whom I am deeply interested. His brother +accompanies him. I beg that you will treat them as you would me, and +every service you can render him consider as rendered to myself. From a +reason which he will no doubt explain to you in time, it is of the +deepest importance to him that he should grow rich in the course of the +next two years. He asked my advice, and I said to him, 'There is no one +I know of who could possibly put you in the way of so doing better than +my friend Dias Otero. I believe it is in his power to do so if he is +willing.' I also believe that for my sake you will aid him. He will +place himself wholly in your hands. He does not care what danger he +runs, or what hardships he has to go through in order to attain his +purpose. I know that I need not say more to you. He has two years +before him; long before that I am sure you will be as interested in him +as you were in me. He has sufficient means to pay all expenses of +travel for the time he will be out there. I know that you are descended +from nobles of high rank at the court of the Incas when the Spaniards +arrived, and that secrets known to but few were passed down from father +to son in your family. If you can use any of those secrets to the +advantage of my friend, I pray you most earnestly to do so. I trust +that this letter will find you and your good wife in health. Had I been +ten years younger I would have come out with my friends to aid them in +their adventure, but I know that in putting them into your hands I +shall be doing them a vastly greater service than I could do were I +able to come in person." + +When Harry ceased, the Indian sat for some time without speaking, then +he said: + +"It is a matter that I must think over, senor. It is a very grave one, +and had any other man than Senor Barnett asked this service of me no +money could have tempted me to assent to it. It is not only that my +life would be in danger, but that my name would be held up to +execration by all my people were I to divulge the secret that even the +tortures of the Spaniards could not wring from us. I must think it over +before I answer. I suppose you are staying at the Hotel Morin; I will +call and see you when I have thought the matter over. It is a grave +question, and it may be three or four days before I can decide." + +"I thank you, Dias; but there is no occasion for you to give a final +decision now. Whether or no, we shall travel for a while, and I trust +that you will go with us with your mules and be our guide, as you did +to Mr. Barnett. It will be time enough when you know us better to give +us a final answer; it is not to be expected that even for Senor +Barnett's sake you would do this immense service for strangers, +therefore I pray you to leave the matter open. Make arrangements for +your mules and yourself for a three months' journey in the mountains, +show us what there is to see of the gold and silver placers, and the +quicksilver mines at Huanuco. At the end of that time you will know us +and can say whether you are ready to aid us in our search." + +The native bowed his head gravely. + +"I will think it over," he said; "and now, senors, let us put that +aside. My wife has been busy since you entered in preparing a simple +meal, and I ask you to honour me by partaking of it." + +"With pleasure, Dias." + +It consisted of _puchero_, a stew consisting of a piece of beef, +cabbage, sweet-potatoes, salt pork, sausage-meat, pigs' feet, yuccas, +bananas, quinces, peas, rice, salt, and an abundance of Chili peppers. +This had been cooked for six hours and was now warmed up. Two bottles +of excellent native wine, a flask of spirits, and some water were also +put on the table. The Indian declined to sit down with them, saying +that he had taken a meal an hour before. + +While they ate he chatted with them, asking questions of their voyage +and telling them of the state of things in the country. + +"It is always the same, senors, there is a revolution and two or three +battles; then either the president or the one who wants to be president +escapes from the country or is taken and shot, and in a day or two +there is a fresh pronunciamiento. We thought that when the Spaniards +had been driven out we should have had peace, but it is not so; we have +had San Martin, and Bolivar, and Aguero, and Santa Cruz, and Sucre. +Bolivar again finally defeated the Spaniards at Ayacucho. Rodil held +possession of Callao castle, and defended it until January of this +year. We in the villages have not suffered--those who liked fighting +went out with one or other of the generals; some have returned, others +have been killed--but Lima has suffered greatly. Sometimes the people +have taken one side, sometimes the other, and though the general they +supported was sometimes victorious for a short time, in the end they +suffered. Most of the old Spanish families perished; numbers died in +the castle of Callao, where many thousands of the best blood of Lima +took refuge, and of these well-nigh half died of hunger and misery +before Rodil surrendered." + +"But does not this make travelling very unsafe?" + +The Indian shrugged his shoulders. + +"Peru is a large country, senor, and those who want to keep out of the +way of the armies and lighting can do so; I myself have continued my +occupation and have never fallen in with the armies. That is because +the fighting is principally in the plains, or round Cuzco; for the men +do not go into the mountains except as fugitives, as they could not +find food there for an army. It is these fugitives who render the road +somewhat unsafe; starving men must take what they can get. They do not +interfere with the great silver convoys from Potosi or other mines--a +loaf of bread is worth more than a bar of silver in the mountains--but +they will plunder persons coming down with goods to the town or going +up with their purchases. Once or twice I have had to give up the food I +carried with me, but I have had little to grumble at, and I do not +think you need trouble yourself about them; we will take care to avoid +them as far as possible." + +After chatting for an hour they left the cottage, and, mounting their +mules, returned to Lima. + +"I think he will help us, Harry," Bertie said as soon as they set out. + +"I think so too, but we must not press him to begin with. Of course +there is a question too as to how far he can help us. He may know +vaguely where the rich mines once existed; but you must remember that +they have been lost for three hundred years, and it may be impossible +for even a man who has received the traditions as to their positions to +hit upon the precise spot. The mountains, you see, are tremendous; +there must be innumerable ravines and gorges among them. It is certain +that nothing approaching an accurate map can ever have been made of the +mountains, and I should say that in most cases the indications that may +have been given are very vague. They would no doubt have been +sufficient for those who lived soon after the money was hidden, and +were natives of that part of the country and thoroughly acquainted with +all the surroundings, but when the information came to be handed down +from mouth to mouth during many generations, the local knowledge would +be lost, and what were at first detailed instructions would become +little better than vague legends. You know how three hundred years will +alter the face of a country--rocks roll down the hills, torrents wash +away the soil, forests grow or are cleared away. I believe with you +that the Indian will do his best, but I have grave doubts whether he +will be able to locate any big thing." + +"Well, you don't take a very cheerful view of things, Harry; you +certainly seemed more hopeful when we first started." + +"Yes. I don't say I am not hopeful still, but it is one thing to plan +out an enterprise at a distance and quite another when you are face to +face with its execution. As we have come down the coast, and seen that +great range of mountains stretching along for hundreds of miles, and we +know that there is another quite as big lying behind it, I have begun +to realize the difficulties of the adventures that we are undertaking. +However, we shall hear, when Dias comes over to see us, what he thinks +of the matter. I fancy he will say that he is willing to go with us and +help us as far as he can, but that although he will do his best he +cannot promise that he will be able to point out, with anything like +certainty, the position of any of the old mines." + +Next day they called on Senor Pasquez, who received them very cordially. + +"So you are going to follow the example of Senor Barnett and spend some +time in exploring the country and doing some shooting. Have you found +Dias?" + +"Yes, senor, and I think he will go with us, though he has not given a +positive answer." + +"You will be fortunate if you get him; he is one of the best-known +muleteers in the country, and if anyone comes here and wants a guide +Dias is sure to be the first to be recommended. If he goes with you he +can give you much useful advice; he knows exactly what you will have to +take with you, the best districts to visit for your purpose, and the +best way of getting there. For the rest, I shall be very happy to take +charge of any money you may wish to leave behind, and to act as your +banker and cash any orders you may draw upon me. I will also receive +and place to your account any sums that may be sent you from England." + +"That, sir, is a matter which Mr. Barnett advised me to place in your +hands. After making what few purchases we require, and taking fifty +pounds in silver, I shall have two hundred and fifty pounds to place in +your hands. Mr. Barnett will manage my affairs in my absence, and will +send to you fifty pounds quarterly." + +"You will find difficulty in spending it all in two years," the +merchant said with a smile. "If you are content to live on what can be +bought in the country, it costs very little; and as for the mules, they +can generally pick up enough at their halting-places to serve them, +with a small allowance of grain. You can hire them cheaply, or you can +buy them. The latter is cheaper in the end, but you cannot be sure of +getting mules accustomed to mountains, and you would therefore run the +risk of their losing their foothold, and not only being dashed to +pieces but destroying their saddles and loads. However, if you secure +the services of Dias Otero, you will get mules that know every path in +the mountains. He is famous for his animals, and he himself is +considered the most trusty muleteer here; men think themselves lucky in +obtaining his services. I would send him with loads of uncounted gold +and should be sure that there would not be a piece missing." + +Next day Dias came to the hotel. + +"I have thought it over, senor," he said. "I need not say that were it +only ordinary service, instead of exploring the mountains, I should be +glad indeed to do my best for a friend of Senor Barnett; but as to the +real purpose of your journey I wish, before making any arrangement, +that the matter should be thoroughly understood. I have no certain +knowledge whatever as to any of the lost mines, still less of any +hidden treasures; but I know all the traditions that have passed down +concerning them. I doubt whether any Indians now possess a certain +knowledge of these things. For generations, no doubt, the secrets were +handed down from father to son, and it is possible that some few may +still know of these places; but I doubt it. Think of the hundreds and +thousands of our people who have been killed in battle, or died as +slaves in the mines, and you will see that numbers of those to whom the +secrets were entrusted must have taken their knowledge to the grave +with them. + +"In each generation the number of those who knew the particulars of +these hiding-places must have diminished. Few now can know more than I +do, yet I am sure of nothing. I know generally where the mines were +situated and where some treasures were concealed, and what knowledge I +have I will place at your service; but so great a care was used in the +concealment of the entrances to the mines, so carefully were the +hiding-places of the treasures chosen, and so cunningly concealed, +that, without the surest indications and the most minute instructions, +we might search for years, as men indeed have done ever since the +Spanish came here, without finding them. I am glad that I can lay my +hand upon my heart and say, that whatever may have been possessed by +ancestors of mine, no actual details have ever come down to me; for, +had it been so, I could not have revealed them to you. We know that all +who were instructed in these were bound by the most terrible oaths not +to reveal them. Numbers have died under the torture rather than break +those oaths; and even now, were one of us to betray the secrets that +had come down to him, he would be regarded as accursed. No one would +break bread with him, every door would be closed against him, and if he +died his body would rot where it fell. But my knowledge is merely +general, gathered not only from the traditions known to all our people, +but from confidences made by one member of our family to another. Full +knowledge was undoubtedly given to some of them; but all these must +have died without initiating others into the full particulars. Such +knowledge as I have is at your disposal. I can take you to the +localities, I can say to you, 'Near this place was a great mine,' but +unless chance favours you you may search in vain." + +"That is quite as much as I had hoped for, Dias, and I am grateful for +your willingness to do what you can for us, just as you did for Senor +Barnett." + + + + +CHAPTER IV + +A STREET FRAY + + +"Now, senor," Dias said, "as we have settled the main point, let us +talk over the arrangements. What is the weight of your baggage?" + +"Not more than a mule could carry. Of course we shall sling our rifles +over our shoulders. We have a good stock of ammunition for them and for +our pistols. We shall each take two suits of clothes besides those we +wear, and a case of spirits in the event of accident or illness. We +shall each have three flannel shirts, stockings, and so on, but +certainly everything belonging to us personally would not mount up to +more than a hundred and fifty pounds. We should, of course, require a +few cooking utensils, tin plates, mugs, and cups. What should we need +besides these?" + +"A tent and bedding, senor. We should only have, at the start, to carry +such provisions as we could not buy. When we are beyond the range of +villages in the forests we might often be weeks without being able to +buy anything; still, we should probably be able to shoot game for food. +We should find fruits, but flour we shall have to take with us from the +last town we pass through before we strike into the mountains, and +dried meat for an emergency; and it would be well to have a bag of +grain, so that we could give a handful or so to each of the mules. I am +glad you have brought some good spirits--we shall need it in the swamps +by the rivers. Your tea and coffee will save your having to buy them +here, but you will want some sugar. We must take two picks and a +shovel, a hammer for breaking up ore, a small furnace, twenty crucibles +and bellows, and a few other things for aiding to melt the ore. You +would want for the journey five baggage mules, and, of course, three +riding mules. I could hardly manage them, even with aid from you, in +very bad places, and I would rather not take any strange man with me on +such business as we have in hand. But some assistance I must have, and +I will take with me my nephew Jose. He has lost his father, and I have +taken him as my assistant, and shall train him to be a guide such as I +am. He is but fifteen, but he already knows something of his business, +and such an expedition will teach him more than he would learn in ten +years on the roads." + +"That would certainly be far better than having a muleteer whom you +could not trust, Dias. My brother and myself will be ready to lend you +a hand whenever you want help of any kind. We have not had any +experience with mules, but sailors can generally turn their hands to +anything. Now, how about the eight mules?" + +"I have five of my own, as good mules as are to be found in the +province; we shall have to buy the three others for riding. Of course I +have saddles and ropes." + +"But you will want four for riding." + +"No, senor; yours and the one I ride will be enough. Jose at times will +take my place, and can when he likes perch on one of the most lightly +laden animals." + +"How much will the riding mules cost?" + +"I can get fair ones for about fifty dollars apiece; trade is slack at +present owing to the troubles, and there are many who would be glad to +get rid of one or two of their train." + +"And now, Dias, we come to the very important question, what are we to +pay you for yourself, your nephew, and the five mules--say by the +month?" + +"I have been thinking the matter over, senor--I have talked it over +with my wife"--he paused for a moment, and then said: "She wishes to go +with me, senor." + +Harry opened his eyes in surprise. "But surely, Dias, you could not +think of taking her on such an expedition, where, as you say yourself, +you may meet with many grave dangers and difficulties?" + +"A woman can support them as well as a man," Dias said quietly. "My +wife has more than once accompanied me on journeys when I have been +working on contract. We have been married for fifteen years, and she +has no children to keep her at home. She is accustomed to my being away +for weeks. This would be for months, perhaps for two years. I made no +secret to her that we might meet with many dangers. She says they will +be no greater for her than for me. At first she tried to dissuade me +from going for so long a time; but when I told her that you were sent +me by the gentleman who saved my life a year after I married her, and +that he had recommended you to me as standing to him almost in the +relation of a son, and I therefore felt bound to carry his wishes into +effect, and so to pay the debt of gratitude that I owed him, she agreed +at once that it was my duty to go and do all in my power for you, and +she prayed me to take her with me. I said that I would put it before +you, senor, and that I must abide by your decision." + +"By all means bring her with you, Dias. If you and she are both willing +to share the dangers we should meet with, surely we cannot object in +any way." + +"Thank you, senor; you will find her useful. You have already seen that +she can cook well; and if we have Jose to look after the animals when +we are searching among the hills, you will find it not unpleasant, when +we return of an evening, to find a hot supper ready for us." + +"That is quite true, and I am sure we shall find your wife a great +acquisition to our party. The only difference will be, that instead of +one large tent we must have two small ones--it does not matter how +small, so long as we can crawl into them and they are long enough for +us to lie down. And now about payment?" + +"I shall not overcharge you," Dias said with a smile. "If my wife had +remained behind I must have asked for money to maintain her while we +were away. It would not have been much, for she has her garden and her +house, and there is a bag hid away with my savings, so that if she had +been widowed she could still live in the house until she chose someone +else to share it with her; she is but thirty-two, and is as comely as +when I first married her. However, as she is going with us, there will +be no need to trouble about her. If misfortune comes upon us and I am +killed, it is likely she will be killed also. We shall have no expenses +on the journey, as you will pay for food for ourselves and the animals. +You will remember, senor, that I make this journey not as a business +matter--no money would buy from me any information that I may have as +to hidden mines or treasures,--I do it to repay a debt of gratitude to +my preserver, Don Henry Barnett, and partly because I am sure that I +shall like you and your brother as I did him. I shall aid you as far as +lies in my power in the object for which you are undertaking this +journey. Therefore until it is finished there shall be no talk about +payment. You may have many expenses beyond what you calculate upon. If +we meet with no success, and return to Lima empty-handed, I shall have +lost nothing. I shall have had no expenses at home, my wife and I will +have fed at your expense, and Jose will have learned so much that he +would be as good a guide as any in the country. You could then give me +the three mules you will buy, to take the place of any of mine that may +have perished on the journey, and should you have them to spare, I will +take a hundred dollars as a _bueno mano_. If we succeed, and you +discover a rich mine or a hidden treasure, you shall then pay me what +it pleases you. Is it a bargain?" + +"The bargain you propose is ridiculously one-sided, Dias, and I don't +see how I could possibly accept the offer you make to me." + +"Those are my terms, senor," Dias said simply, "to take or to leave." + +"Then I cannot but accept them, and I thank you most heartily;" and he +held out his hand to Dias, and the Indian grasped it warmly. + +"When do you propose we shall start?" + +"Will this day week suit you, senor? There are the mules to buy, and +the tents to be made--they should be of vicuna skin with the wool still +on, which, with the leather kept well oiled, will keep out water. We +shall want them in the hills, but we shall sometimes find villages +where we can sleep in shelter." + +"Not for us, Dias. Mr. Barnett has told me that the houses are for the +most part alive with fleas, and I should prefer to sleep in a tent, +however small, rather than lie in a bed on the floor of any one of +them. We don't want thick beds, you know--a couple of thicknesses of +well-quilted cotton, say an inch thick each, and two feet wide. You can +get these made for us, no doubt." + +The Indian nodded. + +"That would be the best for travel; the beds the Peruvian caballeros +use are very thick and bulky." + +"You will want two for yourself and your wife, and two for Jose. By the +by, we shall want a tent for him." + +Dias smiled. "It will not be necessary, senor; muleteers are accustomed +to sleep in the open air, and with two thick blankets, and a leathern +coverlet in case of rain, he will be more than comfortable. I shall +have five leather bags made to hold the beds and blankets. But the +making of the beds and tents will take some time--people do not hurry +in Lima,--and there will be the riding saddles and bridles to get, and +the provisions. I do not think we can be ready before another week. It +will be well, then, that you should, before starting away, visit the +ruins of Pachacamac. All travellers go there, and it will seem only +natural that you should do so, for there you will see the style of the +buildings, and also the explorations that were everywhere made by the +Spaniards in search of treasure." + +"Very well, Dias; then this day week we shall be ready to start. +However, I suppose I shall see you every day, and learn how you are +getting on with your preparations." + +Bertie had been sitting at the window looking down into the street +while this conversation was going on. "Well, what is it all about?" he +asked, turning round as the Indian left the room. "Is it satisfactory?" + +"More than satisfactory," his brother answered. "In the first place his +nephew, a lad of fifteen, who is training as a mule-driver, is going +with us, which is much better than getting an outsider; in the next +place his wife is going with us." + +"Good gracious!" Bertie exclaimed, "what in the world shall we do with +a woman?" + +"Well, I think we shall do very well with her, Bertie; but well or ill +she has to go. She will not let her husband go without her, which is +natural enough, considering how long we shall be away, and that the +journey will be a dangerous one. But really I think she will be an +acquisition to the party. She is bright and pretty, as you no doubt +noticed, and what is of more importance, she is a capital cook." + +"She certainly gave us a good meal yesterday," Bertie said, "and though +I could rough it on anything, it is decidedly pleasanter to have a +well-cooked meal." + +"Well, you see, that is all right." + +"And how many mules are we to take?" + +"Five for baggage, and three for riding. I have no doubt Dias's wife +will ride behind him, and the boy, when he wants to ride, will perch +himself on one of the baggage mules. Dias has five mules, and we shall +only have to buy the three for riding." + +"What is it all going to cost, Harry?" Bertie said when his brother had +told him all the arrangements that had been made. "That is the most +important point after all." + +"Well, you will be astonished when I tell you, Bertie, that if we don't +succeed in finding a treasure of any kind I shall only have to pay for +the three riding mules, and the expenses of food and so on, and a +hundred dollars." + +"Twenty pounds!" Bertie said incredulously; "you are joking!" + +"No, it is really so; the man said that he considered that in going +with me he is only fulfilling the obligation he is under to Mr. +Barnett. Of course I protested against the terms, and would have +insisted upon paying the ordinary prices, whatever they might be, for +his services and the use of his mules; but he simply said that those +were the conditions on which he was willing to go with me, and that I +could take them or leave them, so I had to accept. I can only hope that +we may find some treasure, in which case only he consented to accept +proper payment for his services." + +"Well, it is awfully good of him," Bertie said; "though really it +doesn't seem fair that we should be having the services of himself, his +wife, his boy, and his mules for nothing. There is one thing, it will +be an extra inducement to him to try and put us in the way of finding +one of those mines." + +"I don't think so, Bertie; he said that not for any sum of money +whatever would he do what he is going to do, but simply from gratitude +to Barnett. It is curious how the traditions, or superstitions, or +whatever you like to call them, of the time of the Incas have continued +to impress the Indians, and how they have preserved the secrets +confided to their ancestors. No doubt fear that the Spaniards would +force them to work in the mines till they died has had a great effect +in inducing them to conceal the existence of these places from them. +Now that the Spaniards have been cleared out there is no longer any +ground for apprehension of that kind, but they may still feel that the +Peruvians would get the giant's share in any mine or treasure that +might be found, and that the Indians would, under one pretence or +another, be defrauded out of any share of it. It is not wonderful that +it should be so considering how these poor people have been treated by +the whites, and it would really seem that the way in which Spain has +gone to the dogs is a punishment for her cruelties in South America and +the Islands. It may be said that from the very moment when the gold +began to flow the descent of Spain commenced; in spite of the enormous +wealth she acquired she fell gradually from her position as the +greatest power in Europe. + +"In 1525, after the battle of Pavia, Spain stood at the height of her +power. Mexico was conquered by Cortez seven years before, Peru in 1531, +and the wealth of those countries began to flow into Spain in enormous +quantities, and yet her decline followed speedily. She was bearded by +our bucaneers among the Islands and on the western coast; the +Netherlands revolted, and after fierce fighting threw off her yoke; the +battle of Ivry and the accession of Henry of Navarre all but destroyed +her influence in France; the defeat of the Armada and the capture of +Cadiz struck a fatal blow both to her power on the sea and to her +commerce, and within a century of the conquest of Peru, Spain was +already an enfeebled and decaying power. It would almost seem that the +discoveries of Columbus, from which such great things were hoped, +proved in the long run the greatest misfortune that ever befell Spain." + +"It does look like it, Harry; however, we must hope that whatever +effect the discovery of America had upon Portugal or Spain, it will +make your fortune." + +Harry laughed. + +"I hope so, Bertie, but it is as well not to be too hopeful. Still, I +have great faith in Dias, at any rate I feel confident that he will do +all he can; but he acknowledges that he knows nothing for certain. I am +sure, however, that he will be a faithful guide, and that though we may +have a rough time, it will not be an unpleasant one. Now, you must +begin to turn to account what Spanish you have learned during the +voyage; I know you have worked regularly at it while you have not been +on duty." + +"I have learned a good lot," Bertie said; "and I dare say I could ask +for anything, but I should not understand the answers. I can make out a +lot of that Spanish _Don Quixote_ you got for me, but when Dias was +talking to you I did not catch a word of what he was saying. I suppose +it will all come in time." + +"But you must begin at once. I warn you that when I am fairly off I +shall always talk to you in Spanish, for it would look very unsociable +if we were always talking together in English. If you ride or walk by +the side of the boy you will soon get on; and there will be Donna Maria +for you to chat away with, and from what we saw of her I should say she +is sociably inclined. In three months I have no doubt you will talk +Spanish as well as I do." + +"It will be a horrid nuisance," Bertie grumbled; "but I suppose it has +got to be done." + +Three days later Dias said he thought they might as well start the next +day to Pachacamac. + +"We shall only want the three riding mules and one for baggage. Of +course we shall not take Jose or my wife. By the time we return +everything will be ready for us." + +"I shall be very glad to be off, Dias. We know no one here except Senor +Pasquez; and although he has been very civil and has begged us to +consider his house as our own, he is of course busy during the day, and +one can't do above a certain amount of walking about the streets. So by +all means let us start to-morrow morning. We may as well go this time +in the clothes we wear, it will be time enough to put on the things we +have bought when we start in earnest." + +Starting at sunrise, they rode for some distance through a fertile +valley, and then crossed a sandy plain until they reached the little +valley of Lurin, in which stand the ruins of Pachacamac. This was the +sacred city of the natives of the coast before their conquest by the +Incas. During their forty-mile ride Dias had told them something of the +place they were about to visit. Pachacamac, meaning "the creator of the +world," was the chief divinity of these early people, and here was the +great temple dedicated to him. The Incas after their conquest erected a +vast Temple of the Sun, but they did not attempt to suppress the +worship of Pachacamac, and the two flourished side by side until the +arrival of the Spaniards. The wealth of the temple was great; the +Spaniards carried away among their spoils one thousand six hundred and +eighty-seven pounds of gold and one thousand six hundred ounces of +silver; but with all their efforts they failed to discover the main +treasure, said to have been no less than twenty-four thousand eight +hundred pounds of gold, which had been carried away and buried before +their arrival. + +"If the Spaniards could not succeed in getting at the hiding-place, +although, no doubt, they tortured everyone connected with the temple to +make them divulge the secret, it is evident there is no chance for us," +Harry said. + +"Yes, senor, they made every effort; thousands of natives were employed +in driving passages through the terraces on which the temple stood. I +believe that they did find much treasure, but certainly not the great +one they were searching for. There is no tradition among our people as +to the hiding-place, for so many of the natives perished that all to +whom the secret was known must have died without revealing it to +anybody. Had it not been so, the Spaniards would sooner or later have +learned it, for although hundreds have died under torture rather than +reveal any of the hiding-places, surely one more faint-hearted than the +rest would have disclosed them. Certain it is that at Cuzco and other +places they succeeded in obtaining almost all the treasures buried +there, though they failed in discovering the still greater treasures +that had been carried away to be hidden in different spots. But +Pachacamac was a small one in comparison with Cuzco, and it was +believed that the treasures had not been carried far. Tradition has it +that they were buried somewhere between this town and Lima. Doubtless +all concerned in the matter fled before the Spaniards arrived, at any +rate with all their cruelty the invaders never discovered its position. +The report that it was buried near may have been set about to prevent +their hunting for it elsewhere, and the gold may be lying now somewhere +in the heart of the mountains." + +Harry Prendergast and his brother looked in astonishment at the massive +walls that rose around the eminence on which the temple had stood. The +latter had disappeared, but its situation could be traced on the +plateau buttressed by the walls. These were of immense thickness, and +formed of huge adobe bricks almost as hard as stone; even the long +efforts of the Spaniards had caused but little damage to them. The +plateau rose some five hundred feet above the sea, which almost washed +one face of it. Half-way up the hill four series of these massive +walls, whose tops formed terraces, stood in giant steps some fifty feet +high. Here and there spots of red paint could be seen, showing that the +whole surface was originally painted. The ascent was made by winding +passages through the walls. On the side of the upper area facing the +sea could be seen the remains of a sort of walk or esplanade, with +traces of edifices of various kinds. On a hill a mile and a half away +were the remains of the Incas' temple and nunnery, the style differing +materially from that of the older building; it was still more damaged +than the temple on the hill by the searchers for treasure. + +Pachacamac was the most sacred spot in South America, vast numbers of +pilgrims came here from all points. The city itself had entirely +disappeared, covered deeply in sand, but for a long distance round, it +had, like the neighbourhood of Jerusalem and Mecca, been a vast +cemetery, and a small amount of excavation showed the tombs of the +faithful, occupied in most cases by mummies. + +"We will ride across to the Incas' temple. There is not much to see +there, but it is as well that you should look at the vaults in which +the treasures were hid. There are similar places at Cuzco and several +of the other ruins." + +"It may certainly be useful to see them," Harry agreed, and they rode +across the plain. Leaving their mules outside they entered the ruins. +The Indian led them into some underground chambers. He had brought a +torch with him, and this he now lit. + +"You have to be careful or you might otherwise tumble into one of these +holes and break a limb; and in that case, if you were here by +yourselves, you would certainly never get out again." + +They came upon several of these places. The openings were sometimes +square and sometimes circular, and had doubtless been covered with +square stones. They were dug out of the solid ground. For about six +feet the sides of the pit were perpendicular; in some it swelled out +like a great vase with a broad shoulder, in others it became a square +chamber of some size. + +"Some of these places were no doubt meant to store grain and other +provisions," the Indian said, "some were undoubtedly treasuries." + +"Awkward places to find," Harry said; "one might spend a lifetime in +searching for them in only one of these temples." + +"They were the last places we should think of searching," Dias said. +"For years the Spaniards kept thousands of men at work. I do not say +that there may not be some few places that have escaped the searchers, +but what they could not with their host of workers find certainly could +not be found by four or five men. It is not in the temples that the +Incas' wealth has been hidden, but in caves, in deep mountain gorges, +and possibly in ruins on the other side of the mountains where even the +Spaniards never penetrated. There are such places. I know of one to +which I will take you if our search fails elsewhere. It is near the +sea, and yet there are not half a dozen living men who have ever seen +it, so strangely is it hidden. Tradition says that it was not the work +of the Incas, but of the people before them. I have never seen it +close. It is guarded, they say, by demons, and no native would go +within miles of it. The traditions are that the Incas, when they +conquered the land, found the place and searched it, after starving out +the native chief who had fled there with his followers and family. Some +say that they found great treasure there, others that they discovered +nothing; all agree that a pestilence carried off nearly all those who +had captured it. Others went, and they too died, and the place was +abandoned as accursed, and in time its very existence became forgotten; +though some say that members of the tribe have always kept watch there, +and that those who carelessly or curiously approached it have always +met with their death in strange ways. Although I am a Christian, and +have been taught to disbelieve the superstitions of my countrymen, I +would not enter it on any condition." + +"If we happen to be near it I shall certainly take a close look at it," +Harry said with a laugh. "I don't fancy we should see anything that our +rifles and pistols would find invulnerable." + +It was getting dark by the time they had finished their inspection of +the rooms, so, riding two or three miles away, they encamped in a grove +up the valley. Next morning they returned to Lima. Dias had given out +that the two white senors intended to visit all the ruined temples of +the Incas, and as other travellers had done the same their intention +excited neither surprise nor comment. + +On the following evening after dark Harry and his brother were +returning from the house of Senor Pasquez. + +"It is a pleasant house," Harry said; "the girls are pretty and nice, +they play and sing well, and are really charming. But what a contrast +it was the other morning when we went in there and accidentally ran +against them when we were going upstairs with their father, utterly +untidy, and, in fact, regular sluts--a maid of all work would look a +picture of neatness beside them." + +Bertie was about to answer, when there was an outburst of shouts from a +wine-shop they were passing, and in a moment the door burst open and +half a dozen men engaged in a fierce conflict rushed out. Knives were +flashing, and it was evident that one man was being attacked by the +rest. By the light that streamed out of the open door they saw that the +man attacked was Dias. It flashed across Harry's mind that if this man +was killed there was an end to all hope of success in their expedition. + +"Dash in to his rescue, Bertie," he cried; "but whatever you do, mind +their knives." + +With a shout he sprang forward and struck to the ground a man who was +dodging behind Dias with uplifted knife, while Bertie leapt on to the +back of another, the shock throwing the man down face forward. Bertie +was on his feet in a moment, and brought the stick he carried with all +his force down on the man's head as he tried to rise. Then, springing +forward again, he struck another man a heavy blow on the wrist. The +knife dropped from the man's hand, and as he dashed with a fierce oath +upon Bertie the stick descended again, this time on his head, and +felled him to the ground. In the meantime one of the assailants had +turned fiercely on Harry and aimed a blow at him with his knife; but +with the ease of a practised boxer Harry stepped back, and before the +man could again raise the knife he leaped in and struck him a +tremendous blow on the point of his chin. The fifth man took to his +heels immediately. The other four lay where they had fallen, evidently +fearing they would be stabbed should they try to get on to their feet. + +"Are you hurt, Dias?" Harry exclaimed. + +"I have several cuts, senor, but none of them, I think, serious. You +have saved my life." + +"Never mind that now, Dias. What shall we do with these fellows--hand +them over to the watch?" + +"No, senor, that would be the last thing to do; we might be detained +here for months. I will take all their knives and let them go." + +"Here are two of them," Bertie said, picking up those of the men he had +struck. + +Dias stood over the man Harry had first knocked down, and with a fierce +whisper ordered him to give up his knife, which he did at once. The +other was still stupid from the effect of the blow and his fall, and +Dias had only to take his knife from his relaxed fingers. + +"Now, senor, let us be going before anyone comes along." + +"What was it all about, Dias?" Harry asked as he walked away. + +"Many of the muleteers are jealous, senor, because I always get what +they consider the best jobs. I had gone into the wine-shop for a glass +of pulque before going round to see that the mules were all right. As I +was drinking, these men whispered together, and then one came up to me +and began to abuse me, and directly I answered him the whole of them +drew their knives and rushed at me. I was ready too, and wounded two of +them as I fought my way to the door. As I opened it one of them stabbed +me in the shoulder, but it was a slanting blow. Once out they all +attacked me at once, and in another minute you would have had to look +for another muleteer. 'Tis strange, senors, that you should have saved +my life as Mr. Barnett did. It was a great deed to risk your lives with +no weapons but your sticks against five ruffians with their knives." + +"I did not use my stick," Harry said. "I am more accustomed to use my +fists than a stick, and can hit as hard with them, as you saw. But my +brother's stick turned out the most useful. He can box too, but cannot +give as heavy a blow as I can. Still, it was very lucky that I followed +your advice, and bought a couple of heavy sticks to carry with us if we +should go out after dark. Now you had better come to the hotel, and I +will send for a surgeon to dress your wound." + +"It is not necessary, senor; my wife is waiting for me in my room, she +arrived this afternoon. Knife cuts are not uncommon affairs here, and +she knows quite enough to be able to bandage them." + +"At any rate we shall have to put off our start for a few days." + +"Not at all, senor; a bandage tonight and a few strips of plaster in +the morning will do the business. I shall be stiff for a few days, but +that will not interfere with my riding, and Jose will be able to load +and unload the mules, if you will give him a little assistance. Adios! +and a thousand thanks." + +"That was a piece of luck, Bertie," Harry said when they had reached +their room in the hotel. "In the first place, because neither of us got +a scratch, and in the second, because it will bind Dias more closely to +us. Before, he was willing to assist us for Barnett's sake, now it will +be for our own also, and we may be quite sure that he will do his best +for us." + +"It is my first scrimmage," Bertie said, "and I must say that I +thought, as we ran in, that it was going to be a pretty serious one. We +have certainly come very well out of it." + +"It was short and sharp," Harry laughed. "I have always held that the +man who could box well was more than a match for one with a knife who +knew nothing of boxing. One straight hit from the shoulder is sure to +knock him out of time." + +Next morning Dias and his wife came up early. The former had one arm in +a sling. As they entered, the woman ran forward, and, throwing her arms +round Bertie, she kissed him on both cheeks. The lad was too much +surprised at this unexpected salute to return it, as his brother did +when she did the same to him. Then, drawing back, she poured out her +thanks volubly, the tears running down her cheeks. + +"Maria asked me if she might kiss you," Dias said gravely when she +stopped. "I said that it was right that she should do so, for do we not +both owe you my life?" + +"You must not make too much of the affair, Dias; four blows were +struck, and there was an end to it." + +"A small matter to you, senor, but a great one to us. A Peruvian would +not interfere if he saw four armed men attacking one. He would be more +likely to turn down the next street, so that he might not be called as +a witness. It is only your countrymen who would do such things." + +"And you still think that you will be ready to start the day after +to-morrow?" + +"Quite sure, senor. My shoulder will be stiff and my arm in a sling for +a week, but muleteers think nothing of such trifles,--a kick from a +mule would be a much more serious affair." + +"You don't think those rascals are likely to waylay us on the road, and +take their revenge?" + +"Not they, senor. If you could do such things unarmed, what could you +not do when you had rifles and pistols? The matter is settled. They +have not been seriously hurt. If one of them had been killed I should +be obliged to be careful the next time I came here; as it is, no more +will be said about it. Except the two hurt in the wine-shop they will +not even have a scar to remind them of it. In two years they will have +other things to think about, if it is true that Colombia means to go to +war with Chili." + +"What is the quarrel about, Dias?" + +"The Colombians helped us to get rid of the Spaniards, but ever since +they have presumed a right to manage affairs here." + +"Perhaps nothing will come of it." + +"Well, it is quite certain that there is no very good feeling between +Chili, Bolivia, Colombia, and Peru." + +"I suppose they will be fighting all round some day?" + +"Yes, and it will interfere with my business. Certainly we are better +off than when the Spaniards were here; but the taxes are heavy, and +things don't go as people expected they would when we got rid of the +Spaniards. All the governments seem jealous of each other. I don't take +any interest in these matters except so far as they interfere with +trade. If every man would attend to his own affairs it would be better +for us all." + +"I suppose so, Dias; but one can hardly expect a country that has been +so many years governed by a foreign power to get accustomed all at once +to governing itself." + +"Now, senor, I shall be glad if you will go with me and look at the +stores that are already collected. I think you will find that +everything is ready." + + + + +CHAPTER V + +AMONG THE MOUNTAIN + + +Two days later the mules were brought round to the door at sunrise, and +Harry and his brother sallied out from the hotel, dressed for the first +time in the Peruvian costume. They were both warmly clothed. On their +heads were felt hats with broad brims, which could be pulled down and +tied over the ears, both for warmth and to prevent their being blown +away by the fierce winds that sweep down the gorges. A thick poncho of +llama wool fell from their shoulders to their knees, and loosely tied +round their necks were thick and brightly-coloured scarves. They wore +high boots, and carried large knives stuck in a strap below the knee. +The rifles were fastened at the bow of their saddles, and their +wallets, with provisions for the day, were strapped behind. By the +advice of Dias each had in his pocket a large pair of green goggles, to +protect their eyes from the glare of sun and snow. They tied these on +before coming downstairs, and both agreed that had they met +unexpectedly in the street they would have passed each other without +the slightest recognition. + +"It is a pity, Harry," Bertie said seriously, "that you did not have +your portrait taken to send home to a certain young lady. You see, she +would then have been able to hang it up in her room and worship it +privately, without anyone having the slightest idea that it was her +absent lover." + +"You young scamp," Harry said, "I will pull your ears for you." + +"If you attempt anything of the sort, I shall tie the brim of my hat +tightly over them. I really think it is very ungrateful of you not to +take my advice in the spirit in which I gave it." + +"If you intend to go on like this, Bert, I shall leave you behind." + +"You can't do it." + +"Oh, yes, I can! I might give you in charge for some crime or other; +and in lack of evidence, the expenditure of a few dollars would, I have +no doubt, be sufficient to induce the judge, magistrate, or whatever +they call him, to give you six months' imprisonment." + +"Then you are an unnatural brother, and I will make no more suggestions +for your good." + +So they had come downstairs laughing, though feeling a little shy at +their appearance as they issued out of the courtyard. Speedily, +however, they gained courage as they saw that passers-by paid no +attention to them. + +They had spent the previous afternoon in packing the bundles, in which +every item was put away so that it could be got at readily, and in +making sure that nothing had been omitted. The five baggage mules were +fastened one behind another, and Jose stood at the head of the leading +one. As they came out Dias swung his wife on to a cushion strapped +behind his saddle, and mounted himself before her. Harry and his +brother climbed into theirs. They had both refused to put on the heavy +and cruel spurs worn by the Peruvians, but had, at the earnest request +of the Indian, put them in their saddle-bags. + +"You will want them," he said. "You need not use them cruelly, but you +must give your mules an occasional prick to let them know that you have +spurs." + +On leaving the town the road ran up the valley of the Rimac, a small +river, but of vital importance to the country through which it passes, +as small canals branching from it irrigate the land. + +"The Spaniards have done some good here at least," Harry said to Dias, +who was riding beside him. + +"Some of these canals were constructed in their time, but the rest +existed long before they came here, and, indeed, long before the Incas +came. The Incas' work lies chiefly beyond the mountains; on this side +almost all the great ruins are of cities and fortresses built by the +old people. Cuzco was the Incas' capital, and almost all the towns +between the two ranges of the Andes were their work. It is true that +they conquered the people down to the sea, but they do not seem to have +cared to live here. The treasures of Pachacamac and the other places on +the plains were those of the old people and the old religion. The +inhabitants of the plains are for the most part descendants of those +people. The Incas were strong and powerful, but they were not numerous. +That was why the Spaniards conquered them so easily. The old people, +who regarded them as their masters, did not care to fight for them, +just as the Peruvians did not care to fight for the Spaniards." + +"I expect it was a good deal like the Normans in England," Bertie put +in. "They conquered the Saxons because they were better armed and +better disciplined, but they were few in number in comparison with the +number they governed, and in their quarrels with each other the bulk of +the people stood aloof; and it was only when the Normans began their +wars in France and Scotland, and were obliged to enlist Saxon archers +and soldiers, that the two began to unite and to become one people." + +"I have no doubt that was so, Bertie; but you are breaking our +agreement that you should speak in Spanish only." + +"Oh, bother! you know very well that I cannot talk in it yet, and you +surely do not expect that I am going to ride along without opening my +lips." + +"I know you too well to expect that," Harry laughed, "and will allow an +occasional outbreak. Still, do try to talk Spanish, however bad it may +be. You have got cheek enough in other things, and cheek goes a long +way in learning to talk a foreign language. You have been four months +at your Spanish books, and should certainly begin to put simple +sentences together." + +"But that is just what one does not learn from books," the lad said. +"At any rate, not from such books as I have been working at. I could do +a high-flown sentence, and offer to kiss your hand and to declare that +all I have is at your disposal. But if I wanted to say, 'When are we +going to halt for dinner? I am feeling very peckish,' I should be +stumped altogether." + +"Well, you must get as near as you can, Bertie. I dare say you cannot +turn slang into Spanish; but you can find other words to express your +meaning, and when you cannot hit on a word you must use an English one. +Your best plan is to move along on the other side of Dias, and chat to +his wife." + +"What have I got to say to her?" + +"Anything you like. You can begin by asking her if she has ever gone a +long journey with her husband before, how far we shall go +to-day--things of that sort." + +"Well, I will try anyhow. I suppose I must. But you go on talking to +Dias, else I shall think that you are both laughing at me." + +Five miles from Lima they passed through the little village of Quiraz. +Beyond this they came upon many cotton plantations, and in the ravines +by the side of the valley or among the ruins of Indian towns were +several large fortresses. They also passed the remains of an old +Spanish town and several haciendas, where many cattle and horses were +grazing. They were ascending steadily, and after passing Santa Clara, +eleven miles from Lima, the valley narrowed and became little more than +a ravine. On either side were rents made in the hills by earthquakes, +and immense boulders and stones were scattered about at the bottom of +the narrow gorge. Four hours' travelling brought them to Chosica, where +the valley widened again near the foot of the hills. + +Here they halted for the day. There was an inn here which Dias assured +them was clean and comfortable, and they therefore took a couple of +rooms for the night in preference to unpacking their tents. + +"It is just as well not to begin that till we get farther away," Harry +said. "We have met any number of laden mules coming down, and if we +were to camp here we should cause general curiosity." + +He accordingly ordered dinner for himself and his brother, Dias +preferring to take his meal in a large room used by passing muleteers. +The fare was as good as they had had at the hotel at Lima. + +"I am not sorry that we halted here," Bertie said; "I feel as stiff as +a poker." + +"I think you got on very well, Bertie, with Mrs. Dias. I did not hear +what you were saying, but you seemed to be doing stunningly." + +"She did most of the talking. I asked her to speak slowly, as I did not +manage to catch the sense of what she said. She seems full of fun, and +a jolly little woman altogether. She generally understood what I meant, +and though she could not help laughing sometimes, she did it so +good-temperedly that one did not feel put out. Each time I spoke she +corrected me, told me what I ought to have said, and made me say it +after her. I think I shall get on fairly well at the end of a few +weeks." + +"I am sure you will, Bertie; the trouble is only at the beginning, and +now that you have once broken the ice, you will progress like a house +on fire." + +There were still four hours of daylight after they had finished their +meal, so they went out with Dias to explore one of the numerous +burying-grounds round the village. It consisted of sunken chambers. In +these were bones, with remains of the mats in which the bodies had been +clothed. These wrappings resembled small sacks, and they remarked that +the people must have been of very small size, or they could never have +been packed away in them. With them had been buried many of the +implements of their trade. One or two had apparently not been opened. +Here were knitting utensils, toilet articles, implements for weaving, +spools of thread, needles of bone and bronze. With the body of a girl +had been placed a kind of work-box, containing the articles that she +had used, and the mummy of a parrot, some beads, and fragments of an +ornament of silver. Dias told them that all these tombs were made long +before the coming of the Incas. He said that round the heads of the men +and boys were wound the slings they had used in life, while a piece of +cotton flock was wrapped round the heads of the women. Many of the +graves communicated with each other by very narrow passages; the +purpose of these was not clear, but probably they were made to enable +the spirits of the dead to meet and hold communion with each other. + +"I don't want to see any more of them," Bertie said after they had +spent three hours in their investigations; "this sort of thing is +enough to give one a fit of the blues." + +Beyond Chosica civilization almost ceased. The road became little more +than a mule track, and was in many places almost impassable by vehicles +of any kind. Nothing could be wilder than the scenery they passed. At +times rivers ran through perpendicular gorges, and the track wound up +and down steep ravines. Sometimes they would all dismount, though Dias +assured them it was not necessary; still, it made a change from the +monotonous pace of little over two miles an hour at which the mules +breasted the steep incline. + +Jose rode on the first of the baggage mules, which was very lightly +loaded; he generally sang the whole time. When on foot, Donna Maria +stepped gaily along and Bertie had hard work to keep pace with her. He +was making rapid progress with the language, though occasionally a peal +of laughter from his companion told of some egregious error. + +There were villages every few miles, but now when they halted they did +so as a rule a mile before they got to one of these. Dinner was cooked +over a fire of dead sticks, and after the meal Harry's tent was erected +and the bed spread in it. The Indians went on to the village for the +night, while Harry and his brother sat and smoked for a time by the +fire and then turned in. At daybreak Dias rode back leading their +riding mules and a baggage animal; the tent, beds, and the cooking +utensils were packed up, and they rode in to the village and passed on +at a trot until they overtook Maria and Jose, who had started with the +other four mules when Dias rode away. At last they reached the head of +the pass, and two days' journey took them to Oroya, standing on an +elevated plateau some ten thousand feet above the sea, and five +thousand below the highest point of the road. + +The scenery had now completely changed. Villages were scattered thickly +over the plain, cultivation was general. The hillsides were lined by +artificial terraces, on which were perched chalets and small +hamlets--they had seen similar terraces on the way up. These were as +the Spaniards found them, and must at one time have been inhabited by a +thriving population. Even now gardens and orchards flourished upon them +up to the highest points on the hills. Oroya was a large place, and, +avoiding the busy part of the town, they hired rooms, as it was +necessary to give the mules two days' rest. On the first evening after +their arrival they gathered round a fire, for the nights were cold, and +even in the daytime they did not find their numerous wraps too hot for +them. + +"Now, Dias," Harry said, "we must talk over our plans. You said that we +would not decide upon anything till we got here." + +"In the first place, senor, I think it would be well to go to the north +to see the Cerro de Pasco silver mine, they say it is the richest in +the world. It is well that you should see the formation of the rocks +and the nature of the ore; we may in our journeyings come across +similar rock." + +"It is gold rather than silver that one wants to find, Dias. I do not +say that a silver mine would not be worth a very large sum of money, +but it would be necessary to open it and go to a large expense to prove +it. Then one would have to go to England and get up a company to work +it, which would be a long and difficult matter. Still, I am quite ready +to go and see the place." + +Dias nodded. + +"What you say is true, senor. I could take you to a dozen places where +there is silver. They may be good or may not, but even if they were as +rich as Potosi the silver would have to be carried to Lima, so great a +distance on mules' backs that it would swallow up the profits. And it +would be almost impossible to convey the necessary machinery there, +indeed to do so would involve the making of roads for a great distance." + +"At the same time, Dias, should you know of any silver lodes that might +turn out well, I would certainly take some samples, and send two or +three mule-loads of the stuff home. They might be of no good for the +purpose for which I have come out here, but in time I might do +something with them; the law here is that anyone who finds a mine can +obtain a concession for it." + +"That is so, senor, but he must proceed to work it." + +"I suppose it would be sufficient to put two or three men on for that +purpose." + +"But if you were away for a year difficulties might arise. It would be +better for you only to determine the course of the lode, its thickness +and value, to trace it as far as possible, and then hide all signs of +the work, and not to make your claim until you return here." + +"Very well, I will take your advice, Dias. And now about the real +object of our journey." + +"I have been thinking it over deeply," Dias said. "First as to mines; +at present almost all the gold that is obtained is acquired by washing +the sands of rivers. Here and there gold has been found in rocks, but +not in sufficient quantities to make mining pay. The rivers whose sands +are richest in gold are in the mountains that lie behind Lake Titicaca, +which lies to the south of Cuzco and on the border of Bolivia. No one +doubts that in the time of the Incas there existed gold mines, and very +rich ones; for if it had not been so it is impossible to account for +the enormous amount of gold obtained by the Spanish conquerors, and no +one doubts that they got but a small portion of the gold in existence +when they arrived. It is of no use whatever for us to search the old +ruins of the Incas in Cuzco, or their other great towns; all that can +be found there has already been carried away. + +"Now you see, senor, Huanuco, Jauja, Cuzco, and Puno all lie near the +eastern range of the Andes, and when the alarm caused by the arrogant +conduct of the Spaniards began, it was natural that the treasures +should be sent away into the heart of those mountains. The towns on the +western sides of this plateau, Challhuanca, Tanibobamba, Huancavelica, +would as naturally send theirs for safety into the gorges of the +western Andes, but all traditions point to the fact that this was not +done by the Incas. As soon as the Spaniards arrived and struck the +first blow, the great chiefs would naturally call together a band of +their followers on whose fidelity they could rely, load the treasures +on llamas, of which they possessed great numbers, and hurry them off to +the mountains. + +"It is among the mountains, therefore, that our search must be made. +All our traditions point to the fact that it was along the eastern +range of the Cordilleras, and the country beyond, that by far the +greater portion of the treasures were taken for concealment. At any +rate, as we have but eighteen months for the search it is on that side +that we must try, and ten times that length of time would be +insufficient for us to do it thoroughly. As to the gold mines, it is +certain that they lie in that portion of the range between Cuzco and +Lake Titicaca. It was near Puno, a short distance from the lake, that +the Spaniards, owing to the folly of an Indian, found great treasures +in a cave. They would probably have found much more had not a stream +suddenly burst out which flooded the whole valley and converted it into +a lake. Which do you think we had better look for first, gold mines or +hidden treasures?" + +"Of course that must depend on you, Dias, and how much you know about +these matters. I need not say that a hidden treasure would be of vastly +more use to me than the richest gold mine in the world. To obtain the +gold from a mine an abundance of labour is required, besides machinery +for crushing quartz and separating the gold from it. In the bed of a +river, if it is rich and abounding in nuggets, three or four men, with +rough machinery, could wash out a large quantity of gold in a short +time, and a place of that sort would be far better than a rich mine, +which could not be worked without a large amount of capital." + +"I have heard tales of such places on the other side of the mountains +to the south. From time to time gold-seekers have returned with as much +as they could carry, but not one in a hundred of those that go ever +come back; some doubtless die from hunger and hardship, but more are +killed by the Indians. Most of the tribes there are extremely savage, +and are constantly at war with each other, and they slay every white +man who ventures into their country." + +"Then is it not probable, Dias, that the gold could have come from +their country?" + +"Not from the plains, but from the streams running down into them; and +although the Incas never attempted to subdue the tribes beyond the +mountains, they may have had bodies of troops to protect the workers +from incursions by these savages." + +"Are there many wild beasts there?" + +"In some parts of the mountains pumas and jaguars abound." + +"That is not altogether satisfactory, though I should not mind if we +fell in with one occasionally. But how about game, Dias?" + +"The chief game are the wild vicunas, which are very numerous in some +parts; but they are very shy and difficult to hunt. Deer are plentiful, +and there are foxes, bears, and hogs; but the great article of food is +fish. On the plains the manatee, which is very like the seal, is +caught; turtles are found in great numbers, and the people make oil +from their eggs; and the buffo, a sort of porpoise, also abounds. The +natives do not eat these, except when very pressed for food; they catch +them for the sake of their oil. There are many kinds of fish: the +sunaro, which I heard an English traveller say are like the fish the +English call the pike; these grow to the length of seven or eight feet. +And many smaller kinds of fish are caught by throwing the juice of the +root of the barbasto into small streams. This makes the fish stupid, +and they float on the surface so that they may easily be caught by +hand. There are also many sorts of fruit." + +"Well, then, we ought to do fairly well, Dias." + +"Yes, senor; but many of these creatures are only found in the forests +and in the rivers of the plains, and they are so much hunted by the +savages there that they are very shy. But there are some creatures with +which we certainly do not wish to meet, and unfortunately these are not +uncommon. I mean the alligators and the great serpents. The natives +fear the alligators much, for their weapons are of no avail against +them, and they would never venture to attack a great snake." + +"And besides these, what other disagreeables are there, Dias?" Bertie +asked cheerfully. + +"There is one other disagreeable," Dias replied, "and it is a serious +one. There are in the mountains many desperate men. Some have slain an +enemy who had friends influential enough to set the law in motion +against them, or have escaped from prison; some have resisted the +tax-collectors; many have been suspected of plotting against the +government; and others are too lazy to work." + +"And how do they live?" Harry asked. + +"They live partly on game and partly on plunder. They steal from +cultivators; they are paid a small sum by all muleteers passing through +the mountains; they rob travellers who are worth robbing; and sometimes +they carry off a proprietor of land, and get a ransom for him. +Occasionally they will wash the sand, and get gold enough to send one +of their number into a town to buy articles they require." + +"And do they go in large bands?" + +"No, senor; as a rule some ten or twelve keep together under the one +they have chosen as their chief. Sometimes, if people make complaints +and troops are sent against them, they will join to resist them; but +this is not often. The authorities know well enough that they have no +chance of catching these men among the mountains they are so well +acquainted with, and content themselves with stationing a few troops in +the villages." + +"And is it through the robbers or the savages that so few of the gold +explorers ever return?" + +"It is chiefly, I think, from hardship," Dias said; "but undoubtedly +many who venture down near the Indians' country are killed by them. +Some who have done well, and are returning with the gold they have +accumulated, fall victims to these robbers. You must not, of course, +suppose that there are great numbers of them, senor. There may be some +hundreds, but from Huancabamba--the northern frontier of the western +Cordilleras, where the Maranon crosses the eastern range--down to Lake +Titicaca on the one side, and Tacna on the other, is nigh a thousand +miles, and the two ranges cover more square leagues than can be +reckoned, and even a thousand men scattered over these would be but so +many grains of sand on a stretch of the sea-shore." + +"It certainly sounds like it, Dias; but perhaps those worthy people +congregate chiefly in the neighbourhood of the passes." + +"That is so, senor; but even through these a traveller might pass many +times without being troubled by them." + +"Have you fallen in with them often, Dias?" + +"Yes; but, as you see, they have done me no harm. Sometimes, when I get +to the end of my journey, the mules are not so heavily laden as when I +started; but generally the people for whom I work say to me, 'Here are +so many dollars, Dias; they are for toll.' There are places in the +villages at the foot of the most-frequented passes where it is +understood that a payment of so many dollars per mule will enable you +to pass without molestation. In return for your money, you receive a +ribbon, or a rosette, or a feather, and this you place in your hat as a +passport. You may meet a few men with guns as you pass along, but when +they see the sign they salute you civilly, ask for a drink of wine if +you are carrying it, then wish you good-day. It is only in +little-frequented passes that you have to take your chance. I may say +that though these men may plunder, they never kill a muleteer. They +know that if they did, all traffic on that road would cease, and the +soldiers would find guides who knew every path and hiding-place in the +mountains." + +"Anyhow, I think it is well, Dias, that I took your advice, and handed +over my gold to Senor Pasquez, for if we do fall into the hands of any +of these gentry, we can lose practically nothing." + +"No money, senor, but we might lose everything else, except perhaps the +mules, which they could not use in the mountains. But if they were to +take our blankets, and tents, and provisions, and your firearms, we +should be in a bad way if we happened to be a couple of hundred miles +in the heart of the mountains." + +"Well, I don't think they will take them," Harry said grimly, "without +paying pretty dearly for them. With your gun and our rifles, and that +old fowling-piece which you got for Jose, which will throw a fairly +heavy charge of buck-shot, I think we can make a very good fight +against any band of eight men, or even one or two more." + +"I think so," Dias said gravely. "It is seldom I miss my mark. Still, I +hope we shall not be troubled with them, or with the Indians. You see, +it is not so much an attack by day that we have to fear, as a surprise +at night. Of course, when we are once on the hills, Jose and I will +keep watch by turns. He is as sharp as a needle. I should have no fear +of any of these robbers creeping up to us without his hearing them. But +I can't say so much for him in the case of the Indians, who can move so +noiselessly that even a vicuna would not hear them until they were +within a spear's-throw." + +"The spear is their weapon then, Dias?" + +"Some tribes carry bows and arrows, others only spears, and sometimes +they poison the points of both these weapons." + +"That is unpleasant. Are there remedies for the poisons?" + +"None that I know of, nor do I think the savages themselves know of +any. The only chance is to pour ammonia at once into the hole that is +made by an arrow, and to cut out all the flesh round a spear-wound, and +then to pour in ammonia or sear it with a hot iron." + +"That accounts for your buying that large bottle of ammonia at Lima. I +wondered what you wanted it for. When we get into the country these +unpleasant people inhabit, I will fill my spirit-flask with it, so that +it will always be handy if required. Now we understand things +generally, Dias. It only remains for you to decide where we had best +leave the plain and take to the mountains." + +Dias was silent for a minute. "I should say, senor, that first we had +better journey down to Cuzco and then down to Sicuani, where the +western Cordilleras, after making a bend, join the eastern branch, and +there cross the Tinta volcano. On the other side are many gorges. In +one of these I know there is some very rich gold sand. Explorers have +sought for this spot in vain, but the secret has been well kept by the +few who know it. It has been handed down in my father's family from +father to son ever since the Spaniards came. He told it to me, and I +swore to reveal it to none but my son. I have no son, and the secret +therefore will die with me. Whether it has been passed down in any +other family I cannot say. It may be, or it may not be; but as I owe +you my life, and also the debt of gratitude to Senor Barnett, I feel +that you are more to me than a son. Moreover, the secret was to be kept +lest it should come to the knowledge of the Spaniards. The Spaniards +have gone, and with them the reason for concealment, so I feel now that +I am justified in taking you there." + +"I am glad of that, Dias. Assuredly the gold can be of service to no +man as long as it lies there, and it would be better to utilize it than +allow it to waste. I need not say how grateful I shall feel if you can +put me in the way of obtaining it." + +"That I cannot absolutely promise," he said. "I have the indications, +but they will be difficult to find. Three hundred years bring great +changes--rocks on which there are marks may be carried away by +torrents, figures cut in the cliffs may be overgrown by mosses or +creepers. However, if but a few remain, I hope to be able to find my +way. If I fail we must try elsewhere; but this is the only one of which +I have been told all the marks. I know generally several places where +great treasure was hidden, but not the marks by which they could be +discovered, and as we may be sure that every measure was taken to hide +the entrances to the caves, the chances would be all against our +lighting upon them. I may say, senor, that, great as was the treasure +of the Incas, that of the Chimoos or Chincas, a powerful people who +inhabited part of this country, was fully as large; and traditions say +that most of the treasures hidden were not those of the Incas, but of +the Chimoos, who buried them when their country was invaded by the +Incas. + +"This is certainly the case with most of the treasures hidden to the +west of the mountains. It was so at Pachacamac; it was so at Truxillo, +where the Spaniards found three million and a half dollars of gold; and +it is known that this was but a small hoard, and that the great one, +many times larger, has never been discovered. Probably the secret has +long been lost; for if there are but few who know where the Incas +buried their gold, it may well be believed that the exact locality of +the Chimoo treasures, which were buried more than eight hundred years +ago, is now unknown, and that nothing but vague traditions have been +handed down." + +"That one can quite understand," Harry agreed, "when we consider how +many of the Chimoos must have fallen in the struggle with the Incas, +and how more than half the population were swept away by the Spaniards, +to say nothing of those who have died in the wars of the last thirty +years. It seems strange, however, that the treasures in the temple of +Pachacamac were left untouched by the Incas and allowed to accumulate +afterwards." + +"It was so generally regarded as the sacred city," Dias said, "that, +powerful as they were, the Incas did not attempt to interfere with it, +as to do so would certainly have stirred up a formidable insurrection +of the natives throughout the whole of their territory; and instead, +therefore, of taking possession of the temple and dedicating it to +their own god, they allowed it to remain untouched and the worship of +the old gods to be carried on there, contenting themselves with +building a temple of their own to the Sun-god close at hand." + +"Whether any treasure we find belonged to the Incas or to the Chimoos +is of no consequence whatever. I certainly think that before entering +upon what would seem to be almost a hopeless search for such stores, we +should try this place that you know of. In that case it seems to me, +Dias, that if we had gone down the coast to Islay, and up through +Arequipa to Cuzco, our journey would have been considerably shorter." + +"That is true, senor, but we should have found it difficult to take a +passage for our mules; the steamers are but small craft, with poor +accommodation even for passengers. And besides, until we had made all +our arrangements for the journey from Lima, I could hardly say that I +had made up my mind to bring you to this place. Only when you and your +brother saved my life did I feel that I was bound to aid you, even to +the point of divulging the secret. It is different now from what it was +when it was first handed down. At that time the Spaniards were +mercilessly slaying all known to be in the possession of any secret +connected with gold, and every discovery of gold entailed the forced +labour of thousands more of the natives. Well, senor, all that is +changed; we are our own masters, and those who find mines are allowed +to work them on payment of certain royalties. There is, therefore, no +good in keeping a secret that has been useless for hundreds of years." + +"Certainly, Dias, you will have the satisfaction of knowing that you +are injuring no one by the act, and are besides doing a very good +action to my brother and myself. + +"Well, Bertie," Harry said when Dias had left the room, "I think we may +congratulate ourselves. For the first time I really think there is a +chance of the expedition turning out a success." + +"It certainly looks like it," Bertie agreed. "For your sake I hope it +will be so. As for me, I am quite content; what with Indians and +brigands, wild beasts, alligators, and snakes, the journey is likely to +be an exciting one." + + + + +CHAPTER VI + +A TROPICAL FOREST + + +It took them over three weeks to reach Cuzco. They did not hurry, for +they wished to keep the mules in good condition for the serious work +before them. They were travelling across a plateau thickly dotted with +villages and small towns, and everywhere richly cultivated. Near the +summit of the mountains large flocks of alpacas were grazing, and lower +down herds of cattle and sheep, while near the plain were patches of +wheat, barley, and potatoes, which in turn were succeeded by fields of +maize, apple and peach trees, and prickly-pears. At the foot were +fields of sugar-cane, oranges, citron, pine-apples, cacao, and many +other tropical fruits; while in the deeper ravines cotton was grown in +abundance for the wants of the population. Here, in fact, were all +varieties of climate, from the perpetual snow on the summits of the +lofty mountains to a tropical heat in the valleys. + +"If the Incas had been contented with this glorious plateau, which for +centuries constituted their kingdom, and had passed a law against the +gathering of gold and the mining for silver, they might still have been +lords here," Harry said one day. "There would have been nothing to +tempt the avarice of the Spaniards, for owing to the distance of the +mines from the coast, the cost of carriage would have been immense, and +the long sea journey would have rendered the exportation of the natural +products of the country impossible. Some of the more sober-minded of +the Dons might have settled down here and taken wives from among the +daughters of the nobles, and, bringing with them the civilization of +Spain, become valuable colonists. The Incas, before they extended their +conquest over the whole of the west of South America, must have been a +comparatively simple people, and would have had none of the habits of +luxury and magnificence that tempted the Spaniards. The gold of South +America was the ruin of the Incas, as it was afterwards the chief cause +of the ruin of Spain." + +"Well, Harry, then I should very strongly advise you to give up +treasure-hunting and to remain poor, for the curse of the gold may not +have worked itself out yet." + +"I must risk that, Bertie. I have no desire for luxury or magnificence; +it is for a laudable purpose that I seek the gold. However, if you have +any scruples on the subject there is no occasion for you to have any +share in what I may discover." + +"No, I think I will agree with you and risk it; though certainly at +present I don't see what advantage any amount of money would be to me." + +The houses of the peasants were for the most part comfortable, although +small, for since the expulsion of the Spaniards, the people had had no +reason to make a pretence of poverty. During the Spanish rule no one +dared, by the size of his house or by his mode of living, to show signs +of wealth above his fellows, for to do so would be to expose himself to +the cruel exactions of the tax-collectors and local officials; and even +now they had hardly recognized the change that had taken place, and +remained wedded to the habits that had become rooted in them by +centuries of oppression. + +The travellers had no difficulty whatever in purchasing food and forage +on the way. They always slept in their tents now, and preferred Donna +Maria's cooking to that which they could obtain in the small and +generally dirty inns in the towns. + +By the time they reached Cuzco, Bertie was able to converse in Spanish +with some fluency. On the way he rode either beside Dias and his wife, +or with Jose; in either case an animated conversation was kept up, +sometimes on the stirring events of the war of independence and the +subsequent struggles, sometimes about life in England, its ways and +customs, concerning which neither Maria nor Jose had any knowledge +whatever. Bertie also endeavoured to gain some information concerning +the history of Peru prior to the rising against Spain; but neither the +woman nor boy knew anything of the subject beyond the fact that the +Incas were great people, and that the natives still mourned for them. + +"You see that black apron most of the women wear over one hip, as a +sign of mourning; it is still worn for the Incas. They must have been +good people, and not cruel like the Spanish, or they would not be so +much regretted," Maria said. "I don't wear the apron, because both Dias +and I are of mixed blood, descendants on one side of natives, and on +the other of Creoles, that is of Spaniards whose families were settled +here, and who hated their countrymen just as much as we do. Well, there +is Cuzco in sight. I have never seen it, and am glad that we shall stay +there for a few days." + +The old capital of the Incas lay at the end of a valley about two miles +in length, and about a mile in width. To the north of the city rose an +abrupt hill, crowned by the great citadel with its three lines of +walls, the hill being divided from those forming the side of the valley +by two deep ravines, in which flowed little streams that ran through +the city. The appearance of the town was striking. There were numerous +churches, its streets ran at right angles to each other, and the +massive stone houses dated from the early Spanish days, though they +were surmounted for the most part by modern brickwork additions. Where +the great Temple of the Sun once stood, the church of Santo Domingo had +been built, a portion of the splendid building of the old faith being +incorporated in it. + +"What is the use of staying here?" Bertie asked his brother +impatiently, two days after they had arrived at Cuzco. "I dare say +these old ruins and fortresses, and so on, are very interesting to +people who understand all about the Incas; but as I know nothing about +them, I don't see how you can expect me to get up any interest in an +old wall because you tell me that it is one of the remains of a palace +belonging to some old chap I never heard of. I shall be very glad when +Dias says that the mules have had enough rest and that we can set out +on our business." + +"I am afraid you are a Goth, Bert," Harry said, looking at him with an +expression of pity. "Here you are in one of the most interesting cities +of the world, a place that thousands and thousands of people would +travel any distance to investigate, and in forty-eight hours you are +tired of it. You have no romance in your nature, no respect for the +past; you are a Goth and a Philistine." + +"I am afraid you are mixing up localities, Harry. I may be a Goth or a +Philistine, but perhaps you are not aware that these peoples or tribes +had no connection with each other. Your education in matters +unconnected with the Royal Navy seems to have been even more deplorably +neglected than my own." + +"Shut up, youngster!" + +"No, Lieutenant Prendergast, you are not on the quarter-deck of one of +Her Majesty's ships at present. You are not even the leader of a small +caravan on the march. We are in this locanda on terms of perfect +equality, save and except in any small advantage that you may possess +in the matter of years." + +Harry laughed. + +"Well, Bertie, I do not altogether disagree with what you say. If I had +come here to get up the history of the Incas, and investigate the ruins +of their palaces, I should be content to stay here for some weeks; but +as it is, I am really just as anxious as you are to be on the move. I +was speaking to Dias half an hour ago, and he says that in two more +days we shall be able to start again. We have been discussing how much +flour and other things it is absolutely necessary to take. Of course +the better provided we are the more comfortable we shall be; but on the +other hand, as Dias says, it is of great importance that the mules +should carry as little weight as possible. + +"In crossing the passes we shall have the benefit of the old roads of +the Incas, but once we leave these the difficulties will be enormous. +Dias said that it might be better to dispose of our mules altogether +and get trained llamas in their place, as these can climb over rocks +where no mule could obtain a foothold. But then it would be necessary +to take with us one or two natives accustomed to their ways, and this +would not suit us at all. However, I do think that it would be worth +while to take two or three of these animals with us. They can carry a +hundred pounds apiece; but as we may be going over extraordinarily +rough country, fifty pounds would be sufficient. The advantage would be +that we could establish a sort of central camp at the farthest spot to +which the mules could go, and then make exploring expeditions with the +llamas to carry provisions and tools. The llamas are not bad eating, so +that if we found no other use for them they would assist our +commissariat." + +"How far can they go in a day, Harry?" + +"Ten or twelve miles, and you may be sure that that is as much as we +can do when we are among the mountains." + +"Then I should think they would be very useful. I suppose there will be +no difficulty in buying them?" + +"None at all. A good many are brought in for sale to the market every +day. Of course it would be necessary to get strong animals accustomed +to burdens." + +Before starting there was another long consultation between Harry and +Dias as to which course it would be better to adopt. The +most-frequented pass through the mountains was that to Paucartambo, +forty miles north-east from Cuzco, at the mouth of the pass that leads +down into the plains. Between this town and the Carabaya range, a +hundred and fifty miles to the south, was to be found the rich gold +deposit to which Dias had referred. So far, however, as the traditions +he had received informed him, it was situated near the slopes of the +Tinta volcano, and between that and Ayapata. The direct road to this +spot was extremely difficult, and he was of opinion that the journey +could be more easily performed by going to Paucartambo and then +skirting the foot of the mountains. + +"You will find no difficulty in obtaining food as you go along," he +said; "wild turkeys, pheasants, and other birds are to be met with in +that district. Moreover, there are many plantations which have been +deserted owing to the depredations of the Chincas, a tribe who live on +the tributaries of the Pueros, or as it used to be called, Rio Madre de +Dios. Here you will find fields of maize still growing, sugar-cane, +cacao, and rice. One after another the estates have been abandoned; at +some of them the whole of the people on the farms were massacred, and +in all the danger was so great that the proprietors found it impossible +to work them. The one drawback to that road is that we may fall in with +the Chincas, in which case they will certainly attack us. However, they +are widely scattered through the forests, and we may not fall in with +them. On the other hand, the track by the Tinta mountain from Sicuani +is extremely difficult and dangerous, We might lose several of our +animals in traversing it, and should have to depend entirely on what we +carried for food." + +"Then by all means let us go the other way, Dias. Were we to lose some +of our mules it would be impossible to replace them, and it would be +useless to find gold if we could not carry it away." + +Two days later they started, four llamas having been added to the +caravan. Dias explained that it would not be necessary to take any +natives to attend to these animals, as, once started, they would follow +the mules without difficulty, especially if they were fed with them +before starting. Three days' travelling brought them to the little +town, which lay very high up in the hills. The cold here was bitter, +and the party needed all their wraps, and were glad to get in motion as +soon as it was light. Passing over a range of mountains above +Paucartambo, where a thin layer of snow crunched under their feet, they +began the tremendous descent into the plain. In a short time the +morning mist cleared away. The road led through a tropical forest. It +took them over three hours to reach the river Chirimayu, a descent of +eleven thousand feet in the course of eight miles. + +Here they halted by the side of a splendid waterfall. The hills rose up +perpendicularly on every side except where the little river made its +way through the gorge; they were covered with brushwood, ferns, and +creepers, thick with flowers of many colours, while lofty palms and +forest trees grew wherever their roots could find a hold. Splendid +butterflies of immense size flitted about; birds of many kinds and +beautiful plumage flew hither and thither among the trees; +humming-birds sucked the honey from the bright flowers; parrots +chattered and screamed in the upper branches of the trees, and the foam +and spray of the torrent sparkled in the sun. Harry and his brother +stood struck with admiration at the loveliness of the scene, even Donna +Maria and Jose ceased their chatter as they looked at a scene such as +they had never before witnessed. + +"It is worth coming all the way from England to see this, Bertie." + +"It is, indeed. If it is all like this I sha'n't mind how long Dias +takes to find the place he is in search of." + +At a word from Dias they all set to work to take the burdens off the +animals. A place was cleared for the tents. When these had been erected +Jose collected dried sticks. A fire was soon lighted, and Maria began +to prepare breakfast. + +"Is it unhealthy here, Dias?" + +"Not here, senors; we are still many hundred feet above the plain. In +the forest there it is unhealthy for whites, the trees grow so thickly +that it is difficult to penetrate them, swamps and morasses lie in many +places, and the air is thick and heavy. We shall not go down there +until we need. When we must descend we shall find an abundance of +maize, and fruits of all sorts. The savages kill the people they find +on the estates, but do not destroy the crops or devastate the fields. +They are wise enough to know that these are useful to them, and though +they are too lazy to work themselves they appreciate the good things +that others have planted." + +"It is rather early to make a halt, Dias." + +"We have work to do, senor. In the first place we must find a spot +where large trees stand on the bank of the torrent. Two or three of +these must be felled so that they fall across it; then we shall have to +chop off the branches, lay them flat side by side, and make a bridge +over which to take animals. After breakfast we must set about this +work, and it will be too late before we finish to think of going +farther to-day." + +"It is well that we bought four good axes and plenty of rope at Cuzco," +Harry said. + +"We shall want them very often, senor. Three large torrents come down +between this and the Tinta volcano, besides many smaller ones. Some +rise from the hills to the north of us. These fall into others, which +eventually combine to make the Madre de Dios. So far as is known boats +can descend the river to the Amazon without meeting with any obstacle, +from a point only a few miles from the head of the Pueros, which we +shall presently cross. The fact that there are no cataracts during the +whole course from the hills to the junction of the rivers, shows how +perfectly flat the great plain is." + +"And did either the Incas or the Spaniards ever conquer the Chincas and +cultivate these splendid plains?" + +"The Incas drove them back some distance, senor, and forced them to pay +a tribute, but they never conquered them. Doubtless they cultivated the +land for some leagues from the foot of the mountains, as did the +Spaniards, and it was considered the most fertile part of the Montana, +as their possessions this side of the Cordilleras were called. The +Spaniards tried to push farther, but met with such stout opposition by +the savages that they were forced to desist." + +All were ready when Maria announced breakfast. After the meal they sat +smoking for half an hour, reluctant to commence the heavy work before +them. + +"We had better be moving, senor," Dias said as he rose to his feet, "or +we shall not get the bridge made before dark." + +A hundred yards from the camp they found three large trees growing +close to each other near the edge of the stream. Bertie looked at them +with an air of disgust. + +"This will be worse for the hands than rowing for twelve hours in a +heavy boat." + +"I dare say it will," Harry agreed; "but it has got to be done, and the +sooner we set about it the better." + +"I shall take off my flannel shirt," Bertie said. + +"You had better not, senor," Dias said, as he saw what the lad was +about to do. "There are many insects here that will sting you, and the +bites of some of them swell up and turn into sores. Now, senor, I will +take this tree. The next is not quite so large, will you take that? I +will help you when I am finished with my own. Your brother and Jose can +work by turns at the other." + +It was hard work, for the trees were over two feet across near the +foot. Dias had felled his before the others had cut half-way through, +and he then lent his aid to Harry, who was streaming with perspiration. + +"You are not accustomed to it, senor. You will manage better when you +have had two or three months' practice at the work." + +"I did not bargain for this, Harry," Bertie said as he rested for the +twentieth time from his work. "Jaguars and alligators, Indians and +bandits, and hard climbing I was prepared for, but I certainly never +expected that we should have to turn ourselves into wood-cutters." + +"It is hard work, Bertie, but it is useless to grumble, and, as Dias +says, we shall become accustomed to it in two or three months." + +"Two or three months!" Bertie repeated with a groan; "my hands are +regularly blistered already, and my arms and back ache dreadfully." + +"Well, fire away! Why, Jose has done twice as much as you have, and he +has hardly turned a hair. I don't suppose that he has had much more +practice than you have had, and he is nothing like so strong." + +"Oh, I dare say! if he has never cut, his ancestors have, and I suppose +it is hereditary. Anyhow, I have been doing my best. Well, here goes!" + +Harry laughed at his brother's theory for explaining why Jose had done +more work than he had. He was himself by no means sorry that Dias had +come to his assistance, and that his tree was nearly ready to fall. +Jose climbed it with the end of a long rope, which he secured to an +upper bough. Dias then took the other end of the rope, crossed the +torrent by the tree he had felled, and when Jose had come down and +Harry had given a few more cuts with the axe, he was able to guide the +tree in its fall almost directly across the stream. Then he took +Bertie's tree in hand. In ten minutes this was lying beside the others. +It took three hours' more work to cut off the branches and to lay the +trees side by side, which was done with the aid of one of the mules. +The smaller logs were packed in between them to make a level road, and +when this was done the workers went back to the little camp. The sun +was already setting, and Donna Maria had the cooking-pots simmering +over the fire. + +"That has been a hard day's work," Harry said, when he and his brother +threw themselves down on the grass near the fire. + +"Hard is no name for it, Harry. I have never been sentenced to work on +a tread-mill, but I would cheerfully chance it for a month rather than +do another day's work like this. The palms of my hands feel as if they +had been handling a red-hot iron, my arms and shoulders ache as if I +had been on a rack. I seem to be in pain from the tips of my toes to +the top of my head." + +Harry laughed. + +"It is only what every settler who builds himself a hut in the +backwoods must feel, Bert. It is the work of every wood-cutter and +charcoal-burner; it is a good deal like the work of every miner. You +have been brought up too soft, my boy." + +"Soft be hanged!" the lad said indignantly; "it is the first time I +have heard that the life of an apprentice on board a ship was a soft +one. I have no doubt you feel just as bad as I do." + +"But you don't hear me grumbling, Bert; that is all the difference. I +expect that, of the two, I am rather the worse, for my bones and +muscles are more set than yours, and it is some years now since I +pulled at either a rope or an oar." + +Bertie was silent for a minute or two, and then said rather +apologetically: + +"Well, Harry, perhaps I need not have grumbled so much, but you see it +is a pretty rough beginning when one is not accustomed to it. We ought +to have had a short job to begin with, and got into it gradually, +instead of having six hours on end; and I expect that the backwoods +settler you were talking about does not work for very long when he +first begins. If he did he would be a fool, for he certainly would not +be fit for work for a week if he kept on till he had nearly broken his +back and taken the whole skin off his hands by working all day the +first time he tried it." + +"There is something in that, Bertie; and as we are in no extraordinary +hurry I do think we might have been satisfied with felling the trees +to-day, and cutting off the branches and getting them into place +to-morrow. Still, as Dias seemed to make nothing of it, I did not like +to knock off at the very start." + +"The meal is ready, senor," Maria said, "and I think we had better eat +it at once, for the sky looks as if we were going to have rain." + +"And thunder too," Dias said. "You had better begin; Jose and I will +picket the mules and hobble the llamas. If they were to make off, we +should have a lot of trouble in the morning." + +The aspect of the sky had indeed changed. Masses of cloud hung on the +tops of the hills, and scud was flying overhead. + +Maria placed one of the cooking-pots and two tin plates, knives, and +forks beside Harry and his brother, with two flat cakes of ground maize. + +"Sit down and have your food at once," Harry said to her. "The rain +will be down in bucketfuls before many minutes." + +They were soon joined by Dias and Jose, the latter bringing up a large +can of water from the stream. They had just finished when large drops +of rain began to patter on the ground. + +"Never mind the things," Harry said as he leapt to his feet. "Crawl +under shelter at once; it is no use getting a wetting." + +All at once made for the tents; and they were but just in time, for the +rain began to fall in torrents, and a peal of thunder crashed out +overhead as they got under the canvas. + +"This is our first experience of this sort of thing," Harry said, as he +and his brother lit their pipes half-sitting and half-reclining on +their beds. "I rather wondered why Dias put the tents on this little +bit of rising ground, which did not look so soft or tempting as the +level; but I see now that he acted very wisely, for we should have been +flooded in no time if we had been lower down. As it is, I am by no +means sure that we shan't have the water in. Another time we will take +the precaution to make trenches round the tents when we pitch them. +However, we have got a waterproof sheet underneath the beds, so I +expect it will be all right." + +"I hope so. Anyhow, we had better see that the edges are turned up all +round, so that the water cannot run over them. By Jove! it does come +down. We can hardly hear each other speak." + +Suddenly the entrance to the tent was thrust aside. + +"Here is a candle, senors." + +It was thrown in, and Dias ran back into his own tent, which was but a +few yards away, before Harry could remonstrate at his coming out. + +"The candle will be useful, anyhow," Bertie said. "It is almost +pitch-dark now. What with the sun going down and the clouds overhead, +it has turned from day into night in the past five minutes." + +Striking a match he lit the candle, and stuck it in between his shoes, +which he took off for the purpose. + +"That is more cheerful, Harry." + +"Hullo! what is that?" + +A deep sound, which was certainly not thunder, rose from the woods. It +was answered again and again from different directions. + +"They must be either pumas or jaguars, which are always called here +lions and tigers, and I have no doubt Dias will know by the roar which +it is. I should not mind if it were daylight, for it is not pleasant to +know that there are at least half a dozen of these beasts in the +neighbourhood. We may as well drop the cartridges into our rifles and +pistols. I believe neither of these beasts often attacks men, but they +might certainly attack our mules." + +The storm continued, and each clap of thunder was succeeded by roars, +snarls, and hissing, and with strange cries and shrieks. During a +momentary lull Harry shouted: + +"Is there any fear of these beasts attacking us or the mules, Dias?" + +"No, senor, they are too frightened by the thunder and lightning to +think of doing so." + +"What are all those cries we hear?" + +"Those are monkeys, senor. They are frightened both by the storm and by +the roaring of the lions and tigers." + +"Which is the bigger, Harry, the puma or the jaguar?" + +"I believe the jaguar is the bigger, but the puma is the more +formidable and fiercer. The latter belongs to the same family as the +lion, and the former to that of the leopards. The jaguar is more +heavily built than the leopard, and stronger, with shorter legs, but it +is spotted just as the leopard is. The puma is in build like the lion, +but has no mane. Both prey on animals of all kinds. The natives say +they catch turtles, turn them over on their backs as a man would do, +and tear the shells apart. They will also eat fish; but they are both +scourges to the Indians and white planters, as they will kill sheep, +horses, and cattle. Of course, if they are attacked by men and wounded, +they will fight desperately, as most wild creatures will; but if man +does not molest them, they are quite content to leave him alone, unless +he chances to pass under a tree among the branches of which they are +lying in wait for prey. Both of them can climb trees." + +"Well, I thought I should have slept like a log, Harry, after the work +that I have done, but what with the thunder and the patter of the rain, +and all those noises of beasts, I don't think I am likely to close my +eyes." + +"We shall get accustomed to the noises after a time, Bert; but at +present I feel as if I were in the middle of a travelling menagerie +which had been caught in a thunderstorm. It is curious that all animals +should be frightened at lightning, for they cannot know that it is +really dangerous." + +"Yes, I know. We had two dogs on the last ship I was in. A clap of +thunder would send them flying down the companion into the cabin, and +they would crouch in some dark corner in a state of absolute terror. +They would do just the same if cannon were fired in salute, or anything +of that sort. I suppose they thought that was thunder." + +In spite, however, of the noises, Harry and his brother both dropped +off to sleep before long, being thoroughly worn out by the day's work. +They were awakened by Dias opening the front of their little tent. + +"The sun is up, senors, and it is a fine morning after the storm. Maria +has got coffee ready, baked some cakes, and fried some slices of meat." + +"All right, Dias! we will be out directly. We will first run up the +bank a short distance, and have a dip." + +"You won't be able to swim, senor. The bed of the torrent is full, and +no swimmer could breast the water." + +"All right! we will be careful." + +Throwing on their ponchos, they went down to the stream and ran along +the bank. + +"The water is coming down like a race-horse, Bert, but just ahead it +has overflowed its banks. We can have a bath there safely, though it is +not deep enough for swimming." + +After ten minutes' absence they returned to the camp, completed their +dressing, and sat down to breakfast. + +"What were all those frightful noises, Dias? Were they pumas or +jaguars?" + +"They were both, senor. You can easily tell the difference in the +sounds they make. The jaguar's is between a roar and a snarl, while the +puma's is a sort of a hissing roar." + +As soon as breakfast was over, the tents were packed up and the mules +and llamas laden. Dias had given them a feed all round an hour before. +The course they should take had been already agreed upon; they must +descend to the plain, for it would be next to impossible to cross the +ravines on the mountain-side. + +"Each stream coming down from the hills," Dias said, "must be followed +nearly up to its source, but for the next seventy or eighty miles the +search need not be so careful as it must be afterwards. The place +cannot be far from Tinta, but somewhere this side of it. We need not +hurry, for there are two months to spare." + +"How do you mean, Dias?" + +"On a day that answers to the 21st of March, Coyllur--that is a +star--will rise at midnight in a cleft in a peak. It can be seen only +in the valley in which the stream that contains the gold runs down. +This is what my father taught me; therefore there must be mountains to +the south-east, and this can only be where the Cordilleras run east, +which is the case at Tinta." + +"That is excellent as far as it goes, if we happen to be in the right +valley at the time, Dias, but it would not help us in the slightest if +we were in any other valley. And we should have to wait a year before +trying in another place." + +"Yes, senor, but there are marks on the rocks of a particular kind. +There are marks on rocks in other valleys, so that these should not be +distinguished by Spaniards searching for the place. I should know the +marks when I saw them." + +"Then in that case, Dias, the star would not be of much use to us." + +"I know not how that might be, senor, but as these instructions have +been handed down from the time when the Spaniards arrived, it must +surely in some way be useful, but in what way I cannot say." + +"At any rate, Dias, what with those marks you speak of, and the star, +it will be hard if we cannot find it. I suppose you are sure that the +place is rich if we do light upon it?" + +"Of that there can be no doubt, senor. Tradition says that it was the +richest spot in the mountains, and was only worked when the king had +need of gold, either for equipping an army or on some special occasion. +At such a time it would be worked for one month, and then closed until +gold was again required. However, as we go that way we shall explore +other valleys. Gold is found more or less in all of them. Possibly we +may find some rich spot which we can fall back upon if we fail in our +search." + +"But I hardly see how we can fail, with the star and those marks on the +rocks to aid us." + +"The marks may have disappeared, senor, and in that case we may not be +in the right spot when the star rises; or again, the Incas may have +closed the approach in some way to make the matter sure. I cannot +promise that we shall find the gold; but I shall do my best with the +knowledge that has come down to me. If I fail, we must try in other +directions. When the Spaniards came, forty thousand of the Incas' +people left Cuzco and the neighbouring towns, and journeyed away down +the mountains and out to the west. Since then no reliable news +concerning them has been heard, but rumours have from time to time come +from that direction to the effect that there is a great and wealthy +city there. I say not that if we failed here we should attempt to find +it. The dangers from the savages would be too great. There would be +great forests to traverse, many rivers to be crossed. We might travel +for years without ever finding their city. When we got there, we might +be seized and put to death, and if we were spared we might not be able +to make off with the treasure. I mention it to show that gold may be +found in many other places besides this valley we are seeking." + +"I quite agree with you, Dias, that unless we could get some indication +of the position of this city, if it now exists, it would be madness to +attempt to search for it. I want gold badly, but I do not propose that +we should all throw away our lives in what would be almost a hopeless +adventure. Even if I were ready to risk my own life on such a mad +enterprise, I would not ask others to do the same." + +Crossing the stream, they made their way down through the forest. It +was toilsome work, as they often had to clear a way with axes through +the undergrowth and tangle of creepers. But at noon they reached level +ground. The heat was now intense, even under the trees, and the air +close and oppressive. On the way down Harry shot a wild turkey. When +they halted, this was cut up and broiled over a fire, and after it had +been eaten all lay down and slept for two or three hours. + +"Ought we not to set a guard?" Harry had asked. + +"No, senor, I do not think it necessary. Jose will lie down by the side +of the llamas, and even if the mules should not give us a warning of +any man or beast approaching, the llamas will do so. They are the +shyest and most timid of creatures, and would detect the slightest +movement." + +For the next three weeks they continued their way. During this time +five or six ravines were investigated as far as they could be ascended. +Samples were frequently taken from sand and gravel and washed, but +though particles of gold were frequently found, they were not in +sufficient quantity to promise good results from washing. + +"If we had a band of natives with us," Dias said, "we should no doubt +get enough to pay well--that is to say, to cover all expenses and leave +an ounce or two of profit to every eight or ten men engaged--but as +matters stand we should only be wasting time by remaining here." + +They had no difficulty in obtaining sufficient food; turkeys and +pheasants were occasionally shot; a tapir was once killed, and, as they +had brought hooks and lines with them, fish were frequently caught in +the streams. These were of small size, but very good eating. But, as +Dias said, they could not hope to find larger species, except far out +in the plains, where the rivers were deep and sluggish. + +The work was hard, but they were now accustomed to it. They often had +to go a considerable distance before they could find trees available +for bridging the torrents, but, on the other hand, they sometimes came +upon some of much smaller girth than those they had first tackled. The +labour in getting these down was comparatively slight. Sometimes these +stood a little way from the stream, but after they were felled two +mules could easily drag them to the site of the bridge. When on the +march, Harry and his brother carried their double-barrelled guns, each +with one barrel charged with shot suitable for pheasants or other +birds, the other with buck-shot. Dias carried a rifle. Very seldom did +they mount their mules, the ground being so rough and broken, and the +boughs of the trees so thick, that it was less trouble to walk at the +heads of their animals than to ride. + + + + +CHAPTER VII + +AN INDIAN ATTACK + + +One day when they returned from exploring a valley, Harry and his +brother, taking their rifles, strolled down an open glade, while Dias +and Jose unpacked the animals. They had gone but a hundred yards when +they heard a sound that was new to them. It sounded like the grunting +of a number of pigs. Dias was attending to the mules. Harry and Bertie +caught up their guns. Presently a small pig made its appearance from +among some trees. Harry was on the point of raising his gun to his +shoulder when Dias shouted, "Stop, do not shoot!" + +"What is the matter, Dias?" he asked in surprise, as the latter ran up. + +"That is a peccary." + +"Well, it is a sort of pig, isn't it?" + +"Yes, senor. But if you were to kill it, we might all be torn in +pieces. They travel through the forests in great herds, and if one is +injured or wounded, the rest will rush upon its assailants. You may +shoot down dozens of them, but that only redoubles their fury. The only +hope of escape is to climb a tree; but they will keep watch there, +regardless of how many are shot, until hunger obliges them to retire. +They are the bravest beasts of the forests, and will attack and kill +even a lion or a tiger if it has seized one of their number. I beg you +to stroll back quietly, and then sit down. I will go to the head of the +mules. If the herd see that we pay no attention to them, they may go on +without interfering with us. If we see them approaching us, and +evidently intending to attack, we must take to the trees and try to +keep them from attacking the mules; but there would be small chance of +our succeeding in doing so." + +He and Jose at once went up to the mules, and stood perfectly quiet at +their head. Harry and Bertie moved closely up, laid their +double-barrelled guns beside them, and then sat down. By this time +forty or fifty of the peccaries had issued from the trees; some were +rooting among the herbage, others stood perfectly quiet, staring at the +group on the rise above them. Seeing no movement among them nor any +sign of hostility, they joined the others in their search for food, and +in a quarter of an hour the whole herd had moved off along the edge of +the forest. + +"Praise be to the saints!" Dias said, taking off his hat and crossing +himself. "We have escaped a great danger. A hunter would rather meet a +couple of lions or tigers than a herd of peccaries. These little +animals are always ready to give battle, and once they begin, fight +till they die. The more that are killed the more furious do the others +become. Even in a tree there is no safety. Many a hunter has been +besieged in a tree until, overpowered by thirst, he fell to the ground +and was torn to pieces." + +"What do they eat?" Harry asked. + +"They will eat anything they kill, but their chief food is roots. They +kill great numbers of snakes. Even the largest python is no match for a +herd of peccaries if they catch him before he can take refuge in a +tree." + +"Well, then, it is very lucky that you stopped us before we fired." + +"Fortunate indeed, senor. By taking to the trees we might have saved +our lives, but we should certainly have lost our mules. Both pumas and +tigers kill the little beasts when they come across stragglers. And it +is well that they do, for otherwise the woods would be full of them, +though fortunately they do not multiply as fast as our pigs, having +only two or three in a litter. They are good eating, but it is seldom +that a hunter can shoot one, for if he only wounds it, its shrieks will +call together all its companions within a mile round." + +"Then we must give up the idea of having pork while we are among the +mountains." + +"Now, are you going to keep me here all day, Dias?" Maria called +suddenly. "It seems to me that you have forgotten me altogether." + +Harry and Bertie could not help laughing. + +Dias had, on returning to the mules, taken his wife and seated her on a +branch six feet from the ground, in order that, should the peccaries +attack them, he might be ready at once to snatch up his rifle and join +in the fight without having first to think of the safety of his wife. +He now lifted her down. + +The action did even more than what Dias had said to convince Harry of +the seriousness of the danger to which they had been exposed, for as a +rule Donna Maria had scoffed at any offers of aid, even in the most +difficult places, and with her light springy step had taxed the power +of the others to keep up with her. These offers had not come from Dias, +who showed his confidence in his wife's powers by paying no attention +whatever, and a grim smile had often played on his lips when Harry or +his brother had offered her a hand. That his first thought had been of +her now showed that he considered the crisis a serious one. + +"I thought Dias had gone mad," she said, as she regained her feet. "I +could not think what was the matter when he began to shout and ran +towards you. I saw nothing but a little pig. Then, when he came slowly +back with you and suddenly seized me and jerked me up on to that bough, +I felt quite sure of it, especially when he told me to hold my tongue +and not say a word. Was it that little pig? I saw lots more of them +afterwards." + +"Yes; and if they had taken it into their heads to come this way you +would have seen a good deal more of them than would be pleasant," Dias +said. "With our rifles we could have faced four lions or tigers with a +better hope of success than those little pigs you saw. They were +peccaries, a sort of wild pig, and the most savage little beasts in the +forest. They would have chased us all up into the trees and killed all +the mules." + +"Who would have thought it!" she said. "Why, when I was a girl I have +often gone in among a herd of little pigs quite as big as those things, +and never felt the least afraid of them. I must have been braver than I +thought I was." + +"You are a good deal sillier than you think you are, Maria," Dias said +shortly. "There is as much difference between our pig and a peccary as +there is between a quiet Indian cultivator on the Sierra and one of +those savage Indians of the woods." + +"I suppose I can light a fire now, Dias. There is no fear of those +creatures coming back again, is there?" + +"No, I should think not. Fortunately they are going in the opposite +direction, otherwise I should have said that we had better stop here +for a day or two in case they should attack us if we came upon them +again." + +The next day, as they were journeying through the forest, at the foot +of the slopes Jose gave a sudden exclamation. + +"What is it?" Dias asked. + +"I saw a naked Indian standing in front of that tree; he has gone now." + +"Are you sure, Jose?" + +"Quite sure. He was standing perfectly still, looking at us, but when I +called to you he must have slipped round the tree. I only took my eyes +off him for a moment; when I looked again he was gone." + +"Then we are in for trouble," Dias said gravely. "Of course it was one +of the Chincas. No doubt he was alone, but you may be sure that he has +made off to tell his companions he has seen us. He will know exactly +how many we are, and how many animals we have. It may be twenty-four +hours, it may be three or four days, before he makes his appearance +again; but it is certain that, sooner or later, we shall hear of him. +Hunters as they are, they can follow a track where I should see +nothing; and so crafty are they, that they can traverse the country +without leaving the slightest sign of their passage. The forest might +be full of them, and yet the keenest white hunter would see no +footprint or other mark that would indicate their presence." + +"What had we better do, Dias?" + +"We shall probably come to another stream before nightfall, senor. This +we will follow up until we get to some ravine bare of trees. There we +can fight them; in the forest we should have no chance. They would lie +in ambush for us, climb into the trees and hide among the foliage, and +the first we should know of their presence would be a shower of arrows; +and as they are excellent marksmen, we should probably be all riddled +at the first volley. There can be no sauntering now, we must push the +animals forward at their best speed. I will lead the way. Do you, +senor, bring up the rear and urge the mules forward. I shall try and +pick the ground where the trees are thinnest, and the mules can then go +at a trot. They cannot do so here, for they would always be knocking +their loads off." + +It was evening before they arrived at a stream. Here they made a short +halt while they gave a double handful of grain to each of the animals, +then they pushed on again until it was too dark to go farther. + +"Will it be safe to light a fire, Dias?" + +"Yes, that will make no difference. They are not likely to attack us at +night. Savages seldom travel after dark, partly because they are afraid +of demons, partly because they would be liable to be pounced upon by +wild beasts. But I do not think there is any chance of their overtaking +us until tomorrow. The man Jose saw may have had companions close at +hand, but they will know that we are well armed, and will do nothing +until they have gathered a large number and feel sure that they can +overpower us. They will probably take up the track to-morrow at +daylight; but we have made a long march, and can calculate that we +shall find some defensible position before they overtake us. Jose and I +will keep watch to-night." + +"We will take turns with you, Dias." + +"No, senor; my ears are accustomed to the sounds of the forests, yours +are not. If you were watching I should still have no sleep." + +The night passed without an alarm. + +An hour before daylight Dias gave all the animals a good feed of corn, +and as soon as it was light they again started. They were already some +distance up the mountain, and after eight hours' travelling they +arrived at a gorge that suited their purpose. For two hundred yards the +rocks rose perpendicularly on each side of the stream, which was but +some thirty feet wide. No rain had fallen for some days, and the water +was shallow enough at the foot of the cliff for the mules to make their +way among the fallen rocks, through which it rushed impetuously. At the +upper end the cliffs widened out into a basin some fifty yards across. + +"We cannot do better than halt here," Dias said. "In two or three hours +we can form a strong breast-work on the rocks nearly out to the middle +of the stream, where the current is too swift for anyone to make his +way up against it." + +"Are they likely to besiege us long, Dias?" + +"That I cannot say; but I do not think they will give it up easily. +Savages learn to be patient when roaming the forest in search of game. +Their time is of no value to them; besides, they are sure to lose many +if they attack, and will therefore try to get their revenge." + +"They may have to give it up from want of food." + +Dias shook his head. + +"There are sure to be plenty of fish in the river, and they will poison +some pool and get an abundance. With their bows and arrows they can +bring down monkeys from the trees, and can snare small animals. +However, senor, we can talk over these things to-morrow. We had best +begin the breast-work at once while Maria is cooking dinner, which we +need badly enough, for we have had nothing but the maize cakes we ate +before starting." + +Working hard till it was dark, they piled up rocks and stones till they +formed a breast-work four feet high on both sides. Some twelve feet in +the centre were open. They had chosen a spot where so many fallen rocks +lay in the stream that it needed comparatively little labour to fill up +the gaps between them. + +"I thought wood-chopping bad enough," Bertie said as they threw +themselves down on the ground after completing their labour, "but it is +a joke to this. My back is fairly broken, my arms feel as if they were +pulled out of the sockets, my hands are cut, I have nearly squeezed two +nails off." + +"It has been hard work," Harry agreed; "still, we have made ourselves +fairly safe, and we will get the walls a couple of feet higher in the +morning. We shall only want to add to them on the lower face in order +to form a sort of parapet that will shelter us as we lie down to fire, +so it won't be anything like such hard work. Then we will fill in the +rocks behind with small stones and sand to lie down upon." + +"They will never be able to fight their way up to it," Dias said. + +"We need have no fear on that score. The question is, can they get down +into this valley behind us; the rocks look very steep and in most +places almost perpendicular." + +"They are steep, senor; but trees grow on them in many places, and +these savages are like monkeys. We shall have to examine them very +carefully when we have finished the wall. If we find that it is +possible for anyone to get down, we must go up the next gorge and see +if we can find a better position." + +"I suppose you think we are safe for to-night, Dias?' + +"I don't think they will try to come up through the stream. They have +keen eyes, but it would be so dark down there that even a cat could not +see. They will guess that we have stopped here, and will certainly want +to find out our position before they attack. One or two may come up as +scouts, and in that case they may attack at daybreak. Of course two of +us will keep watch; we can change every three hours. I will take the +first watch with your brother, and you and Jose can take the next." + +"Jose had better sleep," Maria put in; "he watched all last night. My +eyes are as good as his, and I will watch with Don Harry." + +Harry would have protested, but Dias said quietly: + +"That will be well, Maria, but you will have to keep your tongue quiet. +These savages have ears like those of wild animals, and if you were to +raise your voice you might get an arrow in the brain." + +"I can be silent when I like, Dias." + +"It is possible," Dias said dryly; "but I don't remember in all these +years we have been married that I have known you like to do so." + +"I take that as a compliment," she said quietly, "for it shows at least +that I am never sulky. Well, Don Harry, do you accept me as a fellow +watcher?" + +"Certainly I shall be very glad to have you with me; and I don't think +that you need be forbidden to talk in a low tone, for the roar of the +water among the rocks would prevent the sound of voices from being +heard two or three yards away." + +Accordingly, as soon as it became dark Dias went to the wall with +Bertie. Jose, after a last look at the mules, wrapped himself in a +blanket and lay down. + +"I think I had better turn in to the tent," Harry said; "we have had +two days' hard work, and the building of that wall has pretty nearly +finished me, so if I don't get two or three hours' sleep to-night I am +afraid I shall not be a very useful sentinel." + +Five minutes later he was sound asleep, and when his brother roused him +he could hardly believe that it was time for him to go on duty. + +"Dias is waiting there. Will you come down?" the latter said. "You were +sleeping like a top; I had to pull at your leg three times before you +woke." + +"I am coming," Harry said as he crawled out. "I feel more sleepy than +when I lay down, and will just run down to the stream and sluice my +head, that will wake me up in earnest, for the water is almost as cold +as ice." + +When he came back he was joined by Donna Maria, and, taking both his +shot-gun and rifle, he went forward with her to the barricade. + +"So you have neither seen nor heard anything, Dias?" + +"Nothing whatever, senor." + +"I have had a good sleep, Dias; we will watch for the next four hours. +It is eleven o'clock now, so you will be able at three to take it on +till daylight." + +"I will send and call you again an hour before that," Dias said. "If +they attack, as I expect they will as soon as the dawn breaks, we had +better have our whole force ready to meet them." + +So saying Dias went off. + +"This is scarcely woman's work, Donna Maria." + +"It is woman's work to help defend her life, senor, as long as she can. +If I found that the savages were beating us I should stab myself. They +would kill you, but they might carry me away with them, which would be +a thousand times worse than death." + +"I don't think there is any fear of their beating us," Harry said; +"certainly not here. We ought properly to be one on each side, but +really I shirk the thought of wading through the river waist-deep at +that shallow place we found a hundred yards up; it would be bad enough +to go through it, worse still to lie for four hours in wet clothes." + +"Besides, we could not talk then, senor," Maria said with a little +laugh, "and that would be very dull." + +"Very dull. Even now we must only talk occasionally; we shall have to +keep our eyes and ears open." + +"I don't think either of them will be much good," she said; "I can see +the white water but nothing else, and I am sure I could not hear a +naked footstep on the rocks." + +"It is a good thing the water is white, because we can make out the +rocks that rise above the surface. When our eyes get quite accustomed +to the dark we should certainly be able to see any figures stepping +upon them or wading in the water." + +"I could see that now, senor. I think it will be of advantage to talk, +for I am sure if I were to lie with my eyes straining, and thinking of +nothing else, they would soon begin to close." + +Talking occasionally in low tones, but keeping up a vigilant watch, +they were altogether hidden from the view of anyone coming up the +stream, for they exposed only their eyes and the top of their heads +above the rough parapet. No attempt had been made to fill up the spaces +between the stones, so that, except for the rounded shape, it would be +next to impossible to make them out between the rough rocks of the +crest. Harry had laid his double-barrelled gun on the parapet in front +of him. He had loaded both barrels with buck-shot, feeling that in the +darkness he was far more likely to do execution with that weapon than +with a rifle. + +They had been some two hours on watch when Donna Maria touched his arm +significantly. He gazed earnestly but could see nothing. A minute +later, however, a rock about fifteen yards away seemed to change its +shape. Before, it had been pointed, but just on one side of the top +there was now a bulge. + +"Do you see them?" Maria whispered. "I can make out one above the +rocks; the other is standing against the wall." + +[Illustration: AN INDIAN SPIES THE EXPEDITION.] + +There was no movement for two or three minutes, and Harry had no doubt +that they were examining the two black lines of stones between which +the water was rushing. + +"There are two others on this side, senor," Maria whispered. + +The pause was broken by the sharp tap of two arrows striking on the +stones a few inches below their heads. + +"Well, you have begun it," Harry muttered. + +He had already sighted his gun at the head half-hidden by the rock. He +now pulled the trigger, and then, turning, he fired the other barrel, +aiming along the side of the canyon where the two men seen by his +companion must be standing. The head disappeared, and loud cries broke +from the other side. The stillness that had reigned in the valley was +broken by a chorus of shrieks and roars, and the air overhead thrilled +with the sound of innumerable wings. Harry on firing had laid down the +fowling-piece and snatched up his rifle. + +"Do you see any others?" + +"Two have run away; the one against the rocks on the other side was +wounded, for I saw him throw up his arms, and it was he who screamed. +The man by him dropped where he stood; the one behind the rock is +killed, I saw his body carried away in the white water." + +Half a minute later Dias and Bertie came up. + +"So they have come, senor?" + +"Yes, there were four of them. Your wife saw them, though I could only +make out one. They shot two arrows at us, and I answered them. The man +I saw was killed, and Donna Maria said that one on the other side also +fell, and another was wounded." + +"That was a good beginning," Dias said. "After such a lesson they will +attempt nothing more to-night, and I doubt whether they will come down +in the morning. They can get sight of the barricades from that bend a +hundred yards down, and I don't think they will dare come up when they +see how ready we are for them." + +"Well, we will work out our watch anyhow, Dias. Now that I see how +sharp Donna Maria's eyes are I have not the least fear of being +surprised." + +"I will stop with you," Bertie said; "I shall have no chance of going +off to sleep again after being wakened up like that." + +"If you are going to stop, Bertie, you had better go back and fetch a +blanket, it is chilly here; then if you like you can doze off again +till your watch comes." + +"There is no fear of that, Harry. I have been eight-and-forty hours on +deck more than once. I will warrant myself not to go to sleep." + +In spite of this, however, in less than ten minutes after his return +Bertie's regular breathing showed that he was sound asleep. Harry and +Maria continued their watch, but no longer with the same intentness as +before. They were sure that Dias would not have lain down unless he +felt perfectly certain that the Chincas would make no fresh move until +the morning, and they chatted gaily until, at two o'clock, Dias came up. + +"Everything is quiet here, Dias. My brother is fast asleep, but I will +wake him now that you have come up." + +"Do not do so, senor; he worked very hard building the walls today. If +I see anything suspicious I will rouse him. We may have work tomorrow, +and it is much better that he should sleep on." + +"Thank you, Dias! the fatigue has told on him more than on us; his +figure is not set yet, and he feels it more." + +He walked back to the tents with Maria. + +"If you wake just as daylight breaks please rouse me," he said. + +"I shall wake, senor; I generally get up at daybreak. That is the best +time for work down in the plain, and I generally contrive to get +everything done before breakfast at seven." + +Harry slept soundly until he was called. + +"The sky is just beginning to get light, senor." + +He turned out at once. Jose was already feeding the mules. + +"You had better come along with me, Jose, and bring that gun of yours +with you. If the savages do attack, it will be well to make a forcible +impression on them." + +Greatly pleased with the permission, Jose took up the old musket he +carried and accompanied Harry. + +"What have you got in that gun, Jose?" + +"The charge of buck-shot that you gave me the other day, senor." + +"All right! but don't fire unless they get close. The shot will not +carry far like a bullet; but if fired when they are close it is better +than any bullet, for you might hit half a dozen of them at once." + +Jose had been allowed to practise at their halting-places, and though +he could not be called a good shot, he could shoot well enough to do +good execution at thirty or forty yards. + +Bertie was still asleep. + +"Everything quiet, Dias?" + +"I have seen nothing moving since I came out." + +"Now, Bertie," Harry said, stirring his brother up with his foot. "All +hands on deck!" + +Bertie sat up and opened his eyes. "What is up now?" he said. "Ay, +what, is it you, Harry, and Jose too? I must have been asleep!" + +"Been asleep! Why, you went off in the middle of my watch, and Dias has +been on the look-out for over three hours." + +"Oh, confound it! You don't mean to say that I have slept for over five +hours? Why didn't you wake me, Dias?" he asked angrily. + +"Two eyes were quite enough to keep watch," Dias said. "I should have +waked you if I had seen anything of the savages. Besides, Don Harry +said you might as well go on sleeping if nothing happened, and I +thought so too." + +"I feel beastly ashamed of myself," Bertie said. "I don't want to be +treated like a child, Harry." + +"No, Bertie, and I should not think of treating you so; but you had had +very hard work, and were completely knocked up, which was not +wonderful; and you may want all your strength to-day. Besides, you +know, you would have been of no use had you been awake, for you could +have seen nothing. Donna Maria's eyes were a good deal sharper than +mine, and I am quite sure that, tired as you were, Dias would have seen +them coming long before you would. We had better lie down again, for it +will be light enough soon for them to make us out. How far do their +arrows fly, Dias?" + +"They can shoot very straight up to forty or fifty yards, but beyond +that their arrows are of very little use." + +"Well, then, we shall be able to stop them before they get to that +ravine." + +Presently, as it became light, a figure showed itself at the turn of +the ravine. + +"Don't fire at him," Harry said; "it is better that they should think +that our guns won't reach them. Besides, if the beggars will leave us +alone, I have no wish to harm them." + +In a minute or two the figure disappeared behind the bend and two or +three others came out. "They think that our guns won't carry so far, or +we should have shot the first man." + +For a quarter of an hour there were frequent changes, until at least +fifty men had taken a look at them. + +"Now there will be a council," Harry said as the last disappeared. +"They see what they have got before them, and I have no doubt they +don't like it." + +"I don't think they will try it, senor," Dias said. "At any rate they +will not do so until they have tried every other means of getting at +us." + +Half an hour passed, and then Harry said. "I will stop here with my +brother, Dias, and you and Jose had better examine the hillsides and +ascertain whether there is any place where they can come down. You know +a great deal better than I where active naked-footed men could clamber +down. They might be able to descend with ease at a place that would +look quite impossible to me." + +Without a word Dias shouldered his rifle and walked away, followed by +Jose. He returned in two hours. + +"There are several places where I am sure the savages could come down. +Now, senors, breakfast is ready; I will leave Jose here, and we will go +and talk matters over while we eat. The tents are only a hundred yards +away, so that if Jose shouts, we can be back here long before the +savages get up, for they could not come fast through that torrent." + +"It seems to me," Harry said after they had finished the meal, "that if +there are only one or two points by which they could climb down we +could prevent their doing so by picking them off; but if there are +more, and they really come on in earnest, we could not stop them." + +"There are many more than that," Dias replied. "I made out certainly +four points on the right-hand side and three on the left where I could +make my way down; there are probably twice as many where they could +descend." + +"Then I should say that the first thing to do is to go up through the +gorge above and see whether there is any place that could be better +defended than this. If we find such a spot, of course we could move to +it; if not, we shall have to settle whether to go up the gorge till we +get to some place where the mules can climb out of it, or stay here and +fight it out. By camping on the stream at a point where it could not be +forded, and making a breast-work with the bales, stones, and so on, I +think we could certainly beat off any attack by daylight, but I admit +that we should have no chance if they should make a rush during the +night." + +"I will go at once," said Dias, "and examine the river higher up. If I +can find no place where the mules can climb, I am sure to be able to +find some spot where we could do so. But that would mean the failure of +our expedition, for we certainly could not go up the mountains, +purchase fresh animals, food, and tools, and get down to the place we +are looking for until too late." + +"That would be serious, Dias, but cannot be counted against our lives. +If there is no other way of escape from these savages, we must +certainly abandon the animals and make our way back as best we can. In +that case we must give up all idea of finding this gold stream. The +star would not be in the same place again for another year, and even +then we might not find it; so we must make up our minds to do our best +in some other direction. That point we must consider as settled. I +should not feel justified in risking my brother's life, yours, your +wife's, and your nephew's, by remaining here to fight we know not how +many savages--for there may be many more than the fifty we saw this +morning, and they may in a day or two be joined by many others of their +tribe." + +"I should not like to lose all the animals and go back empty-handed," +Dias said after a silence of two or three minutes, "unless it were a +last resource." + +"Nor should I, Dias; but you see, if we linger too long we may find it +impossible to retire, we may be so hemmed in that there would be no +chance of our getting through. For the day of course we are safe. The +savages will have to decide among themselves whether to give the matter +up, seeing that they are sure to lose many lives before they overpower +us. Then, if they determine to attack us, they will have to settle how +it is to be done. Numbers of them will go up to the top of the hills on +both sides and try to find a point at which they can make their way +down; others, perhaps--which would be still more serious--may go +farther up into the hills to find a spot where they could come down and +issue out by the upper gorge, and then our retreat would be altogether +cut off. All this will take time, so we may feel sure that no attack +will be made to-day." + +"I will start up the river at once, senor. Certainly the first point to +be settled is whether we can find a more defensible spot than this, the +second whether there is any way by which the animals can be taken up." + +"There must surely be many points higher up where this can be done." + +"Yes, senor, if we could get to them. But you saw we had difficulty in +making our way through this gorge; there may be others higher up where +it would be impossible either for us or the animals to pass." + +"I did not think of that. Yes, that must be so. Well, you had certainly +better go at once. My brother will relieve Jose, and after the boy has +breakfasted he can return to his post, and Bertie can join me. I think +if I see the savages trying to find a path I will open fire upon them. +I don't say I should be able to hit them, for the top of those hills +must be eight or nine hundred yards' range, and it is not easy to hit +an object very much above or very much below you; but it is important +that they should know that our weapons carry as far as that; when they +hear bullets strike close to them they will hesitate about coming lower +down, and unless they do come within two or three hundred feet from the +bottom they cannot be sure of getting down." + +Dias nodded. "That is a very good idea. Another cause of delay will be +that those at the top cannot see far down the rock on their own side, +so they will have to start by guess-work. Each party must fix upon the +easiest places on the opposite side, and then go back again and change +sides. I don't suppose they know any more of this place than we do. +They always keep down in the plains, and it is only because they met us +down there that they have followed us so far. I believe they will +follow on as long as they think there is a chance of destroying us, for +they are so jealous of any white man coming into what they regard as +their country that they would spare no pains to kill anyone who +ventured there. Now I will go, senor. You will keep near this end of +the valley, in case there should be an alarm that they are coming up +the stream." + +"Certainly; and my brother shall remain with Jose. With his rifle and +the two double-barrelled guns and Jose's musket they could hold the +ravine against anything but a rush of the whole tribe." + +An hour later Harry saw a number of figures appear against the sky-line +on both sides. As they were clustered together, and would afford a far +better mark than a single Indian, he took a steady aim at the party on +the southern hill and fired. He had aimed above rather than below them, +as, had the ball struck much below, they might not hear it, whereas, if +it went over their heads, they would certainly do so. A couple of +seconds after firing he saw a sudden movement among the savages, and a +moment later not one was to be seen. Donna Maria, who was standing +close by him watching them, clapped her hands. "Your ball must have +gone close to them," she said, "but I don't think you hit anyone." + +"I did not try to do so," he said. "I wanted the ball to go just over +their heads, so that they should know that even at that distance they +were not safe. I have no doubt that astonishment as much as fear made +them bolt. They'll be very careful how far they come down the side of +the hill after that. Now for the fellows on the other side." + +But these too had disappeared, having evidently noticed the effect +produced upon the others. After a pause heads appeared here and there +at the edge of the crests. Evidently the lesson had impressed them with +the necessity for precaution, as they no longer kept together, and they +had apparently crawled up to continue their investigations. Beyond +keeping a watch to see that none had attempted to descend the slope +Harry did not interfere with them. At times he strolled to the +breast-work, but no movement had been seen in that direction. In two +hours Dias returned. + +"The gorge above is a quarter of a mile through, and very difficult to +pass. It is half-blocked with great rocks in two or three places, and +there would be immense difficulty in getting the mules over. Beyond +that it widens again, but the extent is not more than half what it is +here. The walls are almost perpendicular, and I do not think that it +would be possible to climb them at any point. Farther up there is +another ravine. It is very narrow--not half so wide as this--and the +stream rushes with great velocity along it. Two hundred yards from the +entrance the rocks close in completely, and there is a fall of water +sixty or seventy feet high." + +"Well, that settles the point, Dias. We cannot get the animals out +except by the way they came in. As for ourselves, we might climb up at +some point in this ravine, but not in the others." + +"That is so, senor," Dias said. "The outlook is a bad one--that is to +say, we may now be unable to reach the gold river in time--but so long +as we stay here we may be safe. We have plenty of provisions, we can +catch fish in the stream, and no doubt shall find birds in the bushes +at the lower part of the slopes. I doubt whether the natives will dare +come down those precipices at night. If they try to descend by day, we +can very well defend ourselves." + +"The only question is, How long will it take to tire them out?" + +"That I cannot tell. We know so little of the Chincas that we have +nothing to go upon. Some savages have patience enough to wait for any +time to carry out their revenge or slay an enemy; others are fickle, +and though they may be fierce in attack, soon tire of waiting, and are +eager to return to their homes again. I cannot think that they will +speedily leave. They have assembled, many of them perhaps from +considerable distances; they have had two days' march up here, and have +lost at least two of their comrades. I think they will certainly not +leave until absolutely convinced that they cannot get at us, but +whether they may come to that decision in two days or a month I cannot +say." + + + + +CHAPTER VIII + +DEFEAT OF THE NATIVES + + +Bertie, who had joined Harry when he saw Dias approaching, had listened +silently to their talk, then said: + +"Don't you think that, by loading the mules and moving towards the +mouth of the next gorge just as it is getting dark, we might induce the +Chincas to think that we are going that way, and so to follow along the +top of the hills. We might, as soon as night has fallen, come back +again and go down the stream. Of course there may be some of them left +to watch the mouth of the ravine, but we could drive them off easily +enough, and get a long start before the fellows on the hills know what +has happened." + +None of the others spoke immediately; then Harry said: + +"The idea is a good one as far as it goes. But you see at present we +are in a very strong position. If we leave this and they overtake us in +the woods, we shall not have the advantages that we have here." + +"Yes, I see that, Harry; but almost anything is better than having to +wait here and lose our chance of finding that gold." + +"We can't help that, Bertie. You know how much that gold would be to +me, but, as I said this morning, I will run no desperate risks to +obtain it. When I started upon this expedition I knew that the chances +of success were extremely slight, and that there might be a certain +amount of danger to encounter from wild beasts and perhaps brigands; +but I had never calculated upon such a risk as this, and certainly I am +not prepared to accept the responsibility of leading others into it." + +There was again silence, which was broken at last by Dias. + +"The proposal of the young senor is a very bold one; but, as you say, +Don Harry, after leaving our position we should be followed and +surrounded. In the forest that would be very bad. I should say let us +wait for at least a week; that will still give us time to reach the +gold valley. By then the savages may have left, and some other plan may +have occurred to us; at any rate, at the end of a week we shall see how +things go. The Indians may have made an attack, and may lose heart +after they are repulsed. They may find difficulty in procuring food, +though I hardly think that is probable. Still, many things may occur in +a week. If at the end of that time they are still here, we can decide +whether to try some such plan as the young senor has thought of, or +whether to wait until the Indians leave, and then return to Cuzco; for +I feel certain that the place cannot be found except by the help of the +star." + +"Well, then," Bertie said, "could we not hit upon some plan to frighten +them?" + +"What sort of plan, Bertie?" + +"Well, of course we could not make a balloon--I mean a +fire-balloon--because we have no paper to make it with. If we could, +and could let it up at night, with some red and blue fires to go off +when it got up high, I should think it would scare them horribly." + +"Yes; but it would be still better, Bertie, if we could make a balloon +big enough to carry us and the mules and everything else out of this +place, and drop us somewhere about the spot we want to get to." + +"Oh, it is all very well to laugh, Harry! I said, I knew we could not +make a fire-balloon; I only gave that as an example. If we had powder +enough we might make some rockets, and I should think that would scare +them pretty badly." + +"Yes, but we haven't got powder, Bertie. We have plenty of cartridges +for sporting purposes, or for fighting; but a rocket is a thing that +wants a lot of powder, besides saltpetre and charcoal, and so on." + +"Yes, yes, I know that," Bertie said testily. "My suggestion was that +we might frighten them somehow, and I still don't see why we shouldn't +be able to do it. Let us try to hit upon something else." + +"There is a good deal in what the young senor says," Dias said gravely. +"All the Indians are very superstitious, and think anything they don't +understand is magic. It is worth thinking over: but before we do +anything else we might find out how many of them there are at the other +end of the ravine. Only a few may be left, or possibly the whole tribe +may be gathered there at nightfall. To-night nothing will be settled, +but to-morrow night I will go down the torrent with Jose. I will carry +your double-barrelled guns with me, senor, if you will let me have +them. When we get to the other end I will take up my station there. +Jose is small and active. He could crawl forward and ascertain how many +of them there are. If he should be discovered, which is not likely, he +would run back to me. I should have four barrels ready to pour into +them. That would stop them, for they would think we were all there and +were going to attack them, and before they could recover from their +alarm we should be back here again." + +"That seems a good plan, Dias; but I do not see why Bertie and I should +not go down with you." + +"It would be better not, senor. In the first place, they may have men +posted at their end of the ravine, and though two of us might crawl +down without being seen, just as they crawled up here, they would be +more likely to see four; in the next place, they might chance to crawl +down the hillside above just as we were going down the ravine, and +Maria and the animals would be at their mercy." + +"They are hardly likely to choose the exact moment when we are to be +away, but I quite agree with you that the risk must not be run." + +"Well," Bertie said, returning to his former idea, "if Dias can go down +there, I still think that somehow we might get up a scare." + +Harry laughed. + +"Well, you think it over, Bertie. If you can suggest anything, I +promise you that Dias and I will do our best to carry it out." + +"Very well," Bertie replied gravely, "I will think it over." + +"Now," Harry said, "we had better sleep in watches at night; one must +be at the breast-work, and one must listen for noises on the cliffs. It +would be hardly possible for a number of men to crawl down without +exciting suspicion or putting in motion some small stones." + +"I do not think, senor," Dias said, "that it will be necessary to keep +that watch, for, as we knew from the noise when you fired last night, +there are numbers of birds and at least one beast--I fancy it is a bear +from the sound of its roar--up there, and it would be strange if a +number of men making their way down did not disturb some of them; +indeed, if one bird gave the alarm, it would put them all in motion; +besides, there are certainly monkeys, for I heard their cries and +chattering when the birds flew up. Still, it is perhaps as well that +one of us should watch. Shall we divide, as we did last night? only, of +course, Jose takes his place with you." + +"I quite agree with you, Dias. Bertie, you had better get three hours' +sleep at once, and then after dinner we will sit by the fire here, +smoke, and listen, and Dias will watch the gorge and keep one ear open +in this direction too. It is a comfort to know that if we cannot get +away by going up the stream, the Indians cannot get down to attack us +from that direction." + +Two nights and days passed. The Indians were still on the hills, and +once or twice men came down some distance, but a shot from Harry's +rifle sent them speedily back again. The third night Bertie was on +watch; he saw nothing, but suddenly there came three sharp taps. He +discharged one barrel of his gun at random down the ravine, and then +held himself ready to fire the other as soon as he saw anyone +approaching. It was an anxious minute for him before the other three +ran up. + +"What is it, Bertie; have you seen anything?" + +"No, but three arrows tapped against the wall, so I fired one barrel to +call you up, and have been looking out for someone to take a shot at +with the other; but I have not seen anyone, though, as you may imagine, +I looked out sharply." + +"It is probable that after the lesson they got the other night they did +not come so near, and that they merely shot their arrows to see if we +were still on guard. However, we may as well stay here for a bit to see +if anything comes of it." + +Nothing happened, however, and they returned to the tents. Next morning +Bertie said to his brother: + +"Look here, Harry, I have been thinking over that plan of mine. I +really think there is something to be done with it." + +"Well, tell us your plan." + +"In the first place, how much powder can you spare?" + +"There is that great powder-horn Jose drags about with him to charge +his musket with. It will contain about a couple of pounds, I should +say." + +"That ought to do, I think." + +"Well, what is your plan, Bertie?" + +"In the first place, do you think that burned wood would do for +charcoal?" + +"It depends on what purpose you want it for." + +"I want it to prevent the powder from going off with a bang." + +"Oh, well, I should think that burned wood ground to a powder would be +just as good as charcoal. So you are still thinking of rockets? Your +two pounds of powder won't make many of them--not above two fair-sized +ones, and the betting is they would not go up." + +"No, I am not thinking of rockets, but of squibs and crackers. I know +when I was at school I made a lot of these, and they worked very well. +My idea is that if we could crawl up close to where the Indians are +assembled, each carrying a dozen squibs and as many crackers, we could +light a lot of the crackers first and chuck them among them, and then +send the squibs whirling about over their heads, with a good bang at +the end. It would set them off running, and they would never stop till +they were back in their own forests." + +"Well, I really do think that that is a fine idea--a splendid idea! The +only drawback is, that in order to carry it out we should want a lot of +strong cartridge-paper, and we have no paper except our note-books." + +"I have thought of that, Harry, though it bothered me for a good long +time. You see, the cases are only to hold the powder and to burn +regularly as the powder does. At first I thought we might find some +wood like elder and get the pith out, just as we used to do for +pop-guns, but that unfortunately would not burn. We might, however, +make them of linen." + +"But we have no linen." + +"No, but our leather bed-bags are lined with that coarse sort of stuff +they cover mattresses with." + +"Tick, you mean?" + +"Yes, tick. Now, it struck me that this would do for the crackers. We +should have to cut it in strips three or four times the width of the +cracker. Then we could get Maria to make us some stiff paste; starch +would be better, but of course we have none. Then, taking a strip of +the cloth, we would turn over one side of it an inch from the edge to +make a sort of trough, pour in the gunpowder, carefully paste all the +rest of it and fold it over and over, and then, when it begins to dry, +double it up and tie it with string. We should then only have to add +touch-paper, which, of course, we could make out of anything, and put +into the end fold. We could break up a few of the cartridges, soak them +in wetted powder, and then cut them up into small pieces and stick them +into the ends of the crackers. I think that would do first-rate. I have +made dozens of crackers, and feel sure that I could turn out a good lot +of them now. The squibs will be easier; we should only have to paste +one side of the strips and roll them up so as to form suitable cases. +When these are dry we should put a thimbleful of powder into each, and +then fill them up with powder and charcoal. In order to make sure of a +loud bang we could undo a piece of rope and wind the strands round each +case for an inch and a half from the bottom. Of course, when we had +ground down the burned wood we would mix it with powder and try one or +two of the squibs, so as to find the proportions of charcoal to be +used." + +"You have evidently thought it all out well, and I think it does you no +end of credit. I authorize you to begin the experiment at once. The +first thing, of course, will be to get some wood and char it. I should +think that you would require at least two pounds of that to two pounds +of powder; but you had better only do a little at first--just enough to +make an experiment. You know it will require ramming down well." + +When Dias, who was on watch, returned he found Bertie at work burning +pieces of wood and scraping off the charred surface. Harry explained +the plan to him. As he had frequently seen fireworks at Lima, Dias +quickly grasped the idea. + +"It is splendid, senor; those things will frighten them far more than +guns. They will think so many devils have got among them, and we will +heighten the effect by discharging every piece that we can among them. +In their confusion they will think it is the fireworks that are killing +them. That would be necessary, for otherwise when they recovered from +the panic and found that no one had been hurt, they might summon up +courage to return." + +At noon the next day Bertie with assistance had four squibs and two +crackers ready for trial. The squibs contained respectively one, two, +three, and four parts of charcoal to one of powder. + +"Don't hold them in your hand while you are trying the experiment, +Bertie. Lay them down on that stone one by one and touch them off with +a burning brand from the fire, and take care that you have a good long +one." + +All, with the exception of Jose who was on watch, gathered round. The +first squib exploded with a bang, the second did the same, but with +less violence, the third went off in an explosive spurt, the fourth +burned as a squib should do, though a little fiercely, and gave a good +bang at the end. + +"They go off rather too rapidly, Bertie," Harry said; "we should want +them to whiz about in a lively way as long as possible. I should put in +five parts of that burned wood next time." + +"I will try at once," Bertie said. "I have got lots of cases made, and +enough burned stuff to make eight or ten more." + +The mixture was soon made and another case charged, Bertie ramming down +the mixture with a stick which he had cut to fit exactly, and a heavy +stone as a hammer. This was done after each half-spoonful of the +mixture was poured in. Then he inserted a strip of his touch-paper. + +"I will take this in my hand," he said, "there is no fear of its +exploding. I want to throw it into the air and see how it burns there." + +The touch-paper was lit, and when the mixture started burning Bertie +waved the squib high above his head and threw it into the air. It flew +along some fifteen yards and then exploded. + +"I don't think you can better that, Bertie. But you might make the +cases a bit stronger; it burned out a little too quickly. We shall +probably not be able to get very close to them." + +The cracker was equally satisfactory, except that they agreed that a +somewhat larger charge of powder should be used to increase the noise +of the explosion. + +"Now, Bertie," Harry said, "we will put all hands on to the business. +Donna Maria shall make a good stock of paste, and cut the tick into +strips for both widths. You shall make the cases for the squibs. Dias +and I will take charge of the manufacture of charcoal. That will be a +long job, for as you have two pounds of gunpowder we shall want ten of +this charred wood." + +"Not quite as much as that, Harry, because we shall want the powder +alone for the crackers and the bangs of the squibs, and also for making +the touch-paper for all of them." + +"Well, we will say ten pounds, anyhow. We have a big stock of +cartridges, and can spare a few of them for so good a purpose." + +They were soon at work. By night the cases were all made and drying, +and were left near the fire so as to be ready for filling in the +morning. + +Dias then said: "Jose will go down to-night, senor. Of course I shall +go with him. We must find out, in the first place, how near the mouth +of the ravine the savages are gathered, whether they keep any watch, +and what force they have. It will be well not to make ourselves known +to them until at least the greater part are gathered there. If we were +only to scare a small party, the others, when they came down, would +know nothing of the panic, and might take up the pursuit." + +"I wish we had some means of driving them off the top of the hill, +Dias." + +"I don't see how that can be done, senor. But probably in another day +or two they will all go down of their own accord. They must by this +time have satisfied themselves that there is no getting at us from +above, and that it would be too dangerous to attempt a descent here +under the fire of our guns. They will be very likely, instead, to go +down to-morrow or next day to hold a general council, and in that case +they may decide either to risk climbing down at night, or to make a +grand assault on the breast-work. Or, if they cannot bring themselves +to that, they may decide to leave half a dozen men to watch the +entrance, while the rest scatter themselves over the forests. In that +case the watchers would only have to go off and summon them when we +started again. As they might well imagine that we should not find +another position like this again, I expect that is what they will do. +If there are a hundred of them, they will find it difficult to feed +themselves long. Certainly the men on the hills will get little to eat +up there." + +"Well, Dias, be sure you warn Jose to be careful. They may be posting +sentries at the mouth of the ravine, just as they are keeping them at +this end." + +"They may be, but I do not think it is likely; they will know that we +could not abandon our animals, and that if we passed through they would +have no difficulty in over-taking us, and would then have us at their +mercy. The last thing they would want is to prevent us from leaving +this position. They certainly would not fear an attack from us, knowing +that there are but four of us and a woman. Therefore, I think it +probable that they will keep at some little distance from the entrance, +so as to tempt us to come out." + +"I hope it is so, Dias. Still, Jose will have to be very careful." + +"He will be careful, senor. He knows his own life will depend upon his +crawling along as noiselessly as a snake. If he is seen, of course he +will come at all speed back to me; and, unless he is hit by a chance +arrow, he will not run much risk, for by the time they are ready to +shoot he will be out of sight on such dark nights as these, and in the +shade of the mountains and trees. I shall be ready to send four barrels +of buck-shot among them when they come up. That is sure to stop them +long enough to allow us to get under the cover of your rifles before +they can overtake us. + +"I don't think that you need be at all uneasy about him, senor. We will +start in an hour's time, so that Jose can get near them before they go +to sleep. They will probably have a fire burning, but if not the only +guide to their position will be the sound of their talking. He will +strip before he leaves me, so that if they catch sight of him, they +will suppose that he is one of themselves." + +Bertie now relieved Jose, who came back and had a long talk with Dias. + +"We are ready now, senor." + +"Here is my fowling-piece. It is already loaded with buck-shot. Bertie +has taken down his rifle and gun, and will give you the latter as you +pass. I suppose Jose will take no weapons?" + +"Only a long knife, senor, that may be useful if he comes upon one of +them suddenly." + +At the barricade Jose stripped, retaining only a pair of sandals. These +were as noiseless as his bare feet, and would be needed, as in the dark +he might tread upon a thorny creeper, or strike against a projecting +rock. + +"Good-bye, Jose!" Harry said. "Now, be careful. It would be a great +grief to us if anything happened to you." + +"I will be careful, senor. The Indians won't catch me, never fear." + +Harry and Bertie both shook hands with him, and then he and Dias +stepped into the water, and, keeping close along by the wall of rock, +started on their perilous expedition. + +"I don't like it, Bert," Harry said as they lost sight of them. "It +seems a cowardly thing to let that lad go into danger while we are +doing nothing." + +"That is just what I feel, Harry. I would have volunteered willingly, +but he will do it a great deal better than either you or I could." + +"There is no doubt about that," Harry agreed. "Of course when he is out +with the mules he often travels at night, and certainly both he and +Dias can see in the dark a good deal better than we can." + +There was suddenly a slight movement behind them, and they turned +sharply round. "It is I, senor. I am anxious about Dias, and I didn't +like staying there by myself. I thought you would not mind if I came up +and sat by you." + +"Certainly not," Harry said. "Sit down and make yourself comfortable. I +do not think there is any fear for Dias. He cannot be taken by +surprise, for he will hear by their shouting if they discover Jose, and +you may be quite sure that he will bring them to a stand with the four +shots he will fire among them as they come near, and so will get a good +start. They might run faster than he can in the forest, but will +scarcely be better able to make their way up the torrent." + +When Dias had been gone twenty minutes their conversation ceased, and +they sat listening intently. In another ten minutes, which seemed an +hour to them, Harry said, "The savages can keep no watch at their end +of the torrent, and Jose must have got safely away." + +Very slowly the time passed. + +"They must have been gone an hour," Bertie said at last. + +"Quite that, I should think, Bertie. At any rate, we may feel assured +that all has gone well so far. For, though we might not hear the yells +of the savages over the rustle and roar of the torrent, we should +certainly hear gunshots." + +Another half-hour passed, and then to their relief they heard Dias call +out, "All is well!" some little distance down. In three or four minutes +they could see the two figures approaching. "Give me your guns, Dias," +Harry said, "and then I will help you up the rocks. They might go off +if you were to make a slip. Now, while Jose is putting on his clothes, +tell me what he has found out." + +"I have not heard much, senor. As soon as he rejoined me we started +off, and, coming up the torrent, we had not much chance of talking. He +told me that there were many of them, and that they were camped at some +little distance from the stream, just as I thought they would be." + +"I will stay here, Harry," Bertie said. "You can hear the news and then +come and tell me." + +"Very well. I will be back before long." + +Dias, his wife, and Harry walked down towards the tent, and Bertie +chatted with Jose while the latter was dressing. + +"You must feel horribly cold, Jose," he said. + +"I am cold, now I think of it. I did not notice it while I was watching +the savages. When I took to the water again I did feel it. Maria will +make me a cup of hot coffee, and then I shall be all right again. It +was good fun to look at them, and know that they had no idea that I was +so close. If I could have understood their language, I should have +learned something worth telling. I felt inclined to scare them by +giving a tremendous yell, and I know I could have got away all right. +They were sitting round a big fire and would not have been able to see +in the dark. I should have done it, only I thought Dias would have +blamed me for letting them know that one of us had come down the canyon." + +"He would have been angry, Jose, and so would my brother, for they +would certainly have set a watch afterwards, which would have spoilt +all our plans. Now run along, your teeth are chattering, and the sooner +you get something warm and wrap yourself up in your blankets the +better." + +The fire had burnt low when the others returned, but an armful of +sticks was thrown upon it at once. The kettle had been left in the +embers at its edge by Maria when she started, so that after it had hung +in the blaze for two or three minutes it began to boil, and coffee was +soon ready. At this point Jose ran in, and after he had drunk a large +mugful he told them what he had learned. + +"When I left Dias at the mouth of the ravine," he said, "everything +seemed quiet. I walked along the edge of the stream for fifty yards, +keeping my ears open, you may be sure, and I saw a light glow close +under the rocks some distance on the other side of the river. I +followed the stream down till I came to a place where there was a quiet +pool, and there I swam across, then very carefully I made my way to +where I could see the light. It was quite three hundred yards from the +river. As I got near I could hear talking; I crawled along like a cat, +and took good care not to disturb a leaf, or to put a hand or a knee +upon a dried stick, for I could not tell whether they had anyone on +watch near the fire. I perceived no one, and at last came to a point +where I could see the flame. It was in an opening running a hundred +feet into the mountains, and perhaps forty feet across at the mouth. + +"In this were sixty or seventy savages sitting or standing round a +fire, which had evidently been made there so that anyone coming down to +the mouth of the ravine should not see it. The fire was not a very +large one, and a good many of the men were gathered outside the little +hollow. Some of them were talking loudly, and it seemed to me that they +were quarrelling over something. Sometimes they pointed up to the top +of the hills, sometimes towards the mouth of our ravine. I would have +got close if I had understood their language. Presently I saw some of +them lying down, so that I could see that the quarrel, whatever it was +about, was coming to an end, and that they were going to lie down for +the night. As I could learn nothing further I crawled away and went +down to the place where I had swum the river before, and then crept +quietly up to Dias, who was on the look-out; for although I had seen no +one as I had passed before, there might still have been some of them on +the watch." + +"You have done very well, Jose," Harry said. "We have learned two +things. First, that they are not keeping watch at the mouth of the +ravine, either because they feel sure that we will not try to escape, +or because they wish us to leave and are giving us the opportunity of +doing so. In the second place, you have learned what force they have +got down there, their exact position, and the fact that they were +evidently arguing how they had best attack us. Well, from what you say +there is every chance that we shall be able to come upon them without +being noticed till we are close enough to throw our fireworks among +them. Really the only thing for us to learn is whether many of them are +still at the top of the hill." + +"I hardly think there can be many; only a few have shown themselves +to-day. They must know very well that we would not venture to climb up +during the day, and that it would be next to impossible for us to do so +in the dark, even if we made up our minds to abandon the animals and +all our stores." + +"Well, I should say, Dias, there is no reason why we should put the +matter off. It will not take us long to load all the squibs to-morrow. +My opinion is that at dusk we had better saddle the mules and pack +everything on them in readiness for a start; then at ten o'clock we can +go down and attack the savages. The best moment for doing so will be +when they are just lying down. When we have sent them flying we will +come up the torrent again, and start with the mules as soon as it is +daylight. It would be next to impossible to get them down in the dark, +as they might very easily break their legs, or by rubbing against the +wall shift their packs and tumble them into the water." + +"It would be a pity to waste time, senor. I will get some torches made +to-morrow. Some of the trees have resin, and by melting this I can make +torches that would do very well. By their aid we could get the mules +down without waiting for daylight. As they have already come up the +torrent, they will have less fear in going down, for the stream will +help them instead of keeping them back. I will go first with Jose and +his mule; she is as steady as a rock, and where she goes the others +will follow; and with five torches along the line they will be able to +see well enough." + +"Four torches, Dias. Your wife rode coming up, and she had better ride +going down." + +"She can hold a torch as she sits; it does not matter to us if we get +wet to the waist, but it would be very uncomfortable for her. We shall +have to put the largest burdens on to the mules. One of the riding +mules could carry the two llamas, or if you think that that is too +much, we can tie each across a separate mule. They were more trouble +coming up than all the mules put together. We had pretty nearly to +carry them through the deep places, though at other points they leapt +from rock to rock cleverly enough." + +"I am not going to be left behind if you are going to the fight, +senor," Donna Maria said, "if you will give me one of your pistols." + +"We could manage that, I should think," Harry said. "We can put you on +one of the steadiest mules when we first go down, and with one at each +side of you we can manage it very well. Jose must go on a hundred yards +ahead to see whether any of the savages are on the watch at their end, +and if so, you must wait till we have cleared them out. You see, we +shall have no hesitation in shooting any of them if necessary, and +though that would bring the rest of them down on us, yet when our +squibs and crackers begin to fly among them, you may be sure they won't +face us for an instant." + +Dias grumbled that his wife had better stay where she was till they +went back for the mules; but Harry said: "I do think, Dias, that she +had better go with us. It would be cruel to leave her now that we are +going into a fight--leave her all alone to tremble for our lives, with +a knowledge that if things should go wrong with us the savages will +soon be up here." + +"Well, senor, if you think so, there is no more to be said." + +"I am not going to be made a trouble of," Maria said. "I shall go down +on foot like the rest of you. I will take some other clothes with me, +so that when you all come back for the mules I can change into them." + +"Perhaps that would be the best plan," Harry agreed. "Now I will go +back and take Bertie's place. It is my turn to be on watch, and he will +be wanting to hear the news." + +"Well, Harry, is it all right?" Bertie asked as he heard his brother +coming up to him. + +"It couldn't be better! There are sixty or seventy of them in a sort of +little ravine three hundred yards away, on the left-hand side of the +river. They don't seem to be keeping guard at all, and if they are not +more careful to-morrow night we shall take them completely by surprise. +We are going to saddle all the mules directly it gets too dark for any +of the fellows on the hills to see us, then we must set to work and +pull down enough of the barricade here to allow them to pass. We +ourselves, when we go down, will cross at that shallow place above +here, and go down the river at that side, otherwise we sha'n't be able +to cross it except at some distance beyond the other end of the +torrent. Of course the mules must go down this side, as we shall want +to turn to the right when we get off. We shall make our attack about +ten o'clock." + +Bertie went off, and three hours later Dias relieved Harry. As soon as +it was light the next morning Bertie and Jose set to work to fill the +cases--there were a hundred squibs and fifty large crackers. + +Donna Maria after breakfast went out and returned with a number of +flexible sticks of about half an inch in diameter; these she carried +into her tent, where she shut herself up for the forenoon. When, at one +o'clock, she came out with the result of her work, it resembled a chair +without legs and with a back about a foot wide and three feet high. + +"What in the world have you got there, Donna Maria?" Bertie asked. + +"Don't you know?" + +"No, I have never seen a thing like it before." + +"This is the thing the porters use for carrying weights, and sometimes +people, over the Cordilleras. You see that strap near the top goes +round the man's forehead, and when there is a weight in the chair these +other straps pass over his shoulders and under his arms, and then round +whatever is on the seat." + +"But what is going to be on the seat?" + +"I am," she laughed. "Dias is so overbearing. It had all been arranged +nicely, as you know; and then when he spoke to me afterwards he said, +'The first thing to-morrow morning, Maria, you will set to work to make +a porter's chair, and I shall carry you down the stream. No words about +it, but do as you are told.' Generally Dias lets me have my own way, +senor, but when he talks like that, I know that it is useless to argue +with him. And perhaps it is best after all, for, as he said to me +afterwards, it is a nasty place for men to get along, but for a woman, +with her petticoats dragging and trailing round her, it would be almost +impossible for her to keep her footing." + +"Well, I thought the same thing myself when we were talking about it +yesterday," Bertie said. "Of course I did not say anything, but I am +sure Dias is right. I found it very hard work to keep my footing, and I +really don't believe that I could have done it if I had been dressed as +a woman. And Dias can carry you like that?" + +"Carry me, senor! he could carry three times that weight. He has cut +himself a staff seven or eight feet long this morning to steady +himself, but I don't think there was any need for it. Why, it is a +common thing for people to be carried over the Cordilleras so, and Dias +is stronger a great deal than many of the men who do it. As he said, if +I had been going through on foot you would all have been bothering +about me. And it is not as if two people could go abreast, and one help +the other. There is often only room between the rocks for one to pass +through, and it is just there where the rush of the water is strongest." + + + + +CHAPTER IX + +THE SIGNAL STAR + + +During the afternoon Dias, who had been keeping a careful look-out at +the cliffs, said to Harry: "I think, senor, that the savages are +leaving the hills. An hour ago I saw a man walking along where we +generally see them; he was going straight along as if for some fixed +purpose, and I thought at once that he might be bringing them some +message from the people below us. I lost sight of him after a bit, but +presently I could make out some men moving in the other direction. They +were keeping back from the edge, but I several times caught sight of +their heads against the sky-line when there happened to be some little +irregularity in the ground. They were not running, but seemed to me to +be going at a steady pace. Since then I have been watching carefully, +and have seen no one on the other side. I think they have all been sent +for, and will be assembled this afternoon at the mouth of the torrent." + +"I am very glad to hear it, Dias; that is just what we wanted." + +"In one way--yes," Dias said. "It would be a great thing for us to +catch them all together, for I have no fear that they will stand when +these fireworks begin to go off among them." + +"What is the drawback, then?" + +"It is, senor, that they have either been collected because they have +given up the hope of catching us at present, and are going to scatter +and hunt till we venture out, which would be the worst thing possible; +or they have made up their minds to make a rush upon us." + +"Don't you think that we can beat them back?" + +"Not if they are determined, senor. You see, we can't make them out +till they are within twenty or thirty yards of us. At most you and your +brother could fire four shots, then you would take up your rifles. We +shall have then only four shots left. If they continue their rush where +shall we be? There would be two of us on one wall and two on the other. +There would be four shots to fire from one side and four from the +other. Then the end would come. Two on each side would not be able to +keep back the rush of two or three score. In two minutes it would be +all over." + +"Yes, Dias, I see that if they were determined to storm the place and +take us alive they could do it; but we have the fireworks." + +"I did not think of that. Yes; but having once worked themselves up and +being mad with excitement, even that might not stop them, though I +should think it would. Yes, I believe we might feel assured that we +should beat them back, and if so, we should hear no more of them." + +"If I knew that they would come," Harry said, "I would certainly say we +had best stay and defend ourselves; but we can't be sure that that is +their motive for assembling. They may, as you say, be going to move +off, leaving perhaps half a dozen men to watch the entrance and report +if we attempt to escape. That would be fatal, and our only chance would +be to leave everything behind and endeavour to climb up one side or the +other; and even that might not avail us, as there may be one or two men +up there to see if we make off that way. I am more inclined to think +that this is the course that they will take rather than risk a heavy +loss of life. They must have a good idea of what it would cost them to +take the place." + +"What do you think we had better do, then, senor?" + +"I think we had better attack them as soon as possible after nightfall. +It is likely that they will do nothing before morning; as you say, they +do not like moving at night, and if they attack it will not be until +shortly before daybreak. There is sure to be a palaver when the men who +have been on the hills come down. It will be too late then for them to +go back before night, so that I think we are pretty sure to find them +all in the ravine this evening. If, when we get there, we find the +place empty, we must come to a decision as to what our best course will +be. In that case I think we ought to climb the hills and make our way +up the mountains as rapidly as possible. We could calculate on eight or +ten hours' start, and by keeping as much as possible on the rocks, +might hope to get so high among the mountains that they would not be +able to follow our traces and overtake us before we reach a point where +they would not dare follow us. In that case, of course we should have +to give up all hope of finding the gold valley, and lose the mules with +all our belongings, which would cripple us terribly." + +"Very well, senor; I think that is the best plan." + +"Then we will settle to start at nine o'clock, Dias." + +They then discussed the arrangements for the attack. Each was to carry +a glowing brand, and when he got there, was to sling his gun behind him +and hold twelve squibs in one hand and the brand in the other. When +they approached within throwing distance of the savages, they were to +lay their guns down beside them, and then Harry was to put the ends of +his squibs against his brand, and hurl the whole of them among the +Indians. A few seconds later Bertie was to do the same, while Harry +fired one barrel of buck-shot. Bertie was to fire as Dias threw a dozen +crackers, and then Jose was to throw his squibs. Then all were to throw +squibs and crackers as far as they could go; and the other two barrels +of buck-shot and Jose's musket were to be poured in. By this time they +calculated the savages would be in full flight, and the three rifles +could then be used. + +Harry was to hand his rifle to Dias before the firing began, and he and +Bertie were to slip fresh cartridges into these guns and recap them +before sending off the last batch of their fireworks, so as to have +them in readiness either to empty their contents into the flying +Indians, or to cover their retreat should the fireworks fail to effect +the panic they hoped for. Their pistols were also to be reserved until +the Indians fled. Donna Maria was to stay by the water, and start at +once on her way back if Dias shouted to her to do so. Every step of the +plan settled upon was repeated again and again, until there was no +possibility of any mistake being made. Maria had not attended the +council; her confidence in her two white friends was unbounded, and +Bertie's invention of the fireworks had placed him on a level with his +brother in her estimation. She therefore quietly went on with her +preparations for dinner without concerning herself as to the details of +the affair. + +As soon as it was dark and the meal eaten, the tents were struck, the +baggage all rolled up and packed on the animals, and the fireworks +divided. When everything was in readiness they went together and made a +breach in the breast-work wide enough for the mules to pass. At nine +o'clock Maria was seated in the carrying-chair, and strapped on to her +husband's back; then four brands were taken from the fire and the party +started. When within fifty yards of the lower end of the ravine Jose +went forward, and, returning in a few minutes, reported that no savages +were on guard. A fire was burning outside the mouth of the ravine where +he had seen them on the evening before, and from the reflection on the +rock he believed that another fire was alight inside. His report caused +a general feeling of relief, for their great fear had been that the +natives might have made off before their arrival. + +When they stepped out from the water Dias set Maria down. "You +understand, Maria," he said: "the moment I call, you are to start up +the river." + +"I understand," she said. "I have my knife, and if you do not rejoin me +I shall know how to use it." + +"We shall rejoin you, Maria," Dias said confidently. "I believe that at +the first volley of fireworks they will be off. They must be more than +human if they are not scared, as they never can have heard of such +things before." + +Keeping close to the rock wall, they went along in single file until +within forty or fifty yards of the fire; then, going down on their +hands and knees, they crawled up a slight rise, from the top of which +they could see a hundred or more natives gathered round a fire. One was +addressing the others, who were seated listening attentively. Laying +the guns down to be ready for instant action, and keeping themselves +concealed in the herbage, Harry took his bundle of squibs from his +pocket. They were but lightly tied together; slipping off the string he +applied the ends to the brand. There was a sudden roar of fire, and +waving them once round his head he hurled them into the midst of the +assembly. There was a yell of astonishment as the missiles flew hither +and thither, exploding with loud reports. The last had not exploded +when Bertie's handful flew among them; then came the parcel from Dias, +and at the same moment Harry poured a barrel of buck-shot among them, +followed by a volley of crackers, while almost simultaneously Harry +threw his squibs and Bertie fired a volley of buck-shot. For a moment +the savages were paralysed, then many of them threw themselves on their +faces in terror of these fiery demons, while others started in headlong +flight. + +"Send them off as quick as you can!" Harry shouted, as he discharged +his second barrel into the flying natives. Bertie followed suit, and +then both paused to reload while Dias and Jose hurled their remaining +fireworks. By this time the last of the natives had leapt up and fled. +Jose's musket and the three rifles cracked out, and then the little +party rose to their feet and joined in a wild "Hip, hip, hurrah!" + +"You can come up, Maria; they have all gone!" Dias cried out; and Maria +joined them a minute later. More than a score of natives lay dead or +badly wounded round their fire. + +"What are we to do with the wounded?" Bertie asked. + +"We can only leave them where they are," Harry said. "Some of the +savages may have wandered away, or not have come down from the hills, +and will return here unaware of what has happened, or one or two of the +boldest may venture back again to look after their comrades. At any +rate, we can do nothing for them." + +"It would be better to shoot them, senor," Dias said. + +"No, I could not bring myself to do that," Harry said. "Buck-shot, +unless they strike in a body, are not likely to kill. I expect they are +more frightened than hurt. After we have gone many of them will be able +to crawl down to the river. Savages frequently recover from wounds that +would kill white men; and even if no others come down, those who are +but slightly wounded will help the more incapable. We have cleared the +way for ourselves, which was all we wanted, and have taught them a +lesson they are not likely to forget for many years to come. Let us go +back at once and bring down the mules. I suppose you will sit down by +the stream, and wait till we come back, Maria?" + +"Yes," she said, "there is nothing to be afraid of now; but you can +leave me one of your pistols in case one of these savages may be +shamming dead." + +"Jose will wait with her," Dias said. "Now, Jose, you strike up a song. +You are generally at it, and as long as they hear you they will know +that some of us are still here, and will not venture to move." + +"You take my gun, Jose; it is loaded," Harry said. "If any of them +should move and try to crawl away, don't fire at them; but if they look +about and seem inclined to make mischief, shoot at once." + +Coming down with the animals the three men carried torches in each +hand. The mules reached the mouth of the torrent without accident, and +the llamas were then lifted off the baggage mules which had carried +them, and all were turned loose to graze on the rich grass near the +edge of the river. Jose and Dias went to the fire in the ravine, and +returned laden with burning brands, and a fire was soon blazing near +the water. Two of them kept watch by turns at the spot from which they +had fired, lest any of the wounded Indians should, on recovering, try +to avenge their loss by sending arrows down amongst the party. During +the night four of the fallen Indians, after first looking round +cautiously, crawled away, and the watchers could hear them running fast +through the bushes till they were beyond the light of the fire. + +At dawn a start was made. The river was crossed at the pool where Jose +had swum over. Dias, on examination, found that the water, even in the +deepest part, was not more than breast-high. Accordingly he returned; +Maria, kneeling on one of his shoulders and one of Harry's, was carried +across without being wetted. Then they joined the animals, which were +grazing a short distance away, and set off without delay. Although they +kept a sharp look-out they saw no more of the Indians. They ascended +several more streams unobserved. Rough carvings on the face of several +of the rocks led them to carry their excursions farther than usual, but +beyond a few ounces of gold, washed from the stream, they found nothing. + +"They must have been put here for some purpose," said Dias. + +"I have been thinking it over, Dias, and I should not be surprised if, +as you thought, they were done to deceive searchers. You told me there +were some marks by which you would be directed in the gold valley; it +is quite likely that other marks might have been placed in the valleys +so that the real ones would not be particularly noticed." + +"That is possible, senor; they would certainly do everything they could +to prevent anyone not in the secret from knowing. The mark I have to +look for first is a serpent. It is carved on a rock at the end of a +valley." + +"In that case the indication of the star would not be necessary, Dias." + +"That may be, senor; but the valley may be a large one, and the +hiding-place very difficult to find, so that even when the valley was +known, it would need the guidance of the star to take us to the right +place." + +"That might be so, Dias, if it were a hidden treasure that we were +looking for; but as, according to your account, it is simply an +extraordinarily rich deposit in the river, I hardly see why the +guidance of the star should be necessary when once the valley was +known." + +"That I cannot tell you, senor; but I am sure that it must be difficult +to find, for the Spaniards searched everywhere for gold, and although +the records of most of their discoveries still exist, there is no +mention of such a find, nor is there is any word of it among the Indian +traditions." + +A week before the appointed date they found themselves in the +neighbourhood where they felt sure the cleft must lie. Mount Tinta was +twenty miles in front of them, and from that point a range of mountains +trended off almost at right angles to that which they were following. +One lofty peak some thirty miles to the south-east rose above another. + +"I believe that that is the peak," Dias said. + +"I don't see any signs of a cleft in it, Dias." + +"No, senor; it is a very narrow one." + +The next day they halted at the mouth of another valley, and as they +unloaded the mules, Harry exclaimed: "See, Dias, there is a cleft in +that peak! From here it looks as if it were a mere thread, and as if +some giant had struck a mighty sword-cut into it." + +"That is right. Sure enough, senor, this must be the valley. Now, let +us look about for the serpent." + +The search did not take them long. An isolated rock rose a quarter of a +mile from the mouth, and on this was a rude representation of a +serpent. The next morning they explored the valley thoroughly to a +point where, five miles higher, it ceased abruptly, the rocks closing +in on either side, and the stream coming down in a perpendicular fall +from a point some eighty feet above them. Going down the river, they +washed the gravel again and again, but without obtaining even as much +gold as they had found several times before. + +"I cannot understand it," Harry said, as they sat down to their meal at +dusk. "Your tradition says nothing about hidden treasure, and yet there +does not seem to be gold in the stream." + +"It may be higher up, senor. We must ascend the hills on each side of +the valley, and come down upon the river higher up." + +Harry was on watch that night, and at one o'clock he roused the others +up. "See!" he exclaimed later on; "there is a bright star apparently +about a foot above the peak. I should think that must be the star. No +doubt that will rise in exact line behind the cleft on the 21st, that +is four days from now; probably it can only be seen when we are exactly +in the line with the cleft and the position of the gold. This cleft is +undoubtedly very narrow--no doubt the result of an earthquake. It +certainly goes straight through, and very likely it is some hundred +yards across, so that unless we are exactly in the line we sha'n't see +it. As soon as it is dark on the 21st we will all go some distance up +the valley, where it is only about four or five hundred yards across. +We will station ourselves fifty yards apart across it, then one of us +is sure to see the star through the cleft. We had each better take two +sticks with us. Whoever sees the star will fix one in the ground and +then go backwards for a hundred yards, keeping the star in sight, and +plant the other; then the line between those two sticks ought to lead +us to the spot." + +Each night the star rose nearer to the cleft. "There is no doubt we +shall see it in the proper position to-morrow night," Harry said on the +20th of the month. "That certainly is strong proof that the tradition +handed down to you, Dias, is correct." + +They employed the next day in again searching for some indication that +might assist them, but in vain. Dias and Jose both asserted that the +tiny rift in the rocky peak looked wider from the middle of the valley +than at any other point, and even Harry and his brother admitted that +it could scarcely be seen from the foot of the hills on either side, +and therefore it was agreed that Dias, Harry, and Jose should take +their places only some forty yards apart across the centre; Maria and +Bertie going farther, near the sides of the hills. When midnight +approached they took their stations. Suddenly Harry, who was standing +by the side of the rivulet, exclaimed, "I see it!" It was more than a +minute later before Dias saw it, while it was three or four minutes +before Jose spoke, by which time Harry had crossed the streamlet and +fixed his second rod some distance on the other side. Dias and Jose did +the same. Bertie did not catch sight of it for some time after Jose, +and Maria did not see it at all. Then they went back to their camping +place. + +"It is curious that I should have seen it before either of you, when +you were standing so close to me," Harry said. "It was lower than I +expected, and it is evident that the cleft must continue much farther +down than we thought, and that it must be extremely narrow at the +bottom. It is certainly a splendid guide, and there can be no mistaking +it. Unless I had been standing on the exact line, I should not have +noticed the star till later, and the crack is so much wider towards the +top that it could probably be seen on a line half a mile across. It +will be strange if we cannot find the place in the morning. Certainly +we searched in the stream just where I was standing, and found nothing. +But, of course, it is possible that in all this time it may have +changed its course considerably." + +Dias shook his head. "It can hardly be that, senor, because, in that +case, anyone who had examined the valley could have found it. I begin +to think that it must have been a mistake about its being merely a rich +place in the river, and that it must be some vast treasure, perhaps +hidden by the people before the Incas, and kept by them as a certain +resource when needed. We shall have to search, I think, for some +walled-up cave in the rocks. We have already looked for it, but not +seriously; and besides, there are many boulders that have fallen, and +formed a bank at the foot of the cliff." + +"Well, we shall know in a few hours. I feel absolutely certain that the +line between those two sticks will lead us to it." + +None attempted to sleep, and as soon as it became light they took picks +and shovels and started up the valley. Harry gave an exclamation of +surprise as, standing behind the first stick, he looked towards the +second. "The line goes to the middle of that waterfall," he said. + +This was so; for the stream made two or three sharp bends between the +spot where he had crossed it and the foot of the falls. + +"'Tis strange!" Dias said; "we have examined that spot more than once. +There are great stones and boulders at the foot of the fall, and a +large deep pool. Can a treasure be buried in that? If so, it will be +hard indeed to get it." + +Harry did not reply; his face was white with excitement. He walked +forward slowly till he reached the edge of the pool. It was some +fifteen yards across, and the colour of the water showed that it was +very deep. + +"I will dive, Harry," Bertie said; "I have gone down more than once in +five fathoms of water to pick up an egg that has been thrown +overboard." He stripped and swam out to the middle of the pool and +dived. He was down about a minute, and on coming up swam to the shore. +"I could find no bottom, Harry," he panted. "I am sure I must have gone +down seven fathoms." + +"Thank you, Bertie," Harry said quietly; "we will make up our minds +that if it is there, we sha'n't get it at present. The foot of the +valley is so flat that it would need a cut at least a mile long to let +the water off, and we should therefore require either an army of men or +a regular diving apparatus, which there would be no getting this side +of England. However, it may not be there. Let us search now behind the +fall." + +There were some four or five feet clear between the sheet of water and +the rock. At times, as Harry pointed out, there would be an even wider +space, for the weather had been dry for the past two months, and the +quantity of water coming down was but small, while in the wet season a +mighty flood would shoot far out from the rock. The width of the stream +in the wet season was shown by the broad bed of what was now but a +rivulet. Looking upwards as they stood, the wall actually overhung +them, and they could see the edge where the water poured over unbroken. + +"There may be a cave here," Harry went on, "and it may be covered by +these rocks piled up for the purpose. On the other hand, they may have +fallen. I think that is the most likely explanation, for as the top +projects beyond the bottom it is possible that some time or other there +was a big fall." + +They searched every foot of the rock within reach, but there were no +signs of any man's handiwork. The rock was solid, thickly covered with +dripping moss and ferns which had flourished in the mist and spray that +rose from the foot of the fall. This they had ruthlessly scraped off +with their picks. Silently they went out again at the end, and stood +hopelessly looking at the fall. It was some time before Harry said, "We +must move some of those stones now. Let us go at once and cut down some +young trees, for we can do nothing with our hands alone, but must use +levers. For that purpose we shall want straight wood, and strong. We +had better get half a dozen, in case some of them break; make them +about ten feet long, and from four to six inches thick, and sharpened +slightly at the lower end." + +In an hour the levers were ready. + +"We had better breakfast before we begin, Dias. Your wife went off to +prepare it when we came out from the waterfall. I dare say it is ready +by this time." + +In half an hour they were back again. They chose the central spot +behind the fall, and then set to work. Some of the rocks were dislodged +without much difficulty, but to move others, it was necessary to first +get out the smaller ones, on which they rested. So they toiled on, +stopping for half an hour in the middle of the day for food, and then +renewing their work. By evening they had made an opening four or five +feet wide at the top, and six feet deep, close to the wall. It was now +getting dark, and all were fagged and weary with their work, the light +was fading, and they were glad to return to camp. Maria came out to +meet them. She asked no questions, but said cheerfully, "I have a good +olla ready, I am sure you must want it." + +"I feel almost too tired to eat," Bertie said. + +"You will feel better when you have had some coffee. I have fed the +mules, Jose, and taken them down to water." + +"I think," Bertie said, when they had finished their meal, "that we +might splice the main brace." + +"I do think we might," Harry laughed. "We have not opened a bottle +since we started, and certainly we have worked like niggers since seven +o'clock this morning. I will open the case; it is screwed down, and I +have a screwdriver in the handle of my knife;" and he rose to his feet. + +"What does Don Bertie want?" Dias said. "I will get it, senor. I do not +understand what he said." + +"It is a sea expression, Dias. After a hard day's work the captain +orders that the main brace shall be spliced, which means that the crew +shall have a glass of grog--that is, a glass of spirits and water--to +cheer and warm them after their exertions. Jose, will you bring a +blazing brand with you? I shall want it to see the screws." + +In a few minutes he returned. + +"This is brandy, Dias. I don't suppose you have ever tasted a glass of +good brandy. Is your kettle boiling still, senora? We shall want hot +water, sugar, and five of the tin mugs. Have you any of those limes we +picked the other day?" + +"Yes, senor." + +"That is good. Just a slice each will be an improvement." Harry mixed +four mugs, and a half one for Maria. "There, Dias!" he said. "You will +allow that that is a considerable improvement on pulque." + +He and his brother had already lighted their pipes. The other three had +made cigarettes. Dias and Jose were loud in their commendations of the +new beverage. Donna Maria had at first protested that she never touched +pulque, and this must be the same sort of thing. However, after sipping +daintily, she finished her portion with evident satisfaction. They did +not sit up long, and as soon as they had finished their first smoke all +retired to bed, leaving for once the llamas and mules to act as +sentries. As soon as it was fairly daylight, they drank a cup of coffee +and started again to work. Harry went first into the hole they had +made, and, kneeling down, struck a match to enable him to see the rock +more thoroughly. He gave a slight exclamation, then said: "Open your +knife, Bertie, and come in here and strike another match. I want both +my hands." + +"I have a torch here, senor," + +"That is best; then light it, Bertie." + +There was just room at the bottom for Bertie to stand by the side of +his brother, who was lying down. + +"Hold the torches as low as you can, Bertie." + +Harry picked away with the point of his knife for a minute or two and +then sat up. + +"That is the top of a cave," he said. "Do you see, this crack along +here is a straight one. That, I fancy, was the top of the entrance to +the cave. That stone under it has a rough face, but on the top and +sides it is straight. It is fitted in with cement, or something of that +sort, and is soft for some distance in, and then becomes quite hard. I +can just see that there are two stones underneath, also regularly cut." + +He made room for Bertie to lie down, and held the torch for him. "I +think you are right, Harry. Those three stones would never fit together +so closely if they had not been cut by hand, though, looking at the +face, no one could tell them from the rock above them." + +Dias next examined the stones. + +"There is no doubt that that is the entrance to a cave, senor," he said +as he joined them; and the three went out beyond the fall, for the +noise of the water was too great for them to converse without +difficulty behind the veil of water. Jose stayed behind to examine. + +"Well, Dias, we have found the place where the treasure is hidden, but +I don't think that we are much nearer. Certainly we have not strength +sufficient to clear away those fallen stones, and probably the cave is +blocked by a wall several feet thick. We should want tools and +blasting-powder to get through it. No doubt it is a natural cave, and +it seems to me probable that they altered the course of the stream +above, so that it should fall directly over the entrance. I think +before we talk further about it we will go up there and take a look at +it. If we find that the course has been changed that will settle the +matter." + +It took them an hour to climb the hill and make their way down to the +gorge through which the river ran. They examined it carefully. + +"It must always have come along here," Dias said. "There is no other +possible channel; but there are marks of tools on the rocks on each +side of the fall, and the water goes over so regularly that I think the +rock must have been cut away at the bottom." + +"It certainly looks like it, Dias. The rocks widen out too, so that +however strong the rush of water may be it will always go over in a +regular sheet. Let us follow it along a little way." + +Fifty yards farther on, the gorge widened out suddenly, and they paused +with an exclamation of astonishment. Before them was a wide valley, +filled to the spot where they were standing with a placid sheet of +water four or five hundred yards wide, and extending to another gorge +fully a mile away. Bertie was the first to find his voice. + +"Here's a go! Who would have thought of finding a lake up in the hills +here?" + +"I did not know there was one," Dias said. "I have never heard of it. +But that is not strange, for no one who came up the valley would dream +that there was anything beyond that fall." + +Harry had sat down and thought for some minutes, looking over the lake +without speaking. + +"I am afraid, Dias," he said at last, "that your tradition was a true +one after all, and that the gold lay in the bed of a stream in the +valley we now see filled up." + +"But it must always have been a lake, senor," Dias said after thinking +for a minute, "and could not have been shallower, for there is no other +escape than the waterfall; and however heavy the rains it could not +have risen higher, except a few feet, as one can see by the face of the +rock." + +"It may have had some other way out," Harry said. + +Dias looked carefully round the side of the valley. "There is no break +in the hills that I can see, senor." + +"No; but my firm conviction is that the top of that cave that we found +behind the fall is really the top of a natural tunnel through which the +stream originally flowed. There are two or three reasons for this. In +the first place, it is certainly remarkable that there should be a cave +immediately behind that fall. I thought at first that the stream above +might have been diverted to hide it, but the ravine is so narrow that +that could not be possible. In the next place, your tradition has +proved absolutely true in the matter of the star, and in the hour of +its appearance in the exact line to the mouth of that cave. How +correctly the details have been handed down from generation to +generation! If they are right on that point it is hardly likely that +they can be inaccurate on other points, and that the tale of an +extraordinarily rich treasure could have been converted into one of an +exceptional deposit of gold in the bed of a river. + +"I think that the passage was probably closed by the old people when +they were first threatened by the invasion of the Incas. No doubt they +would choose a season when the stream was almost dry. They had, as the +remains of their vast buildings will show, an unlimited supply of +labour. They would first partially block up the tunnel, perhaps for the +first fifty yards in, leaving only a small passage for the water to run +through. They might then close the farther end with sacks of sand, and +having the other stones all cut, and any number of hands, build it up +behind the sacks, and then go on with the work till it was solid; then +no doubt they would heap stones and boulders against the face of the +wall. By the time the Incas had conquered the country the valley would +be a lake many feet deep. The Incas, having gained an abundant supply +of treasure elsewhere, would take no steps towards opening the tunnel, +which in any case would have been a terrible business, for the pressure +of water would drive everything before it. Having plenty of slave +labour at their disposal, they knew that it could be done at any time +in case of great necessity, when the loss of the lives of those +concerned in it would be nothing to them. When the valley became full +the water began to pour out through this gap, which perhaps happened to +be immediately over the mouth of the tunnel, or it may have been +altered by a few yards to suit, for they were, as we know from some of +their buildings, such good workmen that they could fit slabs of the +hardest stone so perfectly together that it is hardly possible to see +the joints. Therefore they would only have to widen the mouth of the +gorge a little, and fit rocks in on either side so that they would seem +to have been there for all time; and indeed the natural growth of ferns +and mosses would soon hide the joints, even if they had been roughly +done." + +"And that all means, Harry--?" Bertie asked. + +"That all means that we have no more chance of getting at the gold than +if it were lying in the deepest soundings in the Pacific." + +Bertie sat down with a gasp. + +"There is no way of getting that water out," Harry went on quietly, +"except by either cutting a channel here as deep as the bottom of the +lake, or by blasting the stone in the tunnel. The one would require +years of work, with two or three hundred experienced miners, and ten +times as many labourers. The other would need twenty or thirty miners, +and a hundred or two labourers. There is possibly another way; but as +that would require an immense iron siphon going down to the bottom of +the lake, along one side of this ravine, and down into the bottom of +the pool, with a powerful engine to exhaust the air in the first place +and set it going, it is as impracticable, as far as we are concerned, +as the other two. + +"In the same way I have no doubt that, with a thousand-horse-power +engine, the lake could be pumped dry in time; but to transport the +plant for such an engine and its boiler across the mountains would be +an enormous undertaking; and even were it here, and put up and going, +the difficulty of supplying it with fuel would be enormous. Certainly +one could not get up a company with capital enough to carry out any one +of the schemes merely on the strength of an Indian tradition; and with +the uncertainty, even if they believed the tradition, whether the +amount of gold recovered would be sufficient to repay the cost incurred. + +"Well, we may as well go down to dinner." + +He shouldered his pick and led the way back. Scarce a word was spoken +on the way. Bertie tried to follow the example of his brother, and take +the matter coolly. Dias walked with his head down and the air of a +criminal going to execution. The disappointment to him was terrible. He +had all along felt so confident that they should be successful, and +that he should be enabled to enrich those he considered as the +preservers of his life, that he was utterly broken down with the total +failure of his hopes. + + + + +CHAPTER X + +A FRESH START + + +Not until he got to the camp did Harry look round. When he caught a +glimpse of the guide's face he went up to him and held out his hand. + +"You must not take it to heart, Dias; it has been unfortunate, but that +cannot be helped. You have done everything you could in the matter, and +brought us to the right spot, and no one could tell that when we got +within half a mile of the gold river we should find the valley turned +into a deep lake. We can only say, 'Better luck next time'. We would +say in England, 'There are as good fish in the sea as ever came out of +it'. I have never felt very sanguine myself about this; it has all +along seemed too good to be true. Of course we are disappointed, but we +may have better luck next time." + +"But I don't know, senor, with certainty of any other place. No one was +ever entrusted with more than one secret, so that if the Spanish +tortures wrung it out of him two treasures would not be lost." + +"We need not talk any more about this place, Dias. I see your wife has +got some of the fish that we caught yesterday fizzling on the fire. Now +I think of it, I am very hungry, for it is six hours since we had our +coffee this morning. After we have had our meal we can discuss what our +next move had better be." + +While they were speaking, Jose had been rapidly telling Maria the +misfortune which had befallen them, and the tears were running down the +woman's cheeks. + +"You must not feel so badly about it, Maria," Harry said cheerfully; +"you see my brother and I are quite cheerful. At any rate, no one is to +blame. It would have been an enormous piece of luck if we had +succeeded, but we never looked on it as a certainty. Anything might +have happened between the time the gold was shut up and now, though we +certainly never expected to find what we did. We only thought it +possible that we might have the luck to find the treasure. Now you had +better look to those fish, or we shall lose our breakfast as we have +lost our gold, and this time by our own fault. We are as hungry as +hunters all of us; and in fact we are hunters, although we have not +brought any game with us this time." + +The woman wiped away her tears hastily, and, taking off the fish which +she had put on when they were coming down the hill, she laid them on +plates with some freshly-baked cakes. The fish were excellent, and +Bertie, as they ate, made several jokes which set them all laughing, so +that the meal passed off cheerfully. + +"Now for the great consoler," Harry said, as he took out his pipe. +"When we have all lighted up, the council shall begin. Never mind +clearing away the plates now, Maria; just sit down with us, there is +wisdom in many counsellors. Now, Dias, what do you think is the best +course for us to adopt at present?" + +"Unless you wish to stay here and make further search?" + +"By no means, Dias," Harry said; "for the present, I have seen enough +of this side of the mountains. We will get back to Cuzco and make a +fresh start from there." + +"In that case, senor, there is no doubt as to the best route. There is +a pass over the mountains just on the other side of Mount Tinta; it +leads to the town of Ayapata, which lies somewhere at the foot of that +peak. I have never been there, but I know its situation. It is a very +steep pass, but as it is used for mule traffic it cannot be very bad. +Once we have passed over it on to the plateau we shall not be more than +seventy or eighty miles from Cuzco." + +"That is quite satisfactory. We will set off to-morrow." + +"We had better catch some more fish, for we have had no time for +hunting lately," Maria said. "The meat we ate yesterday was the last we +had with us. If we cut the fish open and lay them flat on the rocks, +which are so hot one can scarcely hold one's hand on them, they will be +sufficiently dry by sunset to keep for two or three days, and before +that you are sure to shoot something." + +The river was full of fish, and in half an hour they had caught an +abundance, having fifteen averaging eight pounds apiece. These were at +once cut open, cleaned, and laid down to dry. + +"The fishing on this river would let for a handsome sum in England," +Harry laughed; "and I think the fish are quite as good as trout of the +same size. The only objection is that they are so tame, and take the +bait so greedily, that, good as the stream is, they would soon be +exterminated." + +That evening there was a slight stir among the animals which had just +lain down. Jose leapt up and walked towards them. + +"There is something the matter, Dias," he cried; "the llamas are +standing up with their ears forward. They see or hear something." + +"It may be pumas or jaguars," Dias said. "Take your gun, senor." + +He picked up his rifle, and Harry and Bertie followed suit, and further +armed themselves with their shot-guns. + +"You had best come with us, Maria," her husband said. "There is no +saying where the beasts may be. See! the mules are standing up now and +pulling at their head-ropes. Let us go among them, senors, our presence +will pacify them." + +They all moved towards the mules, which were standing huddled together. +Dias and Jose spoke to them and patted them. + +"You stand at their heads, Maria," the former said, "and keep on +talking to them. We must see if we can discover the beasts. There is +one of them!" he exclaimed, but in a low tone. "Do you see the two +bright points of light? That is the reflection of the fire in his eyes." + +"Shall I fire?" + +"No, senor, not yet. If we were only to wound him he would charge us; +let us wait till he gets closer. Probably there are two of them, male +and female, they generally go about in pairs." + +Even as he spoke the seeming sparks disappeared. + +"He has moved," Dias said; "he will probably walk round us two or three +times before he makes up his mind to attack." + +"If he would go near the fire we could get a fair shot at him, Dias." + +"He won't do that, senor; he will most likely go backwards and forwards +in a semicircle, getting perhaps a little closer each time." + +Ten minutes passed and then Maria said: + +"There are two of them. I can see their outlines distinctly." + +"Do you think, if we were to fire a gun, they would move off, Dias?" + +"They might for a time, senor, but the probability is that they would +come back again. They have smelt the mules, and are probably hungry. It +is better to let them attack us at once and have done with it." + +A minute or two later there was a snarling growl. + +"They are jaguars," Dias said. + +Again and again the threatening sound was heard, and in spite of +Maria's efforts the mules were almost mad with fright. + +"We had better lie down beyond them," Dias said. "There is no doubt the +beasts will come from that side. If we posted ourselves behind them the +mules might break loose and knock us over just as we were taking aim." + +They lay down side by side on the grass with their rifles at their +shoulders. + +"I can see them now, Dias," Harry whispered, "not more than fifty yards +away. I think we could hardly miss them now." + +"You could not if it were daylight, senor; but in the dark, when you +can't see the end of your rifle, you can never be certain about +shooting." + +The beasts had now apparently made up their minds to attack. They +crouched low, almost dragging their bellies on the ground, and one was +somewhat in advance of the other. + +"That is the male ahead," Dias whispered. "Do you and your brother take +aim. I will take the female, and Jose will hold his fire of buck-shot +till she is within a length of us." + +"How shall I know when it is going to spring?" + +"When it stops, senor. It is sure to stop before it springs." + +"Aim between the eyes, Bertie, and fire when I do," Harry whispered to +his brother, who was lying next to him. + +When within twelve yards the jaguar halted. + +"Now!" Harry said, and they discharged their rifles at the same moment, +and, dropping them, grasped the shot-guns. + +The jaguar fell over on one side, clawing the air, and then recovered +himself. As he did so two charges of buck-shot struck him on the head, +and he rolled over and remained motionless. + +Dias had fired at the same moment, but he had not stopped the second +jaguar. Jose, instead of waiting, hastily discharged his gun, and in +another instant a dark body bounded over their heads on to the back of +one of the mules, which it struck to the ground. + +Harry and Bertie leapt to their feet, and discharged their second +barrels into the jaguar's body. It turned suddenly round and attempted +to spring, but its hindquarters were paralysed; and Bertie, pulling out +his pistol, fired both barrels into its head. The brute at once fell +over dead, and the lad gave a shout of triumph. + +"Thank goodness that is over without accident!" Harry said. "They are +formidable beasts, Dias." + +"In the daytime, when one can see to aim, they can be killed easily +enough, senor; at night their presence is to be dreaded." + +"I am afraid we have lost a mule." + +"I think not, senor. He was knocked down by the shock, but he had his +saddle on, and the brute had no time to carry him off." + +The mule rose to its feet as they spoke; Jose ran and brought a flaming +brand from the fire. Blood was streaming from both the animal's +shoulders. + +"It stuck its claws in, senor, but has not made long gashes. I should +say that these wounds were caused by the contraction of the claws when +you finished her with your pistol. The animal will be all right in a +day or two; and as our stores have diminished, we need not put any load +on it for a time." + +"I hope you were not frightened, Maria?" Bertie said + +"I was a little frightened," she said, "when the mule came tumbling +down close to me, and I could see the jaguar's eyes within a few yards +of me, but I had my dagger ready." + +"It would not have been much good," Dias said, "if the beast had +attacked you." + +"I think you showed no end of pluck," Bertie said. "If he had come +close to me, and I had got nothing but that little dagger in my hand, I +should have bolted like a shot." + +"I am sure that you would not, senor," she said. "You are a great deal +too brave for that." + +Bertie laughed. + +"It is all very well to be brave with a rifle in your hand and another +gun ready, to say nothing of the pistols. By the way, I thought Harry +had given you one of his? + +"So he did, but I had forgotten all about it. If I had thought of it I +should have used it." + +"It is just as well that you did not," Harry said. "If you had done so, +the brute would have made for you instead of turning round to attack +us." + +"Now, senor," Dias put in, "we had better drag the jaguars away; the +mules will never get quiet with the bodies so close to them." + +It needed all his strength and that of his companions to drag each of +the bodies fifty yards away. + +"Now, Jose," Dias said when they returned, "you had better give the +animals a feed of maize all round. They will settle down after that. I +shall keep watch to-night, senor. It is not likely that any more of +these beasts are in the neighbourhood; but it is as well to be careful, +and I don't think any of us would sleep if someone were not on the +look-out." + +"I will relieve you at two o'clock," Harry said. + +"No, senor, I have not been on the watch for the past two nights. I +would rather sit up by the fire to-night." + +Two days later they arrived at the foot of the pass. Just as they +gained it they met two muleteers coming down it. Dias entered into +conversation with them, while the others erected tents, preparing to +camp. + +"What is the news, Dias?" Harry asked as he returned. + +"The men say, senor, that the pass is very unsafe. Many robberies have +taken place in it, and several men, who endeavoured to defend +themselves against the brigands, have been killed. They were questioned +by four armed men as they came down, and the goods they were carrying +down to Ayapata were taken from them. They say that traffic has almost +ceased on the road." + +"That is bad, Dias." + +"Very bad, senor. We need not be afraid of brigands if they meet us as +we travel along the foot of the hills, but it would be another thing in +the passes. There are many places where the mules would have to go in +single file, and if we were caught in such a spot by men on the +heights, we might be shot down without any chance of defending +ourselves successfully." + +"That is awkward, Dias. It is a scandal that these brigands are not +rooted out." + +"People are thinking too much of fighting each other or their +neighbours to care anything about the complaints of a few muleteers, +senor." + +"Is there no other way of crossing the mountains than by this pass?" + +"There is a pass, senor, between Ayapata and Crucero, but it is a very +bad one." + +"And where should we be then, Dias?" + +"Well, senor, it would take us along the other side of the mountains to +Macari. From that place there is an easy path to La Raya; there we are +on the plateau again, and have only to travel by the road through +Sicuani to Cuzco." + +"In fact, it would double the length of our journey to Cuzco?" + +"Yes, senor; but if you liked, from Crucero you might go down to Lake +Titicaca. There are certainly good mines in the mountains there." + +"Yes, but is there any chance of our finding them?" + +"I can't say that, senor, but I fear that the chance would be very +small." + +"Then it is of no use trying, Dias. We saw at the last place what pains +the old people took to hide places where gold could be found, and if +there had been rich mines among these mountains you speak of, no doubt +they would have hidden them just as carefully. The question is, shall +we go up this pass as we intended, and take our chance, or shall we go +by this roundabout way?" + +By this time Jose had lit a fire, and they had seated themselves by it. + +"One hates turning back, but we are not pressed for time. As far as I +can see, my only chance is the feeble one of finding treasure in the +place you spoke of up the coast above Callao. It is now four months +since we left Lima. Travelling straight to that place would take us how +long?" + +"Well, senor, if we go round by Ayapata to Crucero, and then to Macari, +it would be nearly a thousand miles." + +"Quite a thousand, I should think. That is three months' steady work. +By the time we get there it will be about a year from the time we left +England. I have seen quite enough of the mountains to know that our +chance of finding anything among them is so small that it is not worth +thinking of. It seems to me, therefore, Dias, that we might just as +well, instead of going south over these difficult passes, return by the +foot of the mountains as we have come, going through Paucartambo, +crossing the rivers that flow north and fall somewhere or other into +the Amazon, and keeping along it till we come to Cerro de Pasco. There +we should be nearly in a line with this place you know of, and can keep +due west--that is to say, as nearly due west as the mountains will +allow. It would be three or four hundred miles shorter than by taking +the pass at Ayapata. We should have a good deal of sport by the way, +and should certainly have no trouble with the brigands till we got to +Cerro. Of course it is possible that we might fall in with savages +again, but at any rate they are not so formidable as brigands in the +passes. What do you say to that?" + +"It is certainly shorter, senor; and, as you say, we should have no +trouble with the brigands, and we should also escape the troubles that +have been going on for some years, and are likely, as far as anyone can +see, to go on for ever. We were very fortunate in not meeting any of +the armies that are always marching about." + + + + +CHAPTER XI + +BRIGANDS + + +Three months were spent in the journey to the foot of the pass leading +up to Cerro. They had good shooting, and found no difficulty in +providing themselves with food. Fish were plentiful in the streams, and +in some of the long-deserted plantations they found bananas, grapes, +and other fruits in abundance, together with sugar-canes, tomatoes, +maize growing wild, and potatoes which were reverting to the wild type. +They met neither with alligators nor large serpents, for they kept on +the lower slopes of the foot-hills, as much as possible avoiding the +low forest lands, where they might come in contact with the savages. +For the same reason, they had no opportunity of taking any of the great +fish found in the sluggish rivers, but had an abundance of smaller fish +in the bright mountain streams. They killed two tapirs and several +pumas and jaguars. Their two llamas, having one night wandered away +from the mules, were killed by these beasts. But as the stores were a +good deal lighter than when they started, this was no great misfortune. +Occasionally they followed streams up into the hills, and did a little +washing for gold when they halted for a day or two there. + +"We have had a good time of it," Harry said as they sat round the fire, +"and I am almost sorry that it is over, and that this is our last day +of wandering where we like, shooting and fishing, and above all, +camping in pleasant places. We have been very fortunate in not meeting +any of the savages since the fight we had with them four or five months +ago. It is a splendid country for sport, and except that we should like +it a bit cooler, and could have done without some of the +thunder-storms, it is a grand life. For a time now we are going back to +a sort of civilization, filthy inns, swarms of fleas, and +fifteenth-rate cooking." + +"It is not so much the fault of the cooking," Maria said, "as of the +meat. Here we get fish fresh out of the stream, and birds shot an hour +or two before they are eaten. We pick our fruit from the trees, instead +of buying it after it has been carried miles and miles to the market. +We have a capital stock of coffee, tea, and sugar. Among the old +plantations we pick cocoa and pound it fresh, and boil it. As we +brought plenty of pepper and spices, it would be hard indeed if one +could not turn out a good meal. And then, senors, you always come to +eat it with a good appetite, which is all in favour of the cook." + +"Yes, I grant that you have had all those advantages, Maria, but it is +not everybody who makes the best of them. I can safely say that since +we started we have never sat down to a bad breakfast or dinner. Now, +for a bit, we are going to lead a different sort of life. We shall be +on beaten tracks. We shall meet lots of people. It is strange to think +that, except for those peasant muleteers we met at the foot of the pass +by the Tinta volcano, we have not seen a soul except the savages--who +have souls, I suppose--since we left Paucartambo more than six months +ago; and yet somehow we do not seem to have missed them. I wonder what +we shall find when we get up to Cerro, and who will be president then." + +"I wonder what they are doing in Europe!" Bertie said. "We have heard +no later news than what we had when we went on board a ship sixteen +months ago. There may have been great wars all over Europe." + +"I don't think there is much chance of that, Bertie. India was the only +place where there was any fighting going on, and it seemed as if, since +Napoleon was crushed, Europe would become permanently pacific. Still, I +do hope that when we are at Lima we shall get hold of a pile of English +newspapers. The consul is sure to have them." + +"I don't suppose we shall want to stay there many days, Harry, for we +shall be eager to start the search for the enchanted castle Dias has +told us of. We saw quite enough of Lima during the ten days that we +were there." + +"Is the pass a bad one up to Cerro, Dias?" + +"There are some very bad points, senor. It never was a good one, but as +nothing has been done to the roads for at least a hundred years, it +must have got into a very bad state. I have been down it twice with +travellers, the second time ten years ago, and it was bad enough then. +It is likely to be worse now." + +"Well, as the road is used so little, Dias," Harry said, "there is no +fear of brigands." + +"I hope not, senor; but there may be some, though they would not be +there in the hope of plundering travellers. But desperate men are +always to be found in the mountains--men who have committed murders and +fled from justice. They are able to live on what they can shoot, and of +course they can get fish in the streams, and when they are tired of +that can come down here, where they will find plenty of turkeys, and +pheasants, and other game, besides the maize, and fruits, and other +things in the old plantations. Sometimes they will take a little +plunder from the small villages. Anyhow, they do not fare altogether +badly. Therefore one can never feel certain that one is safe from them, +even when travelling over tracks where travellers seldom pass. Still, +we may very well hope that we shall not have the bad luck to fall in +with them." + +"I hope so, Dias. We did not come out here to fight. So far we have +been very fortunate, and have not had to fire a shot, except at those +wretched savages." + +The next day's journey took them far up into the hills, and they camped +that night at the upper end of a deep ravine. It had been a hard day's +work, for at several points the mules had to be unloaded and taken up +singly, and the loads then carried up. Fortunately, the packs were now +very light, and were carried or hauled up without much difficulty. + +In the morning they again started. They were just issuing from the +ravine when a party of ten armed men made their appearance from amongst +some rocks, and shouted to them to halt. Dias rode in front. + +"You speak to them, Dias. Keep them for a minute in talk if you can, +and then take shelter behind that boulder." + +Then Harry ran back to Jose, who was walking with a leading mule twenty +paces behind. + +"Turn them back again, Jose. Halt a little way down, and then come up; +there are some brigands ahead. Bertie, bring up your rifle and the two +shot-guns. Tell Maria to remain with the mules." + +Then he ran back again just as a shot rang out, and, dodging among the +fallen rocks, he took shelter behind one abreast with Dias. "Was it you +who fired?" he asked. + +"No, one of the brigands. The ball went through the brim of my +sombrero. I think they are talking to each other, they know there is no +hurry." + +"Hail them again, Dias, but don't show yourself above the rock." + +"What do you want? Why did you fire at me?" + +"We want everything you have got," a voice came back--"your mules and +their burdens, and your arms. If you will give them up without +resistance, we will let you up the pass without hindering you." + +"Tell them that you must talk it over with the others, Dias." + +"Well, we will give you five minutes," the man called back. "If you do +not accept our terms, we will cut your throats." + +Dias stood up, and walked quietly down the rugged pass. At the point +where the mules stopped, the rock rose almost perpendicularly on each +side. + +"Maria," he said, "do you and Jose take off the saddles and bags and +fill up the spaces between these rocks on each side. Get the animals in +behind them. You stop with them, Maria. I have got five minutes, and +will help you." + +"You had better go up at once, senor," he went on to Bertie, "and help +your brother, so that they may not get sight of you. However, I am +afraid they know how many we are. It was foolish to light that fire +yesterday evening, I expect they were somewhere near and caught sight +of us, and no doubt one of them crept quietly down to find out what our +force was. Seeing there were but four of us, they thought they could +take us all easily here in the morning without firing a shot. But as +your brother and I happened to be going on first, they thought they +would parley. They would be sure that if they attacked us, we should +kill two or three of them at least before we had finished with them. +And as they reckoned that we should gladly accept their terms, they +would get all they wanted without trouble, and could shoot us +afterwards if they felt inclined." + +Bertie had by this time got the guns unstrapped, and had filled his +pockets with cartridges. He now went forward, and as he kept among the +rocks he was able to get within four or five yards of his brother +without being seen, as the mouth of the pass was almost blocked with +great boulders. + +"I cannot get any nearer without running the risk of being seen. I have +loaded the double-barrelled guns." + +"Stay where you are then, Bertie. I don't think they will make a rush, +and if they do, you can use them as well as your rifle. Of course I +have my pistols and you have yours. I don't believe they will venture +to attack in daylight, our trouble will be after dark." + +"Now, then, the five minutes are up!" the brigand shouted. + +"I am coming!" Dias shouted back. + +As he approached, Harry said: "Stand by the side of a rock, Dias, so as +to be able to shelter as soon as you have given them the answer; they +are likely enough to fire a volley." + +"We will give you nothing," Dias shouted. "Anything you want you had +better come and take." + +Three men raised their heads above the rocks and fired. Almost at the +same instant Harry's rifle and Bertie's cracked out, the heads +disappeared, and a fierce yell of rage showed that one, if not both of +the shots had found their mark. + +"You had better clear off," Harry shouted. "There are four of us, and +we have eight barrels between us, to say nothing of two brace of +pistols." + +A volley of curses was hurled back in reply. + +"Now, Dias, what do you think is our best move?" + +"I don't know, senor. I fancy there are only eight of them now. You and +your brother could hardly miss marks like their heads at thirty paces." +"If I were quite sure that there are no more of them I should say that, +as soon as it becomes dark, we had better creep forward and fight them. +It would be better to do that than wait for them to attack us. But +there may be, and very likely are, more of these bands among the hills. +Besides, Dias, we don't want to lose one of our number, and we could +hardly hope to get through unscathed, for if we were to try to push on +they would have us at a tremendous advantage. They would hide among the +rocks and shoot us down before we had time to level a gun at them. Now +that we have killed one, if not two of their number, they will +certainly try to get their revenge, and will harass us all the way up +the pass." + +"It is not only that, senor; it is the booty they expect to take." + +"They could not expect much booty," Harry said, "for our baggage +animals only carry small loads." + +"Gold does not take up a large bulk, senor; and I have not the least +doubt that they believe we have been gold-hunting, and have probably a +big amount of gold dust among the baggage." + +"I did not think of that, Dias. If they believe we have gold we will +take it as granted that they will do their best to get it. Well, do you +think it would be a good thing to make a rush?" + +"No, senor, it would be throwing away our lives. They will guess that +we shall probably attempt such a thing, and I have no doubt that they +will move away, if they haven't done so already, and hide themselves +among other rocks. Then if we dashed forward to the place where they +had been, they would pour a volley into us and finish us at once; for +if they were lying twenty yards away they ought certainly to hit every +one of us, as they have eight shots to fire. At present I have no doubt +they are talking, and I think we can safely get back to where we piled +up the saddles and bales. We can defend ourselves better there than +here. We can then talk matters over quietly." + +"That will be the best plan, Dias, certainly." + +Keeping under cover as well as they could they retired to the +barricade, thirty yards lower. Jose, aided by Maria, had completed the +defence. They had not, however, attempted to block the passage between +two great rocks. It was but three feet wide; the rocks lay about six +feet from the cliffs on either side, and these spaces were partly +filled by smaller fragments. Wherever there were open spaces the +blankets had been thrust in from behind. Dias had done the greater part +of the work before he went up to answer the demands of the bandits, but +the others had laboured very hard to finish it. + +"Well done!" Harry said as they passed through the entrance. + +"I told them not to close the path," Dias said. "We can do that now we +are all together. Most of the rocks are too heavy for Jose and Maria to +lift. Shall we build it up now, senor? I am sure they cannot force +their way through while we four are holding the barricade." + +"Certainly not, Dias, and I have no fear of their attempting it. But I +think it would be as well for us to close it, otherwise we could not +cross from one side to the other without exposing ourselves." + +It took them two hours' hard work--the harder because the stones had to +be thrown into the passage from the sides, as the brigands might be +crouching among the rocks higher up waiting for an opportunity to get a +shot. At the end of the two hours the gap was filled up to the height +of six feet. + +"Now we can talk matters over quietly, Dias," Harry said. "We may take +it that, whether they attack by day or by night, we can beat them off. +There is a little rill of water that trickles down along the centre, so +we need not fear being driven out by thirst, and we have food enough to +last us a fortnight. That is settled; but they may stay there for any +time, and without exposing ourselves to sudden death we cannot find out +whether they are still hanging about or not. Of course one very +important question is, are they going to be joined by others?" + +"I think they certainly will be, senor. As many of these fellows are +hiding among the hills as would make a good-sized regiment, and they +have only to send off two or three of their number with the news that a +party of gold-diggers with five laden mules are shut up in this ravine +to gather any number of them. They would come as quickly as vultures to +a dead horse. It must be a long time since they had any really valuable +plunder, and the fact that we have five baggage mules besides the three +riding ones would show that we had probably been a very long time away, +and might therefore possess a lot of gold." + +"Are there any other passes near?" + +"The nearest, senor, is on the other branch of the Palcazu--the river +we followed till we entered the passes--and is about thirty miles to +the north. The pass starts from a spot about fifteen miles above the +junction, and goes up to Huaca, a place that is little more than ten +miles south of Huanuco. From Huaca we could either follow the road to +Cerro, or strike across the Western Cordilleras to Aguamiro." + +"Then I think, Dias, that our best plan will be to go down again into +the valley we left yesterday morning, and then strike across for the +mouth of this pass you speak of. You know the direction?" + +"I know the general direction, although I have never been along there." + +"Well, Dias, you must be the guide. I should say the sooner we start +the better. My idea is this: If you with your wife and Jose will start +at once, so as to be down the pass before it gets dark, my brother and +I will remain here. You will leave our riding mules at the point where +the track is good enough for us to gallop on." + +"We should not like to leave you, senor," Maria said. + +"I have not the least fear of their attacking us, and with our rifles +and double-barrelled guns and pistols we could beat them off if they +did. I can't see any better way of getting out of this scrape, and am +quite willing to adopt this plan." + +"I don't see any other way, senor," Dias said. "The plan is a good one; +but I wish I could stay here with you." + +"But that would be impossible, Dias, for there would be no chance of +our finding the mouth of this pass by ourselves." + +"Why could we not all go together?" Maria asked. + +"Because if there were no one here the brigands might discover that we +had gone, within an hour or so of our starting. They might fire a shot +or two, and, finding that we did not answer, crawl gradually down till +they got here, for it must seem possible to them that we should return +down the pass; and as there is no getting the baggage mules to go fast, +we might very well be overtaken--I don't mean by those eight men, but +by a considerable number." + +"But how are you to find your way, senor?" Dias said. + +"We shall follow the valley down till we come to the spot where you +have struck off. You can fasten a white handkerchief to a stick and put +it in some bare place where we are sure to see it. I want you to halt +when you get to the river somewhere opposite the mouth of the pass. We +will ride nearly due north, and when we strike the river will follow it +down till we reach you." + +"We can't halt opposite the mouth of the pass, for the river there is +already some size, and we could not cross it. I shall keep along near +the foot of the hills--the water there is shallow enough to ford. Then +I will follow it down until, as you say, near the entrance to the pass, +and there stop on the bank till you come." + +"That will do very well. In that case it won't matter much where we +strike the stream, as our mules can swim across easily enough--they +have had plenty of practice during the past six months. However, we +will turn off north where we can see your signal." + +"When will you leave, senor?" + +"To-morrow morning. I have no fear of their attacking during the night, +for they can hardly bring other bands down here before morning. As soon +as it gets dark we will light two torches and put them down at the foot +of the barricade, so that we shall be in the shadow. These will show +them that we are still here, and they won't care to venture down into +the circle of light. We have let them know what a formidable amount of +firearms we have, and have given them a lesson that we can shoot +straight." + +"They certainly would not come, senor, as long as your torches are +burning, but three hours are as much as you can reckon upon their +burning." + +"Well, we have a dozen left now, Dias, and when they burn out we must +light two more and throw them over and trust to their burning as they +lie among the stones. Of course we should not think of going down to +stick them upright, for the scoundrels will probably be watching us as +closely as we are watching them. However, I shall manage to keep the +lights going till daybreak, and shall start a good hour before that. We +shall have to go down cautiously, and I should like to be well away +with the mules before they discover that we have left. Now, the sooner +you are off the better. Breakfast has been ready for the past hour. You +had better eat it and get under weigh as soon as you can. After you +have gone one of us will keep watch while the other eats. I have no +doubt there will be plenty left for our supper." + +"Yes, senor, and enough cakes to carry you on till you join us." + +Half an hour later the party started, Dias having muffled the mules' +hoofs, so that the clatter, as they passed over the rocks, might not be +heard above. + +"Now, Bertie, you go down to breakfast. When you have done come up and +relieve me. You have no occasion to hurry, for it is absolutely certain +that they won't dare to attack till they get reinforcements." + +When Bertie returned he said, "Here is a lot of food, Harry, they have +hardly eaten anything. There is plenty for us to-day and to-morrow." + +"That is just like them, Bertie; but I daresay they will camp in five +or six hours. It feels quite lonely without them." + +"That it does. It is really the first time we have been alone since we +left Lima, except, of course, when we were out shooting together." + +"Be sure you don't show your head above the barricade, Bertie. You must +do as I have been doing, sit down here and look out through this +peep-hole between these rocks Shove your rifle through it, so that, if +you see a head looking out from between the rocks up there, you can +fire at once." + +In half an hour Harry came back and sat down by his brother, and, +lighting their pipes, they chatted over the events of their journey and +the prospect before them. + +"I am afraid, Harry, the journey will be a failure, except that we have +had a very jolly time." + +"Well, so far it has not turned out much; but, somehow or other, I have +great faith in this haunted castle. Of course the demons Dias is so +afraid of are probably Indians, who are placed there to frighten +intruders away, and they would not keep watch unless they had something +to guard. I cannot understand how it has escaped the notice of the +Spaniards all these years. I had not much faith in their stories until +we found how true they were in all particulars as to what they call the +golden river. There is one satisfaction, however: if the place is +really a castle, it can hardly have disappeared under the lake. Of +course if it is in ruins we may have a lot of difficulty in getting at +the vaults, or wherever else treasure may have been buried; but unless +it is a very big place, which is hardly probable, the work would be +nothing compared with the draining of the lake." + +"We have got nearly a year in hand, Harry, and can do a lot of work in +that time, especially if we use powder." + +"Yes; but, you see, we ought to allow at least five months for getting +home. Still, no doubt if I felt justified in writing to ask for another +three or four months, saying I had great hopes of finding something +very good in a short time, she would stand out against her father a +little longer. I shall write directly we get to Lima to say that, +although I have so far failed, I do not give up hope, and am just +starting on another enterprise that promises well." Bertie held up his +finger. "I think I heard somebody move. It sounded like a stone being +turned over." For two or three minutes he lay motionless, with his +finger on the trigger. Then he fired. + +"What was it, Bertie?" + +"It was a man's leg. I suddenly saw it below that rift behind the rock. +I expect he had no idea that his foot showed there. I am pretty sure I +hit it, for I had time to take a steady aim, and the foot disappeared +the instant I fired. If he did not know it was exposed, there was no +reason why he should have moved at all if he hadn't been hit." + +"It was better to hit his foot than his head, Bertie. It is equally +good as a lesson, if not better, for though we don't mean to let them +kill us, I don't want to take life unless it is absolutely necessary. +Well, after that proof of the sharpness of our watch they are not +likely to make any fresh move." + +The day passed slowly. They took it by turns to keep watch, and just +before dusk Harry said, "I think, Bertie, that we might pull out the +leaves and bush that Dias shoved into one of these gaps when he took +the blankets and things out. I could push the torch through and fix it +there, that would save having to cross the barricade. It is quite +possible that one of those fellows may be keeping as sharp a look-out +as we are doing, and it is as well not to set one's self up as a mark. +If I put it through now it won't show much, while if I wait till +darkness falls it will be an easy object to fire at. You keep a sharp +lookout while I am doing this, and if you see either a head or a gun +try to hit it." + +Harry accomplished the operation without drawing a shot, and as soon as +he had fixed the torch he again stopped the hole up behind it. + +"It is evident that they are not watching us very closely," he said. +"If they have not sent for help, they have gone off. With two of their +men killed and two disabled, the fight must have been taken out of +them. We will watch by turns to-night. It is six o'clock now; will you +sit up till eleven, or shall I?" + +"I don't care a bit. Which would you rather take?" + +"I don't care;--however, I may as well take the first watch. We will +start at five, so rouse me at four. If they come at all, which is +possible, but not probable, it will be between four and five." + +At ten o'clock Harry could see a glow of light at some distance from +the mouth of the ravine, and in the stillness could occasionally catch +the sound of voices. When he woke Bertie at twelve the lad looked at +his watch and said, "You are an hour late in calling me, Harry." + +"Yes, I had no inclination for sleep. The fellows have been reinforced. +Of course I don't know to what extent, but I should say pretty +strongly. They have lit a big fire some distance from the ravine. They +would not have dared to light one if they had not felt themselves +strong enough to fight us. No doubt they have half a dozen men on watch +where we first saw them, and these would give notice if we were coming. +I think we may as well fire a couple of shots, it will show them that +we are here and on guard. They will suppose we thought we heard someone +coming down to reconnoitre our position." + +They both fired over the top of the barricade. + +"I see you have renewed the torch, Harry," Bertie said as they reloaded. + +"Yes, I have done so twice. I was very careful, however, as I feared +they might be watching. I did not wait for the lighted one to burn out, +but passed the other one out, putting the end of my poncho round my +hand and arm, so that they could hardly be noticed even by anyone +within ten yards, and certainly could not be seen from up there. As I +pushed it through I lighted it at the stump of the old torch and then +withdrew my hand like a shot. I did the same thing again an hour ago +with equal success, so it is evident that they are not keeping a very +sharp look-out above, and have no fear of our making a sortie, hampered +as we are by our animals." + +The torch was changed again at four o'clock, and a little later Bertie +heard a slight noise. + +"I think they are coming, Harry," he said quietly. + +Harry was at once on his feet. "Use your rifle first, Bertie, and sling +it over your shoulder before you give them the two barrels of +buck-shot, so that you can start to run at once if we don't stop them." + +"Yes, I am certain they are coming," he said, after listening for two +or three minutes. "We have got two or three torches left, and I will +give them the benefit of them." + +He went back to the embers of the fire, lighted the torches, and, +returning to the barrier, threw them twenty or thirty yards up the +ravine. There was a hoarse shout of anger, and then a dozen shots were +fired. Bertie's rifle cracked out in return, and Harry's followed +almost immediately. A dark group of some twenty or thirty men were +rushing forward, and had just reached the line where the torches were +burning, when four barrels of buck-shot were poured into them. Three or +four fell, the rest fled at once, and the cries and oaths showed that +many of them were wounded. + +"They won't venture again for the present," Harry said. "You may be +sure they will hold a council of war, so load again and then we will be +off." + +Two minutes later they were making their way carefully down the rocky +passage, Harry carrying the bundle they had made up of the unconsumed +provisions. As they had to exercise great care in climbing over the +rocks, the day was just breaking when they came upon two mules that had +been left behind for them. They rode cautiously until they were quite +out of the ravine, and then started down the valley at a gallop. In an +hour Bertie exclaimed, "There is the flag!" They rode to it and then +turned off to the north, slackening their pace to a trot. The animals +were in good condition, as they had of late been making short marches, +and at eleven o'clock they came upon the river. Here they waited for an +hour, gave a couple of cakes to each animal, and ate the rest +themselves. The river was some fifty yards across, but the mules only +needed to swim about half this distance. The brothers kept beside them, +placing one elbow on the saddles and holding their rifles and +ammunition well above the water. They were soon across, and, mounting, +followed the river down, letting the animals go their own pace, and +sometimes walking beside them, as they wished to keep them fresh for +the next day's work. At five in the afternoon they saw smoke ahead of +them, and, riding faster now, soon joined their companions, who hailed +their arrival with shouts of joy. + +"We have been terribly anxious about you, senors," Dias said, "and +regretted deeply that we deserted you." + +"It was not desertion, Dias; you were obeying orders, and were on duty +guarding the baggage. There was really no cause for uneasiness; we were +certain that we could beat them off if they ventured to attack us." + +"And did they do so?" + +"They made a feeble attack this morning at four o'clock, but we were +ready for them. They might have carried the barricade had we only had +our rifles, but buck-shot was too much for them. Of course we brought +down two with our rifles; but there must have been over a score of +them, and the four barrels of buck-shot did heavy execution. Some of +them fell, and I fancy most of the others got a dose of shot, as they +were all in a close body. I will tell you all about it after we have +had supper." + +"I have got it ready," Maria said. "We have been expecting you for the +past hour, and I was sure you would have good appetites when you +arrived." + +After the story had been told Dias said: "That was a capital plan of +keeping the torches burning all night, and especially of throwing two +of them up the ravine when you heard the fellows coming. Of course they +calculated on getting within fifteen yards or so before you saw them. +Well, there is no fear of our hearing any more of them. I expect you +must have been gone hours before they found out that you had left." + +"I should not be surprised if, after they had recovered from their +defeat, half of them made a big circuit over the hills--no doubt they +know every foot of them--and, coming down at the bottom of the ravine, +built a strong barricade, making up their minds to guard both ends +until we were obliged to surrender from want of food. Having suffered +so heavily, they would do everything in their power to prevent any of +us from getting out alive." + +"In that case they must have been prepared to wait for some time, Dias, +for they knew we had eight animals to eat." + +"They would not have lasted long, senor, for we have only a few +handfuls of grain left, and there is not enough forage in the ravine to +last them a couple of days." + +"I expect they would have tried to get us to surrender, by offering to +let us pass if we would give them half of the gold they thought we had +with us. There is no chance of our being followed, I suppose, Dias?" + +"Not the slightest. When at last they discover that we have gone, they +will come down the pass and find where the mules were left standing. +They will then see that only two of us had remained at the barricade, +and will guess at once that the rest left hours before. They will +therefore conclude that, being on foot, they have no chance of +overtaking us, even if they could find the track." + +"No, I expect by this time they are dancing with rage, and as likely as +not quarrelling furiously among themselves. How far do you think we +have ridden to-day?" + +"Nearer sixty miles than fifty, senor." + +"Yes, I suppose we have. And if we had come straight here?" + +"It would have been nearly fifteen miles shorter. But if they pursued +they would not come that way, because they would not be able to get +across. I think they would have to go round and ford the river some +miles higher than you did. They could never swim across with their guns +and ammunition to carry." + +"I should not count on that, Dias. They might come straight here, as +they would guess that we had made for this pass, and they might make +bundles of reeds to carry their guns and ammunition across, and swim +over." + +"That would be possible," Dias admitted reluctantly, "and if they knew +that the five mules were all loaded with gold they might be tempted to +follow; but that they could only guess. I have no doubt, too, that many +of them had been walking for hours across the mountains before the +attack, and as you fired into the thick of them, a fair share must have +been too much wounded to start on a forty-miles' tramp. + +"No, senor. I do not think there is any chance whatever of their +pursuing us. Besides, I chose a spot where the ground was hard and +rocky to plant that flag. And they would have a good deal of difficulty +in ascertaining in what direction we went from there." + +"We pulled up the flag-staff and threw it away among the bushes a mile +and a half farther, and of course brought the handkerchief with us." + +"I don't think we need give another thought to them, senor. At the same +time, it would be as well to keep one on watch all night. Jose and I +will be on guard by turns. Neither of you slept a wink last night, so +you must not keep watch this time." + +"I sha'n't be sorry for a good sleep, for the meal we have eaten has +made me drowsy. However, if you hear the least noise, wake us at once." + +"That I will do, senor. It is a great deal more likely to be made by a +wild beast than by a brigand." + +The brothers were sound asleep in a few minutes, and did not wake till +Dias called them, and said that Maria had coffee ready. + +"What sort of a pass is it to-day, Dias?" + +"Not a very bad one, senor. The one we tried yesterday hadn't been used +for very many years, there is regular traffic up and down this; not +valuable traffic, for Pozuco is a small place. They send up fruit and +dried fish, and the oil they get from the fish; and bring back cloth, +and such things as are required in the village." + +"So there is nothing to tempt brigands to infest the pass and rob +travellers!" + +"No, senor. When I last went through it I heard no talk of them at all. +They are more likely to infest the hills beyond Cerro, for near that +place really valuable captures can be made." + +"That accounts for their being able to gather so many men to attack us." + +The journey up the pass occupied two days. They met three or four small +parties of men with donkeys or mules, but all these when questioned +said that the pass was perfectly open, and that it was a very rare +thing indeed for anyone to be robbed on the way. Late in the evening of +the second day they arrived at Huaca, and were advised to go to the +priest's house, as the accommodation at the inn was so bad. The man who +directed them there was the head man of the place, and they gladly +accepted his offer to guide them to the priest's house. + +"It would be the best way, senor," Dias said. "I know a man here who +would willingly put us up, and who has a yard where the mules could +pass the night." + +"Very well, Dias. Be sure you buy a good stock of grain. They have +scarce had any for the last three days." + +The priest--a cheery, hearty man--received Harry and Bertie cordially +when they were introduced as English travellers, especially when he +found that they could both speak Spanish fluently. + +"It is a pleasure to receive British travellers," he said. "Cochrane +and Miller have done more for us than any of our own countrymen. It is +not often that travellers come this way. I have heard of two or three +going to Cuzco, but they never come farther north than Cerro. I shall +be delighted if you will stay two or three days here, senors. We get so +little news of the world that it would be a great pleasure to us to +hear what is going on outside this unfortunate country." + +"We can give you but little news, for it is more than a year since we +left England, and we have heard nothing of what is doing in Europe, as +we have been travelling and shooting at the foot of the mountains +between the bottom of this pass and Tinta volcano." + +"And gold seeking?" the priest asked with a twinkle in his eye. + +"We have occasionally washed the sands in the streams, but have not +found enough to repay our work. The amount we have gathered is only +about twenty ounces." + +"Well, gentlemen, I shall be delighted to have you as my guests as long +as you are willing to stay." + +"We are greatly obliged to you," Harry said, "and will gladly be your +guests. To-morrow the animals need a rest, and we shall enjoy one too. +Next morning we must be going on, as we have been away longer than we +ought, and want to get down to Lima quickly." + +They had great difficulty in getting away from Huaca, where the good +priest made them extremely comfortable, and was very loath to let them +go. However, at dawn on the second day they started for Cerro, and +arrived there forty-eight hours later after a rough journey through the +Mils. + +"We never know in Peru, when we go to bed, who will be president when +we wake," Dias said that evening. "There have been a dozen of them in +the past five years. Lamar, Gamarra, La Fuente, Orbegozo, Bermudes, and +Salaverry succeeded one another; then Santa Cruz became master. Nieto +had the upper hand for a bit, and at that time there was no travelling +on the roads, they were so infested by robbers; one band was master of +Lima for some time. Then the Chilians occupied Lima; Santa Cruz was +defeated, and Gamarra came in again. None of these men was ever supreme +over the whole country. Generals mutinied with the troops under them, +other leaders sprang up, and altogether there has been trouble and +civil war ever since the Spaniards left. That is why the country is so +full of robbers. When an army was defeated, those who escaped took to +the hills and lived by plunder until some other chief revolted, then +they would go down and join him; and so it has gone on." + +"Who composed those armies? because the fields seem to have been well +cultivated, and the peasants are quiet enough." + +"Yes, senor, for the most part they take no part in these affairs. The +men who compose the armies were in the first place the remains of those +who fought against the Spaniards. When the Spaniards left the country +these men had nothing to do, and were ready to enlist under anyone who +raised a flag and promised them pay. Of bourse there are many men in +the towns who are too lazy to work, and who help to keep up the supply +of armed men. The good God only knows when these things will come to an +end. A few of those who have come into power really loved their +country, and hoped to establish order and do away with all the abuses +caused by the men who were appointed to offices by one or another of +those tyrants; but most of them were ambitious soldiers, who led +mutineers against the chief of the moment. If Heaven would but destroy +or strike with blindness the soldiers--and above all, every official in +Peru--the country might hope for peace and good government. The best +man who has ever fought out here since Lord Cochrane left the place was +General Miller, your countryman, who was splendidly brave. He was +always true to his word, never allowed his soldiers to plunder, and +never ill-treated those captured in battle. Ah! they should have made +him president, but it would never have done. As the Chilians were +jealous of Lord Cochrane, the Peruvians were jealous of Miller, first +because he was a foreigner, secondly because his uprightness and +fidelity were a reproach to their ambition and treachery, their greed, +and their cruelty. Besides, he understood them too well, and if all +Peru had asked him to be president, he knew well enough that +conspiracies against him would begin the next morning. Ah, he was a +great man! + +"Well, senor, I think that before we start it will be well that I at +least should go on to Ayapata and find out what is doing. That would +only delay us two days, and we might be better able to judge as to +which route to take. They may be fighting in the north, and we do not +want to get mixed up in any way in their quarrels." + +"I think that would be a very good plan, Dias. You start in the +morning, and we will stay quietly here till you come back with the +news. If many brigands are in the pass they might get to hear of us +from someone going over from this side, and take it into their heads to +come down. I would certainly rather not have to fight with you away." + +Accordingly next morning Dias went on ahead. On the following evening +he rejoined them. + +"There is fresh trouble in the south, senor. Colonel Vivancohidas has +declared himself Regenerator of Peru, and is now marching against +Gamarra, and General Castilla is advancing against him. The fighting +will be somewhere near Arequipa. Whichever wins will presently cross +the mountains and make for Cuzco." + +"Then that settles it, Dias. Certainly I have heard nothing in +Gamarra's favour, but a great deal against him, since I landed, and I +care nothing about either side; but I hope the new man will win, +because I think that any change from Gamarra will be an improvement." + + + + +CHAPTER XII + +PRISONERS + + +When they arrived at Cerro de Pasco they found that the division of +Gamarra's army stationed in the district had mutinied and had declared +for Vivancohidas, and were killing all those known as adherents of +Gamarra. All traffic was at a stand-still. Numbers of the soldiers who +did not choose to join in the mutiny had taken to the hills, and were +pillaging convoys and peaceful travellers alike. + +"I think, senor," Dias said, "that instead of crossing the Cordilleras +to the west, as we had intended, it will be better for us to go south, +skirt the lake of Junin, and make for Oroya. That is the route +generally taken, for the passes west are terribly difficult. I have +traversed this route many times, and when going with merchandise I +always go through Oroya, though in returning from Cerro I take the +shorter route." + +"Very well, Dias, you are the best judge of that. It is a great +nuisance that this rising should have taken place just as we want to +traverse the country, but it can't be helped. I will go to the +head-quarters of Quinda--he is established at the mayor's house +here--and get a pass from him. + +"It would be well, perhaps, if you were to go with me, Dias, to confirm +my statement that we have been shooting and hunting. I hope he will +give us a pass, so that we shall not be interfered with by his men +gathered at different points on the road to Oroya. I hear that a +considerable portion of his force have already marched forward." + +The Peruvian colonel questioned Harry closely as to his motives for +travelling there. + +"I suppose," he said, "you have been searching for gold. We are sorely +in need of funds, and I shall feel myself obliged to borrow any gold +that you may have collected for the use of my army, giving you an order +on the treasury at Lima, which will, of course, be honoured as soon as +the authority of President Vivancohidas is established." + +"I do not doubt the goodness of the security," Harry said quietly, +"although possibly I might have to wait some time before the order was +cashed; but while hunting I have not come upon any treasure. We have +occasionally, when halting at streams, amused ourselves by doing a +little gold-washing, but when I tell you that during the eight months +since we started from Cuzco we have only collected about twenty ounces +of gold, you may well suppose that no good fortune has attended us." + +"Is that all, senor?" + +"I give you my word of honour that is all, senor; and as I shall have +to lay in a store of provisions and so on for my journey down to Lima, +you may well imagine that it would be a serious inconvenience to me to +part with it." + +"Quite so, senor; so small a sum as that would not go far among the +four thousand men under my command. However, I shall have pleasure in +giving you the pass that you ask. You have had good sport, I hope?" + +"As good as I expected. We kept ourselves in food, and have seen a +splendid country, which I hope some time will again be cultivated, and +add to the wealth of your country." + +After a further exchange of compliments Harry returned to the inn where +they had put up. + +Next morning, after purchasing some coffee and other stores that were +needed, they set out. + +"Now we are all right, Dias," Harry said as they started. + +"I hope so, senor; but from what I heard yesterday evening several +strong bands of disaffected soldiers are in the hills between this and +Oroya. Quinda's troops have by no means all joined him, and several +companies that broke off have stationed themselves in the hills along +this road. They have stopped and robbed more than one mule train with +silver from the mines there. They have not meddled, as far as I hear, +with Quinda's troops, but have simply seized the opportunity of +perpetrating brigandage on a large scale." + +"Well, we must take our chance, Dias. Fortunately we have money enough +at Lima to replace the animals. We have pretty well finished all our +stores, and beyond the tents and the bedding, which would be a matter +of a hundred dollars, there is nothing worth thinking of; still, +certainly I do not want to lose it. I hope we sha'n't fall in with any +of those scoundrels." + +"I hope not, senor. Perhaps we had better put our gold dust and money +in Jose's boots. They are less likely to examine him than they are us. + +"You had better put half in his boots, and give the other half to my +wife to hide about her clothes. We shall want some money, if we are +robbed, to take us down to Lima. With the gold dust we could get a +couple of mules and enough provisions to take us down there. We should +be in a very awkward position if we found ourselves penniless." + +They stopped for the night at a little village close to the lake. There +was but one small room at the inn, but at the other end of the +straggling village there was a yard where the mules could stand, and a +loft where Dias, Maria, and Jose could sleep. + +Harry and his brother had lain down but an hour on their blankets when +there was a shouting in the street, and two or three shots were fired. +They leapt up. + +"We had better hide our rifles and pistols," Harry said, "under that +ragged bed that we did not care about sleeping on. We may possibly get +them again even if we are robbed of everything else." + +A minute later four or five men with a lantern rushed into the room. +They were all armed with muskets, and one carried a torch. + +"Who are you?" this man asked. + +"We are English sportsmen," Harry said. "We have been shooting for some +months at the foot of the hills, and are now returning to Lima. There +are our guns, you see." + +"We will take you before the captain," the man said. "Bring those guns +along, Pedro and Juan." + +The village was in an uproar. Some fifty men were occupied in searching +the houses and in appropriating everything they thought useful. One +house had been set on fire, and near this a man in an officer's uniform +was standing. He heard the report of Harry's and Bertie's capture. + +"English sportsmen, eh! How long have you been shooting?" he asked. + +"Eight months." + +"Eight months! Then guard them securely, Montes; they are doubtless +rich Englishmen, and we shall get a good ransom for them. English +senors who come out here to shoot must be men with plenty of money; but +likely enough they are not sportsmen, but gold-seekers. However, it +matters little." + +"I protest against this," Harry said. "Our consul at Lima will demand +satisfaction from the government." + +The other laughed. + +"Government!" he said, "there is no government; and if there were, they +would have no power up in the hills." + +So saying he turned away. + +Plunder that had been collected was brought in and divided among the +party, four of the men with muskets keeping guard over the prisoners. + +"I don't see anything of Dias and the mules," Bertie said in English. + +"No, I have been expecting to see them brought up every minute. Now I +am beginning to hope that they have got safely off. I think the fellows +began their attack at our end of the village. + +"You know how watchful Dias is. Very likely he or Jose were up, and you +may be sure that the moment they heard the uproar they would drive the +mules out and be off. You see only two of them are laden, and they +could have thrown the things on to their backs and been off at once. He +would know that it was useless to wait for us. I expect he would turn +them off the road at once and make down towards the lake. If these +fellows had caught him and the mules they would certainly have brought +them up here before this." + +"I hope he got off--not so much because of the mules, as because I am +sure that, if he gets fairly away, he will do what he can to help us." + +"I am sure he will, Bertie. We must make the best of it. There is one +thing, we have got a good month before us. It will take them all that +time to go down to Lima about our ransom and return; and it is hard if +we don't give them the slip before that." + +A quarter of an hour later the band started with their booty and +prisoners for the hills. + +"I don't suppose they will go far," Harry said. "Quinda has got his +hands full, and will be wanting to start as soon as he can to join +Vivancohidas. He won't lose time in hunting the scoundrel who has +caught us, so I expect the band make their head-quarters in some +village at the foot of the hills." + +This turned out to be so. After a march of four hours the band halted +in a village in a valley running up into the hills. The prisoners were +thrust into an empty hut, and four men with muskets told off as their +guard. Next morning the captain of the band came in. + +"I shall require a hundred thousand dollars for your ransom," he said. + +"We could never pay such a sum," Harry said. "We are not rich men. I am +a lieutenant on half-pay in the English navy, and, having nothing to do +at home, came out with my brother for a year's sport. I could not pay a +tenth of that sum." + +"That we shall see," the man said. "If you cannot pay, your government +can. You will at once write to your consul at Lima, telling him that if +this hundred thousand dollars are not handed over to my messenger +within four days of his arrival there, you will both have your throats +cut." + +"I will write the letter if you wish," Harry replied quietly, "but you +won't get the money. If you like to say ten thousand dollars, I dare +say the consul will do his best to raise that amount." + +"One hundred thousand is the smallest sum," the man said angrily. "He +can get it out of the government there. They will not choose to risk +having trouble with your country for the sake of such a sum." + +"Gamarra is away," Harry said, "and it is pretty certain that he will +not have left a hundred thousand dollars in the treasury; and even if +he has, you maybe sure that his people there would not give it up, for +he wants every penny for his war expenses." + +The man shrugged his shoulders. + +"So much the worse for you. Write as I told you; here is paper, pen, +and ink. Do not write in English. I will come back in a quarter of an +hour for it." + +"This is awkward, Bertie. It is evident that I must write. As to their +paying twenty thousand pounds, the thing is absurd; if he had mentioned +two thousand they might have considered the matter. What I hope is that +they will not send up anything. I feel certain that we shall be able to +get away from here within a month; and if they were to send up one or +two thousand pounds, we should probably miss the fellow on the way. In +that case we should have to repay the money when we got to Lima, which +I certainly should not see my way to do--anyhow, until I got to +England, when I could, of course, sell out some of my stock. There is +nothing here that we could use as invisible ink. If there were, I would +risk writing a message with it; but even then it is fifty to one +against their bringing it to light. Well, here goes!" and he wrote in +Spanish the required message. + +The robber on his return read it through, turned the paper over to see +that nothing was written on the back, and held it up to the light. + +"That will do," he said. "Now let me warn you, don't attempt to escape. +You won't succeed if you do, and the sentries have orders to shoot you +down should you attempt it." + +The time passed slowly. The brigand was evidently determined to give +them no chance of escaping, and four sentries remained round the hut, +one at each corner. In the daytime the prisoners were allowed to sit at +the door of the hut, but they were shut up at nightfall. The guards +were not allowed to speak to them, and there was therefore no chance of +offering them a bribe. On the evening of the fifth day they had, as +usual, been shut up, and were chatting over the situation. + +"If they continue to guard us like this, Bertie, I really don't see a +shadow of a chance of getting away. We calculated on there being one, +or perhaps two sentries at the door, and thought we could have cut a +hole through that adobe wall at the back and crept out through it; but +as there is a guard at each corner, I don't see a chance of it. The +fellows are evidently afraid of their captain, and each keeps to his +corner, and sits there and smokes and drones out songs, but they never +move till they are relieved. Of course we must make the attempt if we +see no other way of escaping. But I have still great hope that Dias +will somehow or other try to get us out, though how he can do it I +don't know." + +They observed that the sentries were not changed in any military way. +Five minutes before sunset the four men who were to relieve those on +guard came sauntering up. The former guard ordered the captives into +the hut and bolted the door, and then after a short chat with the +others went off, the new sentries having already taken their posts at +the corners of the hut. On the fifth evening after their capture they +saw approaching a peasant woman sitting on a mule. A man was walking +beside her. Behind the woman was a small barrel, and two packs and two +small wine-skins hung on each side. + +"Harry," Bertie exclaimed, "I believe that is Dias and Maria!" + +"It is," Harry said. "Thank God they have found us! Twenty to one they +will get us out. What have they got with them, I wonder?" + +They stopped in the road opposite the house, which was the end one in +the village. + +"You are not to come nearer," one of the sentries shouted. + +"I am sure I don't want to come nearer," the woman said pertly. "You +don't think you are so handsome that I want to get a better sight of +your face?" + +"What have you got there?" the man asked. "We shall be coming off duty +in ten minutes." + +"Well, we have got a little of everything," she said. "As pretty sashes +as there are in the country, beautiful silk neckerchiefs, silver +brooches for your sweethearts, and for those who purchase freely a +glass of the best pisco spirit." + +"Well, wait, and I dare say we shall lay out a dollar or two." + +A minute or two later four other men sauntered up, and began to talk to +Maria, who slipped off her mule. The guards, fearful that the best +bargains would be sold before they could get forward, hurried the +prisoners into the hut and bolted the door. The brothers heard a great +deal of talking and arguing, and ten minutes later the sentries came up +to their usual post. + +"I would not mind betting odds," Bertie said with delight, "that Dias +has drugged that spirit." + +"I expect so, Bertie. He would be sure that they could not resist it, +for it is the best spirit there is in Peru." + +For a time the sentries talked, saying that the pedlars' goods were +cheap and the spirit as good as any they had ever tasted. "We had great +difficulty in getting her to sell us a second glass each; and she was +right, for she had not much of it, and it must help her rarely to sell +her goods. The husband seemed a surly sort of chap. I wonder such a +pretty little woman would marry such a fellow." + +"I suppose he was well-to-do and she was poor," another said; "such is +generally the case when you see a marriage like that. I dare say he +makes a good thing of it; the goods are as cheap, though, as they would +be in Lima." + +Gradually the talking ceased, and within an hour there was perfect +quiet outside the hut. Half an hour later they heard footsteps coming +quietly up to the door. They held their breath; but instead of, as they +expected, hearing the bolt drawn, they heard the new-comers going round +the hut, pausing a minute at each corner. Then they again stopped at +the door; the two bolts were shot back, and the door opened. + +"Come, senors," Dias said; "it is quite safe. We have put them all to +sleep. Here are their muskets and pistols. You had better take them, in +case we are pursued, which is not likely. At any rate, should one of +them wake the want of a gun will mean delay in raising the alarm. + +"Don't speak, senors; it is as well to keep quiet till we are fairly +off." He shut the door and rebolted it, and then led the way down into +the road. + +Not a word was spoken till they had gone a hundred yards, and then +Harry said: "You have done us another good turn, Dias; we did not see +any possible way of getting out; but we both agreed that if you could +find us you would." + +"Of course, senors, you could not suppose that Maria and I would go +quietly off." + +"How did you manage to get away, Dias?" + +"It was easy enough. After what we had heard of these brigands I made +up my mind that I would not unsaddle the mules, nor take the packs off +the two loaded ones. The burdens were not heavy, for we have little but +our bedding and the tents left, and I thought they might as well stay +where they were, and in the morning we could shift them on to the +others. I told Jose to watch about half the night; but I was standing +talking to him, and smoking my last cigarette, when he said suddenly, +'I can hear a noise at the other end of the village.' + +"The evening was still, and I could also hear the sound of many +footsteps, so I ran and pulled down the bar at the back of the yard, +called Maria, and told her and Jose to take the mules straight down to +the lake, and then to follow the bank. Then I ran to warn you; but +before I got half-way I heard shouts and firing, and knew that I was +too late, so I ran back to the lake, where I overtook the mules, and we +mounted and went off at a trot. When I got a quarter of a mile away I +told the others to go on to Junin, which we knew was twenty miles away, +and put up there till I joined them. Then I ran back to the village, +and, keeping myself well behind a house, watched them getting ready to +start, and saw you. There was nothing to do but to follow you. I did +so, and observed where they had shut you up, and I waited about for +some hours, so as to see how you were guarded. + +"I saw their captain go into your hut twice. When he came out the +second time he had a paper in his hand. He went to the house he has +taken possession of, and I kept a good watch over that. Presently two +lieutenants came out, talking together. They entered another house, and +ten minutes afterwards issued out again, dressed in ordinary clothes, +such as a muleteer or a cultivator fairly well off would wear, and +returned to the captain's house, and stayed there for a good half-hour +before they came out again. Two horses had been brought round to the +door. The captain came out with them, and was evidently giving them +some last instructions. Then they rode off, saying good-bye to some of +the men as they passed through the village. + +"Knowing the ways of these bandits, I had no doubt the paper I saw +their captain bring out of the hut where you were was a letter he had +compelled you to write to request a large sum of money to be sent in +exchange for you; and as I felt certain that we should rescue you +somehow, I thought it was a pity that this letter should go down, so I +started at once to follow them. They had not got more than a quarter of +an hour's start of me, and by the line they had taken I saw that they +intended to go to Junin. I did not think it likely that they would +enter the place, because they would be sure to meet some of Quinda's +men there; but would probably sleep at some small village near it, and +then make a circuit to strike the road beyond the town. + +"Fortunately I had some money in my pocket, and at the first farm I +came to I bought a mule. You see, senor, I had not lain down the night +before, and had done a fair day's work before I started to follow your +captors. I had walked twenty miles with them, and had been busy all the +morning. I knew it could not be much less than thirty miles to Junin, +and that if I could not find them there I should have to push on after +them again the next morning, so I gave the farmer what he asked for his +mule, and started at once on it barebacked. It turned out to be a good +animal, and I rode hard, for I wanted to get down to Junin before the +two men. I reckoned I should do that, because, as they were going a +very long journey, they would not want to press their horses, and +besides would prefer that it should be dark before they stopped for the +night. + +"When I got to Junin I found Maria and Jose, who had put up the mules +at the only inn there. I set Maria to watch on the road leading into +the town, and went out with Jose to a little village a mile back, where +I made sure the fellows would stop. I was not long in finding out that +they had arrived about half an hour after I had ridden through, and had +put up at the priest's. That was good enough for me. We went back to +the town. I had some supper, which I can tell you I wanted badly, for I +had been afraid of going into the brigand's village to buy anything, +as, being a stranger, I might have been asked questions, so I had had +nothing since the night before. I had found that there was a road from +the place where they had stopped, by which they could ride along by the +lake without going into the town; so Jose and I ambushed there an hour +before daylight, thinking that they would be off early. We were right; +for in a quarter of an hour they came along. Day was just breaking, so +we could make out their figures easily enough, and as they were not +five yards away as they passed, we were not likely to miss them. Well, +I found the paper you had written in the coat-pocket of one of them, +together with two hundred dollars, no doubt for the expenses of his +journey. We hid the two bodies under a heap of stones." + +"Then you killed them, Dias?" Harry said, in a tone of surprise. + +"Of course! what else would one do with them? They were brigands, and +they had attacked a peaceable village and killed several people. Even +if I had not wanted to get your paper it would have been a very +meritorious action." + +"Oh, I am not blaming you, Dias, at all! There was no other way of +getting the paper, and it may be regarded as an act of necessity. And +what did you do with their horses?" + +"Jose went on with them, and I returned to the town again and started +with Maria and the mules. We journeyed to a village half-way to Oroya. +Of course we overtook Jose a mile or two after we had left Junin. There +we put up at a quiet place and talked over the situation. We knew that +there was no particular hurry, for we read your letter, and knew that +no harm would come to you for a long time. It would be a month at least +before they would expect the men back with the money. There was another +letter, addressed to Don Mariano Carratala, whom I know to be a busy +politician in Lima. The money was to be paid to him; at least he was to +receive it from the two men immediately they left the British consul's +house, and he was to hold it for Valdez, which is the name of the +brigand." + +"I thought he would not trust the men to bring up a sum like that." + +"It would be enough to tempt the most incorruptible Peruvian, and +certainly the men he sent down would have taken good care never to come +to this part of the country again if they had got the money into their +possession. I don't think either it would have been safe in the hands +of Carratala, if he did not know that sooner or later he would get a +knife between his shoulders if he kept it. Next morning Maria and I +started back, bringing with us four mules, the fastest we had. We rode +on two and led the others. I knew some people at Junin, for I have +often passed through the town when I have been bringing down silver +from Cerro, and one managed to get for us that little barrel of pisco. +I was sure that no soldier would refuse a glass; but it was almost a +sin to give such liquor to the dogs. Then we bought peasants' clothes, +and a parcel of goods such as travelling hawkers carry. + +"You know how we succeeded. Of course we had drugged the pisco heavily, +and knew that two glasses would send any man off to sleep in half an +hour. As soon as it was dark, Maria went on with the mule. We shall +find her half a mile from here at a deserted hut where we left the +other three mules." + +"Well, Dias, you have assuredly saved our lives. Guarded as we were, +there was not the slightest chance of our getting away by ourselves; +and as the British consul certainly could not have raised the sum they +demanded, we should have had our throats cut when the messengers +returned empty-handed. Valdez is not the man to go back from his word +in that respect." + +"It is a pity you have lost your arms, senor." + +"Yes, we have certainly lost our double-barrelled guns, but our rifles +and pistols are hidden in the straw of the bed in the room where we +slept. We had just time to hide them before the brigands burst into the +room." + +"Then we can recover them, senor. Of course I intended to ride straight +to Junin, but it won't make very much difference. We will ride to the +village, get the rifles and pistols, and then follow the road by the +lake. It is now only nine o'clock; we can be there by one easily, and +reach Junin by morning. It will be perfectly safe to rest there. I +suppose your guards will be relieved about twelve o'clock?" + +"Yes, that was the time we heard them changed." + +"They will most likely discover that you have gone then. When they find +the four guards sound asleep, they are sure to unbolt the door and see +if you are there, then of course they will give the alarm at once. But +I hardly think they will even attempt to pursue. They are infantry, and +none of them are mounted but the officers, which means that at present +only Valdez himself has a horse. They would know that you had been +assisted, and that probably horses were waiting for you somewhere. +There is the hut, senors." + +Maria ran out as they came up. + +"The saints be praised," she exclaimed, "that you are with us again, +senors!" + +"The saints are no doubt to be praised," Harry said, "but we feel at +present a good deal more indebted to Dias and yourself than to them. We +are indeed grateful to you both, and you managed it splendidly. My +brother and I felt so confident that you would do something to get us +out, that we were not in the least surprised when we recognized you and +Diaz got up as travelling hawkers." + +"You did not tell them that we were with you?" + +"No. Fortunately they asked no questions at all, and took us for +Englishmen travelling by ourselves. They may have thought of it +afterwards, but in the hurry of carrying off their booty they +apparently gave the matter no attention. If they had done so they would +probably have sent a party out in pursuit of the mules. Even if they +had not done so, they would have been sure to look with some suspicion +at two hawkers arriving at such an out-of-the-way village at such a +time." + +"Well, we had better be moving at once," Dias said. "We are going down +to the village where they were captured, Maria. They hid their rifles +and pistols there when they found the place was in the hands of the +brigands." + +Three minutes later they started. There was a full moon, so they were +able to ride fast, and it was just midnight when they arrived at the +village. When they knocked at the house where their rifles had been +left, the proprietor looked out from the upper window in great dismay, +fearing that the brigands might have returned. However, as soon as he +recognized the party he came down and opened the door. The arms were +found where they had been hidden, and in five minutes they were again +on their way, and arrived at Junin at five o'clock. It was necessary to +wait here twenty-four hours to rest the animals. The next morning they +started as soon as it was light, and picked up Jose and the convoy. The +brothers mounted the two horses, and Dias and Maria rode on one mule, +and led three behind them. Jose rode another and led four. The horses +and the mule Dias had bought were sold at Oroya, and after purchasing +enough provisions for the rest of their journey they started for Lima, +having concluded that it would be better, now that they were on the +main track, to follow it instead of striking across the hills. + + + + +CHAPTER XIII + +LETTERS FROM HOME + + +There was some little discussion over the amount of supplies that it +would be necessary to purchase. + +"Travelling quietly, the journey will not occupy over fourteen days," +Harry said. "Do not get anything more than is absolutely necessary. It +is evident that the whole country is in a disturbed state, and it is as +well to have nothing to lose. We can buy nearly everything we want in +the way of meat and flour at villages we pass through. Therefore, if we +have enough tea, coffee, and sugar there will be really no occasion to +buy anything more. We have still two or three bottles of spirits left, +and you can buy pulque everywhere. There is a proverb two or three +thousand years old, 'The empty traveller can sing before the robber'. +We are reduced to that condition, except for our tents, bedding, and +blankets, and they have done good service and would not cost much to +replace. There remain, then, only the animals. They would certainly be +a serious loss to us." + +"Brigands would not want to take them. They would not be of the least +use to them in the mountains. I would not say the same of parties of +disbanded soldiers making their way down to Lima or Callao, who might +prefer riding to travelling all that distance." + +"The brigands might take our rifles and pistols, Dias." + +"Yes, they would be sure to do that, senor. But we have had more than +our share of bad luck already, what with the brigands in the Cerro +pass, and these rascals we have just had to do with. I will enquire +when the last silver convoy went down. If one has gone during the past +five or six days, we could overtake it soon, for we can do two days' +journey to its one. If no convoy has gone forward later, and there is +one starting shortly, it might be worth our while to wait for it, for +by all accounts the road down to Lima is infested by discharged +soldiers, and ruffians of all kinds from Callao and Lima." + +"Have the convoys an escort?" + +"Yes, senors. The silver mines have always a considerable force in +their pay. They used to have troops from the division stationed here, +but what with the constant revolutions, and the fact that more than +once the escort, instead of protecting the convoys, mutinied and seized +them, they found it better to raise a force themselves. They do not +take Creoles, preferring pure-bred Indians, who are just as brave as +the Creoles, if not braver, and can be relied upon to be faithful to +their trust. The consequence is that, in spite of the disturbed state +of the country, it is a long time now since one of their escorts has +been attacked, especially as the robbers would find great difficulty in +disposing of the silver, as each ingot is marked with the name of the +mine it comes from. + +"They might, of course, melt it up again; but even then there would be +a difficulty, as the law is very strict as to the sale of silver, and a +certificate has to be obtained from the local authorities in every +case, stating where it was obtained. This is hard upon the natives, for +many of the little mines are worked among the mountains, and the +rascals, to whom all official positions are given in reward for +services done to the party which happens to be in power for the time, +take good care to fleece the Indians heavily before they will give them +the necessary documents. Nothing can be done here, senors, without +greasing the palms of two or three people, and the grease has to be +pretty heavily laid on." + +Dias went out and made enquiries. "There will be no convoy for another +fortnight. One went down ten days ago." + +"I certainly shall not wait another fortnight, Dias. As to an escort, +less than a dozen men would be useless, and as they would be a +fortnight at least going down, and as much returning, even if you could +get twelve men who could be relied upon, it would be a very expensive +job. We might as well risk losing our baggage, and even our guns. The +great thing will be to reduce the weight as much as possible. Four +cotton beds take up a lot of space, and I think in any case I should +have bought new ones at Lima; at any rate they can go. The blankets and +ponchos we could, of course, carry behind us. So that practically there +are only the two tents, cooking utensils, and the stores, which will +not weigh many pounds, to carry, and with our clothes the whole will +make a ridiculously small load even for one mule. We had better get rid +of the pickaxes and shovels, they would fetch pretty nearly as much +here as we should give for new ones at Lima. + +"Thus, then, with Donna Maria riding one of the mules, there would be +our five selves and three led mules, of which only one would be laden. +That would offer no great temptation to plunderers; and as we shall all +have guns across our shoulders, they would see that it would not be +worth while to interfere on the very slight chance that the one laden +mule might be carrying anything valuable." + +"I agree with you, senor. Our appearance would be that of a party of +travellers who have been exploring the old ruins, or, as has been done +before, endeavouring to ascertain whether the rivers on the east are +navigable down to the Amazon. Besides, the bulk of the people here do +not forget what they owe to Englishmen, and the fact that you are of +that nation would in itself secure good treatment for you among all +except desperate men." + +Accordingly they started the next morning. Maria rode, in Amazon +fashion, on a mule between her husband and Harry. Bertie followed with +Jose, to whose saddle the three baggage mules were attached in single +file. They were undisturbed on their journey. Three or four times they +were hailed by men on the rocks above as they went through difficult +points of the pass. The reply of Dias, that the two gentlemen with him +were Englishmen who had been exploring the ruins and doing a little +shooting among the hills, generally satisfied them. One or two, +however, who enquired what the mule was carrying, were invited by him +to come down and see, though at the same time they were informed that +the load contained nothing but blankets and cooking vessels, and enough +provisions to last them on the way. + +When, within two days' journey from Lima, a party of rough men came +down into the road, Dias rode forward to meet them and repeated his +usual story. "You can examine the mule if you like," he said, "but I +warn you not to interfere with us; the English senors are not men to be +meddled with. They are armed with rifles, and each carries a brace of +double-barrelled pistols. They are dead shots, too, and you may reckon +that it will cost you over a dozen lives were you to interfere with +them. Moreover, the other muleteer and myself could give a fair account +of ourselves. Rather than have trouble, however, two of you can come +forward and see that my statement as to what the mule carries is +correct. Its burden would not fetch fifty dollars at Lima." + +Two of the men came forward and examined the mule's burden, and felt +the saddles of the others to see that nothing was concealed there. When +they rejoined their party one who appeared to be their leader came +forward. + +"Senors," he said, "I regret that we have stopped you; but we are poor +men, and are obliged to take to the road to live. Perhaps your honours +would not mind giving us ten dollars to buy food at the next village." + +[Illustration: THEY SAW APPROACHING A PEASANT WOMAN SITTING ON A MULE.] + +"I have not many dollars left," Harry said, "but if you really need +food you are welcome to ten of them, for we shall need nothing more +than what we carry till we arrive at Lima." He handed him the ten +dollars, and then, showing him his purse, said, "You see there are but +five others." + +With many thanks the man retired, and he and his companions took off +their hats as Harry and his party rode through them. + +"Another such stoppage," Harry said with a laugh, "and we shall have to +fall back upon our little stock of gold-dust." + +However, they met with no more trouble, and on the following evening +rode into Lima and took up their quarters at the hotel. Dias asked that +he might go on with the mules to his home. + +"In the first place, senor, we want to know how things have gone on in +our absence. We had arranged with neighbours to look after the garden +and the house. They were glad to do so, as the garden was a fruitful +one. They were to take all they could raise and keep it well planted, +so that whenever we might return we should find our usual supply of +fruits and vegetables. In the next place, Maria is nervous about my +staying here after what happened last time. We may take it as certain +that the friends of the men we hurt will take the chance of paying off +the score if they can find an opportunity. I shall come in each day to +see if you have any orders for me." + +"There will be no occasion for that, Dias. We have quite made up our +minds to wait here for a week before starting on our next expedition, +so if you will come over in four days that will be quite soon enough. +You can overhaul the blankets and bags, and see that those good enough +to keep are put in good repair, and those worn out replaced. We shall +want quite as many stores as those we took last time, for there are +very few villages except on the sea-shore, and we shall find difficulty +in replenishing our stock. We shall have to buy double-barrelled guns +in place of those we lost, but that we shall do ourselves. We have +plenty of ammunition and cartridges for the rifles and pistols, but we +had only a few shot cartridges left when we lost the guns." + +As soon as Dias had gone on with the mules Harry went to the British +consul's and found three letters waiting there for him, two from Miss +Fortescue and one from Mr. Barnett. He put the former into his pocket +to be read and enjoyed privately, but opened that of Mr. Barnett at +once. It was in answer to that Harry had written at Cuzco. + +"My dear Harry," he said, + +"Your first letter was quite satisfactory. I was glad to find that you +had reached Lima without encountering more than a stiffish gale, which +was as well as you could have expected. I was still more glad that you +had found Dias alive and willing to accompany you. Your letter from +Cuzco has now reached me. I think you were extremely lucky to get +through that street broil without any damage to either of you. It was +certainly a hazardous business to interfere in an affair of that kind +without having any weapons except the sticks you carried. Still, I can +well understand that, as you would certainly have lost the services of +Dias had you not done so, it was worth running a good deal of risk; +and, as you say, it had the natural effect of binding him to you heart +and soul. + +"I feel very uneasy about you both, and have blamed myself many a time +for suggesting this scheme to you. I can only say that it is really the +only possible way in which it seemed to me you could carry out the task +set you. In fairy stories it is, so far as I can remember, a not +uncommon thing for a king to set some task, that appears absolutely +hopeless, to the suitors for his daughter's hand, and the hero always +accomplishes the impossible. But this is always done with the +assistance of some good fairy, and unfortunately good fairies are not +to be met with in the present day. I have great faith in Dias, but fear +that he is a very poor substitute for a fairy godmother. Still, I am +convinced that he will do all in his power, and will even strain his +conscience severely, by conducting you to places where his traditions +lead him to believe that gold, either in the shape of mines or hidden +treasure, is to be found. + +"Your search will not improbably lead you into places where the Indians +have won back their own from the civilization introduced by the +Spaniards, and I have always heard that on the eastern side of the +Cordilleras the natives entertain a deadly hatred for whites, and +attack all who endeavour to penetrate into the forest. Don't be too +rash, lad. Remember that it will not add to your lady-love's happiness +to learn that you have been massacred in your attempt to carry out your +knight-errant adventure, and if you are careless about your own life, +don't forget that its loss will probably entail the loss of your +brother's also. Dangers, of course, you must meet and face, but +remember that prudence is a valuable aid to bravery. + +"I am glad to know that Dias has taken his wife with him. A woman is a +very useful adjunct to an expedition such as yours. Of course in some +ways she is necessarily a trouble, and always a responsibility. Still, +if, as you say is the case with her, she is a good cook, this makes a +wonderful difference in your comfort, and certainly adds to the chance +of your preserving your health. And in the next place, should you fall +ill, or be mauled by a tiger or puma, she will make a far better nurse +than Dias himself would be. Now that you are cutting yourself adrift +from civilization, I shall not expect to hear from you again for a long +time. I shall try and not be uneasy; but really, Harry, I do feel that +I have incurred a very heavy responsibility, and may, with the best +intentions in the world, have sent you and Bertie to your death. I +have, as you directed me, addressed this to the care of our consul, and +it must be many months before you receive it, many months more before I +again hear from you. Should you require more money, draw upon me. I +have always a good balance standing at the bank, therefore do not +hesitate to draw, in case the amount sent out to you quarterly does not +prove sufficient to carry out any scheme you may have in hand. + +"With all good wishes for your own and Bertie's welfare, + +"I remain, + +"Your affectionate guardian, + +"JAMES BARNETT." + +When he returned to the hotel he handed Mr. Barnett's letter to Bertie +to read, and said: + +"Stop down here in the patio, Bertie; I have two letters that I want to +read quietly." + +Bertie laughed. + +"All right, Harry; take your time over them; I won't disturb you." + +It was dusk now, and when Harry went to his room he lit a couple of +candles and seated himself in a large cane arm-chair and opened his +letters. + +The first one consisted chiefly of expressions of pleasure at his +arrival at Callao, of remarks upon the voyage, of complaints as to the +long time that had passed without news of him, and of assurances of +affection. + +The second was, like Mr. Barnett's, in reply to his letter from Cuzco. + +"My dearest Harry, + +"After reading your letter I have been more and more impressed with my +heartlessness in allowing you to undertake such a journey as you have +before you. I ought to have been braver. I ought to have refused +absolutely to allow you to go. The prospect of your being able to +overcome my father's objections really amounts to nothing, and I ought +to have said that I would not accept the sacrifice, and would not allow +you to run such risks; that it would be better and kinder for both of +us to accept the inevitable, and not enter upon such a struggle with +fate. + +"Do not think that I am already growing weary of waiting, and that my +heart is in any way changed. It is not that. It is anxiety about you, +and the feeling how wrong I was to let you go. Were there even a shadow +of chance of your success I would wait patiently for years. I do not +say that my life is a pleasant one. It is not. My father is still +bitterly angry with me for, as he says, throwing away my chances; that +is to say, of marrying a man I do not care for, simply because he is +rich. But I can bear that. Mother is very very good, and does all in +her power to cheer me; but, as you know, she has never been much more +than a cipher, accustomed always to submit to my father's will, and it +is wonderful to me that in our matter she has ventured, not openly to +oppose him, but to give me what strength and comfort she can. + +"I hardly know how I should have got on without her comfort. My father +hardly speaks to me. He treats me as if I had been convicted of some +deadly sin, and is only restrained from punishing me in some way +because, by some blunder or other, contumacy against the will of a +father has been omitted from the penal code. Seriously, Harry, it makes +me unhappy, not only for myself but for him. Until I was unable to give +in to him in this question he has always been the kindest of fathers. I +am sure he feels this estrangement between us almost as much as I do, +but believes that he is acting for my good; and it is a great pain to +him that I cannot see the matter in the same light as he does. Of +course to me it is most ridiculous that he should suppose that my +happiness depends upon having a title, and cutting a figure at court, +and that sort of thing; but there is no arguing over it, and I am as +thoroughly convinced that my view is the correct one as he is that it +is utter folly. + +"However, I am almost as sorry for him as for myself, and would do +almost anything short of giving you up to make him happy. However, do +not think that I am very miserable, because I am not. Somehow, though I +can't give any good reason for my belief, I do think you will succeed. +I do not say that I think for a moment you are likely to come home with +the sum my father named as necessary; that seems to be quite hopeless. +But I think somehow you may succeed in doing well; and though some +people might consider that he was justified in refusing his consent to +what he might think was a bad match, he could not do so with any +justice were I to determine upon marrying a gentleman with some +fortune. He thinks a great deal of public opinion, and would know that +even chat would be against him. But Indeed, Harry, I am beginning to +doubt whether in the end I shall be able to sacrifice my life to his +unfortunate mania, that I must marry what he calls well. I love you, +and told him that if at the end of two years you were not in a position +to claim my hand, I would give in to my father's wishes. I will keep my +promise so far, that I will not run away with you or marry you in +defiance of his command. But as I have agreed to wait for two years for +you, I may ask you to wait another two years for me. + +"When I think of you going through all sorts of dangers and hardships +for my sake, I feel that it would be downright wickedness to turn +against you if you find that you cannot perform an impossible task. +Instead of this separation making you less dear to me, it is affecting +me in quite the other way. My thoughts are always with you. How could +it be otherwise? I have worked myself up to such a pitch that I have +almost resolved that, when the two years are up, I will say to my +father: 'I shall ask Harry to release me from my promise to him, and +for two years, Father, I will go about and allow men a fair chance of +winning my love. If at the end of that time I have met no one to whom I +can give my heart, I will then go my own way, and if Harry will take me +I will marry him.' It will require a great deal of courage to say so; +but you are doing so much to try and win me, that it would be hard +indeed if I were to shrink from doing a little on my part. + +"Still, it would make it easier for me if you should have the good +fortune to bring home something; not because, as I have told you many +times, I should shrink for a moment from renouncing all the luxuries in +which I have been brought up, and for which I care so little, but +because it would, in his eyes, be a proof of how earnestly you have +striven to do what you could to meet his requirements. I did not mean +to say this when I began my letter, but it seems to me that it will +give you heart and strength in your work, and that you will see from it +that I, too, have taken my courage in my hand, and show you that your +love and faithfulness shall some day have the reward they deserve. + +"God bless you and keep you, dearest, + +"Your loving HILDA." + +Harry read the letter through again and again, and at last Bertie came +in. + +"What! at it still, Harry?" he said with a laugh. "You must have got +your letters by heart by this time. I have been sitting in the patio by +myself for two mortal hours expecting you to come down. At last I said +to myself, 'This sort of thing will bring on madness. When a healthy +sailor forgets that his brother is waiting for supper, to say nothing +of himself, it is clear that there is something radically wrong.'" + +"It is evident, Bertie, that at present you know nothing of human +nature. If there had been anything radically wrong in this letter I +should probably have been down long ago. It is just the contrary. Hilda +says that if I don't succeed here, she will give herself, or rather her +father, two years, and at the end of that time, if she doesn't find +someone she likes better, she will marry me, whether he likes it or +not--at least, that is what it comes to." + +"I congratulate you, old boy. At the same time, it is evident that she +would not have been worth her salt if she had arrived at any other +conclusion. Now, having settled that comfortably, let us go and have +something to eat. You appear to forget altogether that you have had +nothing since breakfast, and it is now past eight o'clock." + +"You boys think of nothing but eating," Harry grumbled. + +"Well, up till now, Harry, from the time we started, I have observed +that you have a very healthy appetite yourself, and I can tell you it +has cost me half a dollar in bribing the cook to stay on beyond his +usual hour. I did not like to tell him that you were engaged in reading +a love-letter fifty times, so I put it delicately and said that you +were engaged in business of importance. It went against my conscience +to tell such a buster." + +"There, come on, Bertie. I had begun to hope that you were growing into +a sensible fellow, but I am afraid that there is no chance of that now, +and that you will continue to be a donkey to the end of your life." + +Harry had told Dias that they had better take two or three days at home +before they came into Lima again, but to his surprise the muleteer came +in at ten o'clock next morning. + +"Well, Dias, I did not expect to see you again so soon. You have found +everything right at home, I hope?" + +"No, senor, I am sorry to say I did not. Three days after we left here +our house was burnt down." + +"Burnt down, Dias! I am sorry indeed to hear that. How did it happen? I +thought you said that you had locked it up, and left no one there." + +"That was so, senor. The people who took over the garden were to go +into the house once a week to see that everything was in order; but as +this fire broke out only three days after I left, they had not entered +it. Everyone says that it must have been fired on purpose, for the +flames seem to have burst out in all parts at once. No one in the town +thought that I had an enemy in the world, and all have been wondering +who could have had a grudge against me. Of course we need not go very +far to guess who was at the bottom of it." + +"I suppose not, Dias. It must have been those scoundrels we gave such a +thrashing to." + +"There is no doubt of that, senor. But this time they have got the best +of me, for they know very well that I have no proof against them, and +that it would be useless to lodge any complaint." + +"I am afraid it would, Dias. Is it quite burnt down?" + +"The walls are standing, senor. It takes a good deal to burn adobe." + +"What do you suppose it would cost to put it in the same condition as +before, with the furniture and everything?" + +"No great thing, senor; two hundred or two hundred and fifty dollars. +It would not be as much as that if it hadn't been that Maria had left +her festa dresses and her silver trinkets behind. There was not much +furniture in the house; but I think I could replace everything for +about two hundred dollars, and I have a good deal more than that laid +by." + +"I shall certainly make that up to you, Dias. It was entirely your +kindness in deciding to take us on Mr. Barnett's recommendation, and to +undertake this journey, that brought the ill-will of these scoundrels +upon you. Of course it is of no use doing anything now, but when our +search is over I shall certainly see that you are not in any way the +loser." + +"No, senor; if I could not replace it myself I might accept your kind +offer, but I can do it without breaking very heavily into my savings. +And indeed their attack on me was the outcome of an old grudge. I have +been long regarded as a fortunate man, and truly I have been so. If +there was a job for five mules, and I was disengaged, I always had the +first offer." + +"But that was not fortune, Dias; that was because you were known to be +wholly trustworthy." + +"There are few muleteers who are not so, senor; it is rarely indeed +that muleteers are false to their trust. I can scarce remember an +instance. We Indians have our faults, but we are honest." + +"Well, perhaps your getting the first job to go with foreign travellers +may have been a piece of good fortune, but it is because these were so +well satisfied with you that others engaged you. Trustworthiness is not +the only thing wanted in a muleteer; willingness, cheerfulness, and a +readiness to oblige are almost as important for the comfort of +travellers. Well, do you think these fellows will try and play you +another trick, Dias?" + +"I hope they will," Dias said savagely, "that is, if they don't have +too much odds against me. I owe them a big score now, for twice they +have got the better of me. I should like to get even with them." + +"Well, Dias, I hope they won't try anything of the sort. If anything +should happen to you, I should not only be extremely sorry for your +sake and your wife's, but it would destroy the last chance I have of +carrying out my search for treasure. Do you think that if I were to go +to the consul and lay a complaint against them, on the ground, in the +first place, of their attack on you, and now of burning your house, it +would have any effect?" + +"If you were to make a complaint it might do, senor; it certainly would +not were I to do so. A little bribe would, of course, be necessary; you +cannot do anything without that. The officials here are all Gamarra's +men, and there is not one of them who would not take a bribe. But would +it be worth while, as we are only going to stay here a week? And if you +got them imprisoned they would be out again before I came back, and +would be more anxious than ever to get rid of me." + +"There is a good deal in that, Dias. As, of course, we shall be away, +and starting for home again as soon as we return here, their spite +would be directed entirely against you." + +"I hope, senors, that while you stop here you will never go out without +your pistols. It is against you they have a grudge now more than me; it +was owing to you that they failed in killing me." + +"We will do so; and we won't carry sticks this time, so that if they +see us going along they will think we are unarmed." + +Whenever they went out after dark, indeed, Harry and Bertie had an idea +that they were followed, and on their way home each invariably carried +a cocked pistol in his pocket, ready for instant use. It was well that +they did so, for on returning late one evening from Senor Pasquez, four +men suddenly sprang out upon them. + +They were on their guard, and their arms went up in an instant, and two +shots were fired. As the pistols were almost touching the men's heads +when the trigger was pulled, both the assailants dropped dead, and the +others at once took to their heels. + +"There are two of Dias's enemies wiped out," Harry said quietly. "I +hope the others will give us a chance before we leave. Well, let us +walk on before the watch comes along. It would ruin our plans +altogether if we were kept here for an indefinite time while enquiries +are being made." + +The next morning they heard from their waiter at breakfast that two men +had been found dead in the street. + +"They are muleteers," he said, "but are known to be bad characters, and +are suspected of having been concerned in several murders. It is +evident that they made a mistake this time, and have got what they +deserved. They are known to be associated with others. There were five +of them; one was killed in a knife fight some months ago, and a search +has been made for the others, but it is not likely that they will be +caught. They were probably concerned in the affair, and knowing that +they would be suspected of having a hand in this, and that their +character will go against them, I expect they went off at once to the +foot of the hills, and won't be heard of again for some time to come." + +"I think it a pity they were not all shot. It is a shame that in a town +like this people cannot walk in the streets after dark without the risk +of being assassinated." + +Dias was very pleased when, on coming up that morning, he heard of what +had happened. He quite agreed that the other men would almost certainly +have taken to the mountains. + +"Even if they have not, senor, you are safe from another attack. Now +they know that you carry pistols, and are prepared for them, they will +let you alone." + +"When we come back here, Dias, we will give you a brace of our pistols, +and I trust you will carry them in your pocket ready for use after +dark, whether you are in Lima or at Miraflores." + +"Thank you, senor. I do not think they are likely to show their faces +here again for a long time; but at any rate I will be on my guard, and +will gratefully accept your offer of the pistols. Now, senors, I must +set to work to-day to get in our stores for the next journey. I have +made a list of what we shall want." + +"Well, I have plenty of money, Dias, for I find two remittances from +home awaiting me here. We have already bought two double-barrelled guns +and a stock of ammunition, principally buck-shot, for we shall not be +doing much big game shooting. We can always buy food at the sea-side +villages." + +Three days later all was in readiness. The mules were brought up from +Miraflores by Jose, accompanied by Maria, and an early start was made +on the following morning. + + + + +CHAPTER XIV + +THE CASTLE OF THE DEMONS + + +"To-morrow, senor," Dias said, "you will see the spot I was telling you +about, where, as the traditions say, the spirits of our ancestors +inhabit the ruins of a building so old, that it was ancient when the +Incas first came here. They are still there, and men who have been rash +enough to approach the spot have been found torn to pieces as if by +wild beasts; but none go near now." + +"Did the Spaniards never go there?" + +"I know not, sir; but 'tis likely they never even heard of it. The +country is all dry and barren, and there were no mines to tempt them. +The Indians never speak of it; those who were alive when the Spaniards +came had some reasons for not doing so; and even now you could go to +the nearest village, which lies more than twenty miles away, and ask +the people about it, but they would only say that they had never heard +of it, that no such place existed, for they believe that even to speak +of it would bring dire disaster. We Indians are Christians; the +Spaniards made us so. We make the sign of the cross, and we bow before +their images and pictures, and once a year we go to their churches; but +among the tribes east of the mountains that is all. We believe in the +traditions of our fathers and in the demons of the forest; and though +on this side of the hills, where the Spaniards held a tight grip upon +us, the people have well-nigh forgotten their old faith, they still +believe in many of the tales they have learned from their fathers, and +this of the Castle of the Demons, as it is called, is as strong as ever +in these parts." + +"Have you ever seen the castle, Dias?" + +"I have seen it, senor. There is only one point from which it is +visible. We shall go there to-morrow, it is ten miles from here. The +castle lies in a rift of the rock. I should say that in ancient times +this opened to the sea, but the building closed the entrance. Whatever +it may have been, it does not rise above the summit of the cliff, which +goes down as straight as a wall for miles on the sea-face. The rift on +the land side of the castle seems to have a width of about fifty feet, +and I could see openings which were, I suppose, windows. The rocks on +each side are higher than the castle itself, so that anyone coming +along would not see it until he looked down upon it." + +"But of course it is visible from the sea, Dias?" + +"It would have been visible in the old days without a doubt, senor, but +it cannot be seen now. The stones are the colour of the rocks beside +them. They are stained and broken, and unless a boat went along within +a very short distance none would dream that there was a break in the +cliff there. I heard that from a fisherman whose boat was driven in by +a gale and well-nigh lost. He said that he could see that the stones, +which are very large--much larger than any of those in the remains of +the buildings of the Incas--were not in regular lines." + +"It is very strange that anyone should have taken the trouble to build +a place in such a singular position. Is there not any legend as to its +construction?" + +"There is a tradition, senor, that it was built as a prison, by the +king of those times, a thousand years before the Spaniards came, and +even before the people whom the Incas conquered came into the land, and +that it was a place of imprisonment, some say of a wife, others of a +son, who had rebelled against him. Some say that it was built by the +demons, but as it happened long before our people came here, none can +know." + +"Well, Dias, it seems to me that this old place is very likely to have +been used as a hiding-place for treasure. As to these tales about +demons, of course they are ridiculous. I took your advice when we were +being opposed by fierce Indians, but when it is a question of demons, I +can trust to my revolvers and rifles against a legion of them." + +"Well, senor, you are the master. I have led you here as I promised. +There may be treasure here or there may not. If you will go, you must; +but I pray you not to command me to go with you. I would have followed +you to the death through the swamps and forests on the other side, but +I dare not risk being torn to death by demons and being left without +burial." + +"I do not press you to go, Dias. I respect your convictions, though I +do not share in them. I have had a year of travel with you, and we have +had many adventures together. This will be my last before I return +home. Here at least there seems to me a chance of finding treasure, an +infinitely better chance than any we have had, except in the gold +valley. Here is a mysterious castle, of whose very existence the +Spaniards seem never to have heard. It is just the place where treasure +might be hidden. If it has guardians, they must be human, and also +there can be but few. The urgent necessity for secrecy was so great, +that it must, like all the other secrets, have been confided to a few +only. Maybe but one or two old men are there, of whom certainly I need +not be afraid. I have told you why I came here, and why I feel so +anxious to find a valuable mine, or part of the lost treasures of the +Incas. So far I have failed altogether, and I should be a fool as well +as a coward were I not ready to run some slight risk in searching this +mysterious castle." + +"So be it, senor. I say not that you may not succeed. It may be that +the demons have no power over white men. If you go and return safely I +will go with you, and, should you find treasure, aid you to carry it +away. I will lead you to within two miles of it, and will wait three +days for your return. If you come not then, I will return to my place +and mourn for you." + +"Very well, Dias, you may count upon my return long before the three +days are up. Now, in the first place, take me to the point from which I +can have a view of the castle." + +"We have had a long journey to-day, senor, and it is two hours' journey +from here. We had better rest and go in the morning." + +Harry nodded. + +"We will be off early. You say it is ten miles from the spot where we +shall see it. If we start at daybreak I can be there before noon, which +will give me plenty of time for a first look round the place. We have +got some torches left. I shall want them, for possibly there may be +some chambers underground into which we shall have to penetrate. We may +take it as certain that, whether the old people hid a great treasure +from the Incas, or the Incas hid one from the Spaniards, they did not +leave it about in rooms, but stowed it away in vaults like those we saw +at Pachacamac, and these will certainly want a lot of looking for." + +"I will help you look, senor, and will work there as long as you like +in the search, if you return and tell me that you have seen and heard +nothing of the demons that are said to be there. I am not afraid of +danger when I know that it is men that we have to do with. But I dread +being strangled and torn, as the legends say that all who have ventured +here have been." + +"But according to your own account, Dias," Bertie laughed, "that was +long, long ago, and the demons may have got tired of guarding a place +that no one came near, and have gone elsewhere in search of victims." + +Dias shook his head gravely. In spite of his life as a muleteer, and +his acquaintance with Englishmen, he was as superstitious as the rest +of his countrymen. The nominal Christianity enforced by the Spaniards +upon the natives was but skin-deep, and thus they clung with undying +fidelity to the superstitions and traditions that had been handed down +from generation to generation, and had been preserved with a tenacity +that even the tortures of the Spaniards had failed to shake. The +failure to obtain the gold which they confidently expected to find in +the valley had still further strengthened his belief that it was +destined that these treasures should never be discovered; and although +when there he had listened gravely to Harry's explanations of the +manner in which the lake had been formed, his own conviction that all +this was the work of demons had been unshaken. If, then, a spot, which +even the tradition handed down to him had in no way connected with the +guardianship of demons, was so firmly watched, how much more must this +be so at a spot which all legends agreed was inhabited by demons, and +had been the scene of so many executions by them of those who had +ventured near. + +As Bertie and his brother sat together by the fire that evening after +the others had retired to rest, they talked long over the matter; for +just as when they had approached the gold valley, their excitement had +increased with every day's journey. Harry felt that this was his last +chance, his only hope of gaining the object for which he had left +England. + +"It is strange, Harry," Bertie said, "that the natives should believe +these absurd stories about demons. Dias seems, in every other way, as +sensible a fellow as one can want to meet, but in this respect he is as +bad as any of them." + +"It is not extraordinary, Bertie, if you remember that it is not so +very long ago since people at home believed in witches who sailed +through the air to take part in diabolic ceremonies, and brought about +the death of anyone by sticking pins into a little waxen image, and +that even now the peasantry in out-of-the-way parts of the country +still hold that some old women bewitch cows, and prevent milk turning +into butter however long they may continue churning. Fairy +superstitions have not quite disappeared, and the belief in ghosts is +very wide-spread. + +"When you think of that it is not surprising that these poor ignorant +natives still have implicit faith in the traditions of their ancestors. +It is possible that this old place is still inhabited by Indians, who +have been its guardians for ages, and if not now, may have had charge +of it long after the Spaniards came here, and murdered any who ventured +to approach the place. We know that the tradition of the gold valley +has been faithfully maintained in the family of Dias; this may also be +the case in the family to which the guardianship of this old place was +entrusted, but to my mind it is less likely. In the case of the gold +valley there was nothing for those in the secret to do but to hold +their tongues; but to supply guardians to this place from generation to +generation must have been a much more irksome task, and it may have +been abandoned, either from the dislike of those who had to spend their +lives in such a monotonous business, or by their families dying out. I +certainly don't want to have a fight with men who are only following +orders passed down to them for hundreds of years. If they attack us, we +shall have to fight; but I sincerely trust that we may find the place +deserted, for, fight or no fight, I mean to get the treasure if it is +there." + +"I should think so," Bertie agreed. "The treasure is absolutely of no +use to them, and may be no end of use to you." + +"To both of us, Bertie. If there is a treasure, you may be sure it is a +large one, ample for both of us, and to spare. Of course we shall have +trouble in getting it away--the gold would be invaluable to any of +these rascally adventurers who are a curse to Peru. I really want to +see the place, even putting aside the question of the treasure, for it +must have been extraordinarily well hidden if the Spaniards never came +upon it; and I think there can be no doubt whatever that in this +respect the traditions must be true. The whole thing would have been +upset if the Spaniards had once paid a visit there, for, from what we +saw at Pachacamac and Cuzco, they spared no exertions whatever to root +out likely hiding-places. The treasure, if there is one, will be +difficult to find, but I have got nearly a year yet, and if necessary I +will spend the whole of it in digging. Dias could go and get provisions +for us. Of course he must not always go to the same place. Sometimes he +can go up to Huaura, sometimes down to Chancay or Ancon. This place, he +has told me, lies a mile or two south of the Salinas promontory, which +would partly account for its escaping notice, for the road from Huaura, +as we see on the map, skirts the foot of the hill, and goes straight on +to Chancay and Ancon, and there is no earthly reason why anyone should +go out to the promontory. People here don't leave the roads and travel +eight or ten miles merely to look at the ocean, especially when by +following the straight line they would see it without trouble. Well, we +have both had hard work during the past year, what with felling trees +to make bridges, chopping logs for fires, making roads practicable by +moving rocks out of the way, occasionally using our picks where Dias +thought that there was a lode, and carrying mules' burdens up and down +steep places. + +"Altogether it has been a sort of backwoodsman's life, and if there are +treasure-vaults in this place I think we shall be able to get at them, +however thick and heavy the stones may be on the top of them." + +"I am game," Bertie said. "There is a lot more excitement in working +when possibly a treasure lies under your feet than in chopping away at +trees, some of which are so hard as almost to turn the edge of an axe. +The place cannot be very large, so it won't take us very long if we are +obliged to tear up every foot of it. I suppose there cannot be above +three feet of stone over the mouths of any of these vaults." + +"I think, Bertie, that when we have once investigated the place and +settled on our plans, we had better send Dias and Jose down to Callao +to get three or four kegs of powder and some boring tools, besides a +supply of provisions. We should get on a lot faster with these than +with only pickaxes. We shall want a couple of strong iron crowbars for +lifting slabs of stone, and of course some fuse for the mines." + +"We should have to be careful not to put too much powder in, so as not +to bring the whole thing down about our ears." + +"Oh, we should not want to make a mine of that sort, but only to blast +the stone as they do in quarries and mines. We should have to make a +hole to begin with, by means of our picks and crowbars, in one corner +of the room, two or three feet wide; then we must make a couple of +holes the size of the boring tool, a foot or so away, according to the +hardness of the ground, put in charges and fire them, and in that way +blow down the rock into the hole we had made; and so we should go on +until we had done the whole floor. Of course, the bigger the hole we +first make--that is to say, the wider the face it has--the easier we +shall blow the stone down afterwards. I have watched them blasting +stone at Portland, and at some galleries they were making at Gibraltar, +and I know pretty well how it is done. Of course it is hard work +driving the borers down, for that we shall want two or three sledges of +different weights. It will make our arms ache at first, but after a +week or two we shall be able to stick to it fairly well. Now we had +better turn in. We shall start at daybreak tomorrow. It will take us +two hours to reach the spot from which Dias said we could see the +place, and another three hours to get to the castle. That will give us +a long afternoon to take our first look over it." + +"There, senor," Dias said, when at eight o'clock in the morning they +stopped on a projecting spur of the hill, "that is the castle!" + +From where they stood they could see that the ground fell away into +what was at first a mere depression, but gradually deepened into a +valley half a mile wide. Still farther down the sides became more +precipitous, and in the distance the valley was closed in by rock +walls, and appeared to come to an end. That it did not do so was +evident from a streak of bright green in the centre of the valley, +showing that a small stream must run down it. From the point at which +they stood they could see the level line of the plateau near the cliff +facing the sea, and on the surface of this a dark zigzag line marked +the course of the ravine. Then, when apparently close to the +termination of the flat land by the cliffs, the dark streak widened out +somewhat. Through a small but powerful telescope which Harry carried he +could make out distinctly the upper part of what might be a house. + +"It is a strange-looking place for a castle to be built," he said, "but +it quite answers to your description, Dias. There are certainly some +openings, which may have been windows. I am sure no one looking from +here, and ignorant that such a place existed, would notice it, and of +course from the valley it could not be seen at all. Even from this +height I do not think I can see more than ten or twelve feet of the +upper part. But surely it must be noticeable to anyone coming along the +cliffs?" + +"It may be, senor, but I cannot say. Certainly no native would go along +there even in the daytime. Still, it does seem likely that in the +Spanish time some must have ridden along the top of the cliffs, and if +they had seen the castle it would certainly have been searched. +Assuredly it has not been so. I have been at Ancon and Salinas many +times, and have talked with the people there. They would never speak on +the subject to one of white blood, but knowing that I was of native +blood, and belonged to one of the families to whom the secret could be +strictly trusted, they were ready enough to talk about the Castle of +Demons. Had the Spaniards ever searched it they would have known, and +the place would no longer be feared; but all say that from the time of +the conquest by the Spaniards no living being has, as far as is known, +entered it." + +"Then the Incas knew of it, Dias?" + +"I think so, senor, though I have not heard that any of them ever lived +there; but tradition says that the vessel in which a great store of +treasure was sent away from Pachacamac, and which, as is proved by +Spanish writings, was never heard of afterwards, and doubtless was sunk +in a great storm that came on two or three days after it sailed, was +intended to be landed and hidden in this castle, which they thought +might well escape the observation of the Spaniards." + +"And even among your traditions there is no allusion to what became of +this treasure ship?" + +"No, senor; all traditions say that it was never heard of from the day +it sailed. Had it landed at that castle the secret would have been +handed down to some of the native families, just as that of the golden +valley and of other hidden treasures has been. But there can be no +doubt that the ship was lost with all her treasure." + +"Well, we need not talk any more about it now, Dias; we shall learn +nothing more, however long we stay here and stare at it." + +They stopped half an hour for breakfast and then rode down the valley. +When they got near the spot where it closed in Harry saw by the pallor +on the native's face that he was beginning to be greatly alarmed. + +"You had better stop here, Dias. My brother and I will go on and +explore this ravine and have a look at the place. We will take some +ropes with us, for the ravine may be blocked by falls of rocks, and we +may have to let ourselves down. Evidently the water gets to the sea, or +this valley would be a lake like that in the golden ravine, for +although it is but a mere driblet of water now, you can see by the +banks that a considerable amount comes down in the wet season. How it +gets past the castle I don't know; I can only suppose that there is a +passage for it underneath the building. We will take both our guns, +Bertie, and our pistols. That there are no demons we are quite sure, +but the place may have been used as a hiding-place for outlaws and +brigands, who could find no better spot, as there was no fear whatever +of its being discovered. We will take some bread and meat in our +haversacks and a flask of spirits. Perhaps we shall be away longer than +we expect, Dias, but at any rate we will not stop there after dark." + +Tears were in the Indian's eyes as Harry and Bertie said good-bye to +him and started, and when he saw them enter the ravine he sat down with +his elbows on his knees and cried unrestrainedly. His wife went up to +him and put her hand on his shoulder. + +"Do not sorrow, Dias; as for me, I have no fear, though I love them as +well as you do. I do not say that there may not be demons in the +castle--everyone says there are;--but though these may strangle our +people who break the orders that were given that none should go near, I +do not believe they can hurt our white friends. You saw that they had +no fear; you know how brave they are, and how they laughed at the idea +of the demons having any power over them. Do you think I could smile +and talk if I thought they were in danger? Still, as there is no need +to prepare dinner yet, I will tell my beads over and over again. We +shall know if any harm comes to them if we hear them fire their guns, +for it is certain that they would do so. Even if a legion of demons +attacked them they would never run away, but would fight till the last." + +"I love them," Dias said; "I love them as my own sons. At first, when +they came to me from Senor Barriett, it was for his sake that I +consented to accompany and aid them; but from that night when they +saved my life by rushing, with no weapons save their sticks, into the +midst of five men with drawn knives, I felt how noble they were, and I +loved them not only for the sake of my life, but for their bravery. +Since then my feelings have grown every day. Have they not treated us +as equals, as they would do people of their own race--us who, by every +Peruvian with white blood in his veins, are looked down upon?" + +"It is true, Dias. They have laughed and joked with us, and have +treated me with as much respect as if I had been of pure Spanish blood, +and have always done everything they could to make things easy for me. +I will not believe God and the Holy Virgin can permit them to be +overpowered by the evil ones. Should it be otherwise, should they never +return, I should be inconsolable. It would be to me as if you yourself +had died, and I should be ready to stab myself to the heart at the +thought that we had brought them here." + +"I could not live after it either, Maria; but, as you say, I will trust +that God will protect them." + +He cut down two rods and fastened them together in the form of a cross, +and then he and his wife knelt before it and repeated innumerable +paternosters and Ave Marias, crossing themselves as they did so. + +Jose, as soon as he had removed the burdens from the mules and turned +them out to graze at the edge of the streamlet, came and joined them in +their supplications, occasionally breaking off from the repetition of +the only prayers he knew, and in his native language imploring the +saints to protect their friends. + +"There is no humbug about Dias," Bertie said as they left the others. +"He is really in a blue funk." + +"Yes, he is quite in earnest; and we know that he is no coward in other +matters." + +"Certainly not. He showed any amount of pluck in the affair with the +Indians. But he seems such a bright, sensible sort of chap, that it is +quite funny to hear him going on about his demons. I should not be +surprised at anything the ordinary peasant might believe, but it is +different with a man like Dias." + +"You know, Bertie," Harry said, coming to a sudden stop, "I think we +are making a mistake going on into this ravine. I have no belief that +the place is inhabited; still, there may be desperadoes, and perhaps a +few fanatics. It is quite possible that a certain number of families +bound themselves to keep watch here, and formed a little community that +has lasted to the present day." + +"But how could they have lived?" + +"We will talk that over, Bertie, if we find any of them there. Now we +must turn back. It is not more than a mile at the outside to the place +where we can climb the hillside. In that way we shall be able to look +down into this ravine, and take a general view of the place. We shall +know what we are doing then, whereas if we were to go on through the +gorge without knowing anything about it, we might find ourselves caught +in a trap. It won't make half an hour's difference, for the ground up +there will be as good walking as it is here, while we might find all +sorts of obstacles in this ravine, and with two guns apiece, +ammunition, pistols, coils of rope, food, and so on, we should find it +awkward work climbing among heaps of rocks. + +"You were saying, How could a group of people exist here for centuries +without any communication with the outside world? Well, I don't suppose +they could. They might get water from the stream, and possibly there +may be some way of getting down to the sea-shore; anyhow, this stream +must find a passage when it is in flood. They might have been able to +get enough fish for their wants; but a fish-and-water diet would +scarcely be sufficient. + +"At the same time we are by no means sure that they could have had no +communication with the outside, for just as some families may have been +ordered to live here, others may have been instructed to supply them +with food. The watchers may have had a store of gold-dust sufficient to +last them all this time, and their friends outside may have brought +them a sheep or two, and corn and other articles of necessity once a +week. There could have been no difficulty in doing so. The stories of +demons, and probably the murder of inquisitive people who tried to pry +into what was going on, created such a dread of the place that those in +the secret would come and go without the slightest difficulty. +Conceivably, young men may from time to time have gone out for a year +into the world and brought back wives with them, or girls may have been +sent by the people in league with them outside, and obtained husbands, +which is less likely. I should think it was more probable that young +boys and girls would be kidnapped, and brought in here from time to +time. All this is pure guesswork, of course, but nevertheless there may +be people here, and it is just as well to take a look round from above +before we trust ourselves inside the place." + +On gaining the plateau they followed the crest of the valley until they +came to a spot where the ravine appeared to end. They found that in +fact it made a sharp turn. It was here only some ten feet wide, but +soon broadened out to thirty. Fifty yards farther there was another +sharp bend, the ravine narrowed to twenty feet, and the sides became +absolutely perpendicular. Twenty yards farther still they saw something +like a wall about thirty or forty feet high stretching across the +gorge, which was here some seventy feet deep. About twenty feet from +the foot there was a steep ascent of rocks, such as might have fallen +there by a slip from one side or the other. Above these a perpendicular +wall rose for another twenty-five feet. Harry and his brother looked at +it in surprise from the height at which they stood. Its appearance was +precisely that of the wall-precipices on each side. It was rough and +uneven, and they could see no signs of any joints. + +"It looks as if it were natural," Bertie said, "but it can't be." + +"No, it must certainly be artificial, but it is a wonderful imitation, +and certainly anyone coming up the ravine would suppose that bank of +rocks at the foot had fallen from its face; but we know that it can't +be that, for the water makes its way through. Besides, you see it is +only three feet wide at the top, and then there is a narrow ledge a +couple of feet wide, which was evidently made for the garrison to stand +upon and shoot their arrows at anyone attempting to come up the ravine. +Behind the slope is all rough rocks, except just below our feet, where +there is a narrow stone staircase of regularly-cut steps. It is so +narrow that it could not be noticed by anyone standing here, unless +they bent over to look straight down as I am doing. Well, it is just as +well that we made the circuit, for we certainly could not have climbed +over there." + +Another sharp turn, and the ravine ran straight towards the castle. +They hurried on, and when they had gone fifty yards stood at the edge +of a roughly circular pit. It was seventy or eighty feet across, +narrowing at each end. At one end was the ravine at whose mouth they +were standing, and directly opposite, in what might be called the neck +of the bottle, stood the Castle of the Demons. It was some fifty feet +in width, and as it stood back about forty feet up the neck it could +hardly be seen at any point except that at which they were standing. +There was no door or other opening at less than some twenty-five feet +from the ground. At that height was a broad aperture about four feet +high and twelve wide. Above this were several smaller openings about +four feet square. The singular point in the structure was a rough arch +of rock, which extended above it and formed its roof. This arch +projected thirty or forty feet in front of the building, so that the +latter had the appearance of standing in a great cave. + +"What an extraordinary-looking place!" Bertie said in a low voice. + +"Extraordinary, but how splendidly chosen for concealment! You see the +top of the rock above it is level with the ground on either side. This +would perfectly well account for people riding along the line of the +cliffs, and passing over without dreaming that there was a house below +them. Even if they went to the edge on this side, they would simply see +this deep pit and the ravine beyond, but could not by any possibility +obtain a sight of the house unless they came round to nearly where we +are standing, which they could have no possible motive for doing. +Besides, you see, all the way we have been passing through a thick +bush; and I have no doubt that in the old time a wood stood here, +possibly planted by the builders of the house. Of course the arch +existed before the house was built. The stratum below was probably +softer, and the stream gradually trickled through, and perhaps in some +great flood, when this basin was full, burst its way out, after which +the rock gradually fell until it formed that great natural arch." + +"Well, let us go round and have a look at the other side." + +They found that the width of the arch to the sea cliff was a hundred +and fifty feet. + +"If the castle extends to this face, Bertie, it is a hundred feet +across, but from here we can't see whether it does so. It is probably +built flush, however, as Dias said that it was not noticeable from the +sea, and had the arch projected beyond it it could certainly have been +seen." + +"Well, Harry, if you will tie a rope round my waist you can let me +down, and I will have a look at it. You can hold me easily enough if +you stand twenty feet back from the edge, and you won't have to pull me +up, because I can easily climb up the rope by myself. I need not go +down more than thirty or forty feet, and I can do that easily enough." + +"Oh, I could pull you up, Bertie." + +"Well, you could do that if by any chance I should get tired; then I +could give a shout, and you could haul on the rope." + +"There are lots of stumps of trees here, Bertie, and I can take half a +turn round one of them and so let you down easily; then when you shout +I will fasten the rope there and come to the edge, and I can hear +whether you want me to haul or not. Of course it must depend whether +there are any jagged rocks sticking out. If so, it would be better for +you to climb, as the rope might chafe against them if I pulled." + +"I understand." Bertie laid down his weapons and water-flask, made a +loop at the end of one of the ropes they had brought large enough for +him to sit in, then he looked for a spot where the short grass extended +to the very edge. "This is a good place, and the rope won't chafe as it +runs over that. Now I am ready. If you will go back to that stump +fifteen feet away and let it out gradually, I will be off." + +He knelt down, and putting the rope over his head took a firm hold of +it just above the loop, and then crawled backwards, his brother keeping +the rope taut. "Slack it out gradually now," Bertie said; "I am just +over." + +Directly afterwards his shoulders disappeared. Harry let the rope +slowly out until he calculated that fifty feet were over the cliff, +then he fastened it very securely round the stump and went forward to +the edge. + +"Are you all right, Bertie?" he shouted. + +"Quite right." + +The face of the rock was very even, and there was nothing for the rope +to chafe against. Harry lay down at the edge, keeping a firm hold of +the rope to prevent himself from slipping over, and was able to look +down on Bertie. + +"Well, Bertie, what is it?" + +"It is the wall of the house, I have no doubt, but it is so cleverly +built that I can scarcely see where the arch ends and the house begins. +Looking quite close I can see where the stones join, but their face has +been left rough; and as it is just the same colour as the rocks, and +lines have been cut down its face, and cracks made across it answering +to the lines in the rock on both sides, I am sure I should not have +known it was built up unless I had examined it. It is much narrower on +this side than on the other--not more than twenty-five feet, I should +say. There seem to be some irregularly-shaped holes in what looks like +a fissure in the middle. I suppose they are to light the rooms on this +side of the house, but they are certainly too small to be noticed from +the sea." + +"Does the sea come right up to the foot of the cliff?" + +It was a minute before the answer came. "The water comes to the foot, +but there is a line of rocks running along forty or fifty feet farther +out. Some of them seem to be thirty feet out of the water; at one end +they touch the cliff, and at the other there is a free passage. The +water is very clear, but as far as I can judge I should say there is a +depth of a fathom or a fathom and a half between the rocks and the +cliff. Certainly a boat could row in to a position underneath where I +am." + +"Is there anything more?" + +"No." + +"You don't see an entrance down here?" + +"No." + +"All right! Then you may as well come up again. Can you climb up?" + +"Easily." + +"Well, hail me if you want me to haul." + +Harry went back to the stump, unwound the rope until it was only half a +turn round it, and then, holding it firmly, stood ready to haul up. + + + + +CHAPTER XV + +INVESTIGATIONS + + +Harry was relieved when, a few minutes later, Bertie's head appeared +above the edge, and directly afterwards he crawled over. "My arms have +strengthened ever so much with our work. I could have done it before, +but it would have been hard work." + +"Well, so far so good, Bertie. There is no doubt that it is one of the +best hiding-places in the world, and I am not a bit surprised that the +Spaniards never found it. Now we will go back to the edge of the ravine +and have a good look from that side." + +As they went along he said, "Let us have a look at these bushes, +Bertie. The soil is very thin about here, and I wonder that the trees +grew." + +"These are pines," Bertie said, "and in the mountains we often saw +pines growing among rocks where there did not seem a handful of soil +for them." + +On examining they found several old stumps, and thrusting a ramrod down +Harry found, to his surprise, that the soil was from three to four feet +deep. He tried again a little farther off, and found that it was two +feet; further still, it was only one. + +"The tree must have stood in a hole in the rock," he said. "Try another +one, Bertie." The same results were obtained. "That explains it, Bert. +Evidently when they planted the trees to prevent this place from being +seen from the hills, they cut away the rock in circles about twelve +feet across and made cup-shaped holes, which they filled up with earth. +When they planted the young trees I dare say at first they watered +them. They could easily enough fetch water up from the stream. When the +trees got fairly rooted they would be able to leave them alone, perhaps +giving them a good watering once every two or three months. Whenever +the rains came they would be able to give up watering altogether, for +in these basins the earth would keep moist for a very long time. It +would be a big job, but no doubt the king who built the place had all +his tribe at work on it. It is probable that the Incas had established +themselves at Cuzco for many years before they came down to this place, +and the trees may not have been planted till their coming was first +heard of. In that case there would be plenty of time to hide the place +before they came down and searched the shore. We know that the Chimoos +resisted them for a considerable time before they were finally +conquered. Well, for whatever purpose this place was built it is one in +which either the Chimoos or the Incas, if they ever found the place, +would be likely to hide treasure, which is satisfactory. Now we will +sit down here for a short time and watch both windows. You look at the +two top lines, Bertie, and I will look at the two lower lines. I +certainly do not see any signs of life. That is how the water gets +out," and he pointed to a roughly-shaped arch about twelve feet wide +and as many high. Through this the little stream disappeared. "I expect +there is a similar passage at the other end." + +"There may have been," Bertie said. "I was hanging so close to the wall +that there may very well have been one without my being able to see it. +But it looks pitch-dark in there. If there were much of an opening we +ought to see the light, for, as we agreed, it can't be more than a +hundred feet long." + +[Illustration: HARRY DROPPED THE BARREL OF HIS RIFLE INTO THE PALM OF +HIS LEFT HAND.] + +"That is the first place we will investigate, Bertie. The question of +how we are to get into the house wants some thinking over. That lowest +window is a good twenty-five feet above the ground." + +"Of course if we had a grapnel we could fasten it to the end of a rope +and chuck it in." + +"We shall have to make something of that sort. If the window had been +on the other side instead of this it would have been easy enough, +because I could have lowered you and slipped down the rope afterwards, +but that arch sticking out so far on this side makes it impossible. All +that we can do now is, as far as I can see, to lower ourselves down on +to the top of that wall in the ravine, then go and examine the tunnel. +We have got plenty of rope to lower ourselves from here on to the wall." + +They watched the building for another twenty minutes. "I am convinced +that no one is there," Harry said. "I have not seen as much as a shadow +pass any of the windows since. If people did live in it they would +naturally be on this side of the house, because the rooms here are +better lighted and more cheerful, and no doubt they are the principal +rooms, as the house narrows so much at the other end." + +"Well, let us try it," Bertie said. "If there is a strong force here we +should only have to make a bolt back to that narrow staircase. We could +hold that against a whole tribe." + +They rose and walked along the edge of the ravine till they were above +the wall, then, fastening the rope to a stump, they slid down on to it. + +"So far so good," Harry said, as, holding their rifles in their hands, +they went down the steps. Then he suddenly stopped. "Hullo," he +exclaimed, "here are two skeletons!" + +They were not quite skeletons, for the bones were covered by a +parchment-like skin, and there were still remains of the short skirt +each had worn in life. A spear lay beside each. With difficulty the +brothers passed down without treading upon them. + +"They must have been here a long time, Harry," Bertie said when they +got to the bottom. + +"Any time," the other said. "In the dry air of these low lands there is +scarce any decay. You remember those mummies we saw. I believe iron or +steel will lie here for years without rusting. They may have been here +for a couple of hundred years or more." + +"I wonder what killed them, Harry?" + +"I have no idea. You see, one was lying almost on the other with his +arms round his body, as if he had died trying to lift him up. If they +had been shot by arrows they would still be sticking into them; if they +had been killed by people pursuing them they would probably be lying +upon their backs, for they would naturally have faced round at the last +moment to resist their pursuers, whereas there are no signs of injury. +This settles the point that there is no one in the house. Had it been +inhabited, the bodies would have been removed from the path, for it is +by this that people would go out and return. There may have been a +ladder down from the wall; the only other way they could have got out +would have been through that passage to the sea. A boat may have been +kept there; but even if that had been so, we should scarcely have found +those bodies on the steps. Well, we shall have plenty of time to talk +over that." + +They walked across the open space until they approached the building. +For a height of twenty feet it was constructed of stone, above that it +appeared to be made of the great adobe bricks which had been so largely +used at Pachacamac, and in others of the old ruins they had seen. + +"There is no question that it must have been built by the Chimoos or +some race before them," Harry said; "the Incas could have had no +possible reason for erecting such a place. Well, now for the tunnel." + +The little stream only occupied two feet of the passage. They were +therefore enabled to walk down dry-foot. + +"We ought to have brought a torch with us," Bertie said. + +"I don't think we shall want that; there is a sort of thin blue light, +the reflection of the light upon the water outside, though I don't know +why it should be so blue." + +The reason was soon manifest. The passage sloped downwards, and when +they had gone some fifty feet their progress was arrested by water +which appeared of a deep-blue colour. + +"That is it," Harry said. "You see the roof comes down into the water +twenty feet off, and the light has come up under it. They sloped this +passage to make the water flow out below the surface of the sea, so +that the opening could not be seen from without. By the light I should +not say that the opening is more than six inches under the water. I +don't know how the tides are, but if it is high tide now, the top of +the opening would be eighteen inches out of water at low tide, for, as +you know, the tide only rises about two feet on this coast. In that +case a boat would be able to come in and out at low tide, but of course +a man wanting to come in or go out could easily dive under at any time. +Well, that settles that point for the present. It was a clever plan; +any amount of water could flow out in flood time, and yet no one who +took the trouble to come behind that ledge of rocks we saw would have +any idea that there was an opening. I think now that we had better go +back, Bertie; in the first place because we can do nothing until we +have manufactured a grapnel of some sort, and in the next place because +every moment we delay will add to the anxiety of our friends in camp. +We must have been away three hours, I should say." + +They ascended the steps, fastened the short rope round a block at the +top of the wall across the ravine, and lowered themselves down. They +had to proceed with great care while making their way down the slope +composed of rough and jagged rocks, Once at the bottom of the ravine, +however, they walked briskly on. They had scarcely issued from the +entrance when they saw a stir in the camp in the distance and heard a +shout of delight, and then Dias dashed off to meet them at the top of +his speed. + +"Thanks to all the saints, senor, that you are safe! You do not know +how we have suffered. We have prayed ever since you started, all of us. +Once or twice I threw myself down in despair, but Maria chided me for +having so little faith in God to keep you from evil, and cheered me by +saying that had harm come to you we should assuredly have heard the +sound of your guns. Have you been in the castle?" + +"No, Dias, we have not been in--for the good reason that we could not +get in, because the only entrance is fully twenty-five feet from the +ground. We cannot enter until we have made some contrivance by which a +rope can be fixed there, or manufactured a ladder, which would be the +best way and save a lot of trouble, if we could get a couple of poles +long enough. We thought that we would come back when we had seen all +there was to be seen outside the place." + +The Indian's face fell. "Then you do not know what is in the house, +senor?" + +"No; but we are certain that there is no one there, and that probably +no one has been there for the past two hundred years, and perhaps a +good deal longer." + +"And the demons have not interfered with you?" + +"The demons knew better," Bertie laughed. + +"They may not be powerful in the daytime," Dias said in an awed tone. +"It is at night that they would be terrible." + +"Well, Dias," Bertie said, "everyone knows that the demons cannot +withstand the sign of the cross. All you have to do is to make a small +cross, hold it up in front of you and say, '_Vade retro, Satanas!_' and +they will fly howling away." + +"Seriously," Harry said, "you know it is all bosh about demons, Dias." + +"But the church exorcises evil spirits. I have seen a priest go with +candles and incense to a haunted house, and drive out the evil spirits +there." + +"That is to say, Dias, no spirits were ever seen there afterwards, and +we may be very certain that no spirits were ever seen there before, +though cowardly people might have fancied they saw them. However, +to-morrow we shall get inside, and Bertie and I will stop there all +night, and if we neither see nor hear anything of them you may be quite +sure that there are none there." + +"But the traditions say they have strangled many and torn them, senor; +their bodies have been found in the daytime and carried off." + +"It is quite possible that they were strangled and torn there, but you +may be sure that it was the work not of demons, but of the men who were +set to guard the place from intruders. Well, those men have gone. We +found two skeletons, which must have been there at least a hundred +years, perhaps a great deal more. They were lying on the stairs, the +only way of getting into the place, and they would have been removed +long ago if anyone had been passing in or out." + +By this time they had arrived at the camp. "I knew you would come back +all safe, senors," Donna Maria said triumphantly; "I told Dias so over +and over again. But what have you seen?" + +"I see something now--or rather I don't see something now that I should +like to see," Bertie laughed. "I thought you would have got a good +dinner ready for me, but I do not see any signs of its being even +begun." + +The woman laughed. "I have been too busy praying, senor, and have been +keeping up Dias's spirits. I never knew him faint-hearted before, and +it really almost frightened me; but I will set about getting dinner at +once." + +"No, no," Harry said; "we are really not hungry. We had a good meal +before we started. So do you three sit down and I will tell you all we +have seen." + +The three natives listened with intense interest. When he had done, +Maria clapped her hands. "It must be a wonderful place," she said. "I +wish I had gone with you, I will go to-morrow if you will take me." + +"Certainly we will take you, Maria; and I have no doubt that Dias will +go too." + +"I will go as far as the place," said Dias, "but I will not promise to +go in." + +"I won't press you, Dias. When we have slept there a night I have no +doubt you will become convinced that it is quite safe. And now about +the ladder. We shall really want two to be comfortable--one for getting +up to the window, that must be made of wood; the other, which will be +used for getting up and down the wall in the ravine, may be made of +ropes. But I think that that had best be hung from the top of the +ravine above it, so as to avoid having to climb over those rough stones +at the foot, which are really very awkward. One might very well twist +one's ankle among them." + +"I will go at once, senor, and get the poles," Dias said. "You may as +well come with me, Jose. We passed a wood in the valley about five +miles off; there we can cut down a couple of young trees. If we put the +saddles on two of the riding mules, when we have got the poles clear we +can fasten the ends to ropes and trail them behind us." + +"We shall also want some of the branches you cut off, Dias. You had +better say thirty lengths of about two feet long, so that we may place +the rungs nine inches apart. You had better get poles thirty feet long, +for we may not have just the height by a couple of feet." + +The two natives at once rode off, and the brothers set to work to +collect sticks for the fire. + +"It is too bad, senors, that this should not have been done while you +were away, but we thought of nothing but your danger." + +"You were perfectly right, Maria; if we were in peril, you did the best +thing of all to obtain help for us. As to the dinner, there is no hurry +whatever for it. What have you got to eat?" + +"There is nothing, senor, but a few of the fish we fried two days ago, +and the ham that we smoked of that bear." + +"I will take the line, then, and go down and try to catch some fresh +fish," Bertie said. "There is a good-sized pool about half-way between +here and the ravine. I might get some fish there." + +"I will take my gun, Bertie, and go up to the bushes by the ravine, and +see if I can get a bird or two. There is no other shelter anywhere +about here." + +In half an hour the lad brought a dozen fish into the camp. None of +them were above half a pound, but they were nearly of a size. + +"These will be very nice," the woman said with a smile as he handed +them to her. "I have thrown away the others. I do not think we dried +them enough; they were certainly going bad. I have heard your brother +fire several times, and as he does not often miss, I have no doubt he +will bring us something." + +Twenty minutes later Harry was seen coming along. When he arrived he +threw down a large bunch of wild pigeons. + +"There are ten brace," he said. "That will give us four apiece. I found +nothing in the bushes, but I suddenly remembered that when we went +across from the ravine to the house, lots of wild pigeons rose from the +sides of the rocks. We did not give them a thought at the time, our +attention being fixed upon the building. But when I got nothing above, +I suddenly remembered them, and concluded that they had their nests in +the crannies of the rocks. So I walked along to the top, and as I did +so numbers of them flew up. I shot a couple; most of the others soon +settled again, but some kept flying round and round, and in ten minutes +I got as many as I wanted. Then of course I had to go down into the +ravine by the rope and the steps to gather them up. I returned the way +we did, by the rope we had left hanging from the top of the wall." + +Maria was already at work on the birds. Taking them by the legs, she +dipped them for a minute into a pot of boiling water, and as she took +them out Bertie pulled off the feathers. Then she cut off the heads and +feet, cleaned them, and spitted them on Jose's ramrod, and, raking out +a line of embers from the fire, laid the ends of the ramrod on two +forked twigs while she attended to the fish. + +"But they will be done before the others arrive," Bertie said. + +"No, senor; there they come! They will be here in a quarter of an hour. +The cakes are ready and hot, so we will lay the pigeons on them, and +they will be nicely flavoured by the time that we have eaten the fish +and are ready for them." + +Dias and Jose soon arrived at a gallop, with the long poles trailing +behind them and a fagot of short sticks fastened to each saddle. + +"Those are capital poles, Dias," Harry said as he examined +them--"strong enough for anything. We will chop notches in them for the +rungs to lie in. There will be no fear then of their shifting, which +they might do if the lashings stretched. Now, we have got a capital +dinner just done to a turn, so you see we have not been lazy while you +were away. + +"You see," he said, after they had finished breakfast, "my shooting has +quite settled the point that no Indians are in the castle. If there had +been they would certainly have come to the windows to see who was +firing. I kept an eye on the castle between each shot, and saw no signs +of any movement. It is a capital thing that so many pigeons live among +the rocks. If we content ourselves with say five brace a day, they will +last us a long time, and will be a change from salt and dried meat, +which we should otherwise have to depend upon, for we cannot be sending +away for fresh meat two or three times a week. We can get fish, though +I don't suppose that will last very long, for the pool will soon be +fished out, and I don't think that there is water enough in other +places for fish of that size." + +"We can get them from the sea, Harry. We have got plenty of large hooks +and lines, which we used on the other side of the mountains. If any of +the window openings on that side are large enough, we can let down the +lines from there. If not, we can do it from the top where I went down." + +"I should not like that," Harry said. "One might slip on that short +grass." + +"Well, one could dive out through the passage and sit on that ledge of +rocks, and fish either inside them or in the sea outside." + +"Yes, we might do that, Bertie, and certainly it would be a first-rate +thing if we could get plenty of fish. It would keep us in good health +and make a nice change. I think to-morrow morning, Dias, we had better +fix our camp close up to the mouth of the ravine. Out here in the open +valley we can be seen from the hills, and if anyone caught sight of the +animals, it would very soon get talked about, and we should have a +party down here to see who we were and what we were about." + +"Yes, senor, that would be much better. I should not have liked to go +nearer this morning; but now that you have been there twice, and have +returned safely, I am ready to move." + +"It would certainly be better; besides, it would save us a couple of +miles' walk each time we wanted a meal. However, when we once set to +work I have no doubt we shall establish ourselves in the castle. Of +course one of us will come down morning and evening to see to the +animals." + +As soon as the meal was finished they set to work to make the ladder. A +short stick was cut as a guide to the space that was to be left between +the rungs. Bertie and Jose marked off the distances on the two poles, +and Dias and Harry with their axes cut the grooves in which the sticks +were to lie. Then the poles were laid a foot apart, and the work of +pressing the sticks into their places began. They agreed that the ropes +should not be cut up, as they would be wanted for fastening on the +loads whenever the mules went to fetch food or powder. Two of the +head-ropes were used on each side, and a firm job was made. + +"When you go, Dias, for the powder and so on, you must get another +supply of rope. We shall want a longer ladder than this in the ravine, +and also a rope to lift powder and firewood and so on into the castle, +and perhaps for other things that one does not think of at present. +Tomorrow we will unfasten the cord by which we descended to the wall, +as we shall not want to use that in future. I think to-morrow, when we +go to the castle, as you and Jose do not mean to accompany us, you +might take your axes and cut down a lot of those stumps among the +brushwood, split them up, and pitch them into the courtyard of the +castle. It would be well to lay in a good stock of firewood. We shall +want it for cooking and lighting of an evening. We have only one or two +torches left, and we shall want a cheerful fire." + +"I may go with you to-morrow, may I not?" Maria said. + +"Certainly you may, if you wish." + +"I should like to," she said. "In your company I sha'n't be a bit +afraid of demons; and I want to see the place." + +"That is right, Maria, and it shows at any rate that your curiosity is +stronger than your superstition." + +"If Maria goes I will go," Dias said. "I don't like it; but if she went +and I didn't I should never hear the last of it." + +"Very well," Harry said with a laugh, "I do think she would have the +better of you in the future if you didn't. So you see you will be both +conquering your superstitions--she, because her curiosity is greater; +you, because you are more afraid of her tongue than you are of the +demons." + +"A woman never forgets, senor; if she once has something to throw up in +a man's teeth it comes out whenever she is angry." + +"I suppose so, Dias. Bertie and I have had no experience that way, but +we will take your word for it." + +The next morning they moved the mules and all their belongings to the +extreme end of the valley. Then they had an early breakfast. Jose took +up his axe and the others their arms; the former turned back for the +point where he could climb the hill. Dias and Harry took the heavy end +of the ladder, Bertie the light one, and they started up the ravine. +Maria followed with a store of bread that she had baked the day before. +It was hard work carrying the ladder up the rocks at the foot of the +wall. When it was securely fastened there, they mounted and dragged it +up to them. + +When they came out into the open space there was a pause. "It is, as +you said, a strange place, senor." + +"It is, Dias, an extraordinary place; and if the people who built it +wanted, as I suppose they did, to avoid observation, they could not +have chosen a better. When those trees were growing it would have been +impossible to catch sight of them without coming down the ravine." + +"It looks very still," Dias said in a doubtful voice. + +"That is generally the case when a place is empty, Dias, Now let us go +on at once and get the ladder up." + +As soon as the ladder was in position Harry mounted, closely followed +by Bertie. Dias hesitated; but a merry laugh from his wife settled the +point, and he followed with an expression of grave determination on his +face. As soon as he was on the ladder his wife followed him with a +light step. + +As Harry reached the top, he found that the sill of the window was two +feet and a half above the floor of the apartment. He stepped down and +then looked round. The room occupied the whole width of the house, and +was some twenty feet wide. Four rows of pillars ran across it, +supporting the roof above. The ends of the room were in semi-darkness. +It was not above ten feet in height. There were rude carvings on the +pillars and the walls. + +By the time he had made these observations the others had joined him. +"I see people there," Dias said, in an awed voice, pointing to one end +of the room. Harry dropped the barrel of his rifle into the palm of his +left hand. After gazing two seconds he placed it on his shoulder, +saying, "There are people, Dias, but they won't do us any harm;" and he +walked in that direction. Two figures lay on the ground; four others +were in a sitting position, close to each other, against the end wall. +Some bows and arrows and spears lay near them. All were dressed in a +garment of rough cloth. Harry walked up to one and touched it on the +head with the muzzle of his gun. As he did so it crumbled away; the +bones rattled on the stone floor as they fell. Donna Maria gave a +little cry. + +"They are dead!" she exclaimed. "They must have been dead years and +years ago." + +"Two or three hundred, I should think. Your legends are evidently true, +Dias. There was a party left here to keep strangers from entering this +place. Now, before we go farther, let us think this out. We will sit +down on the ledge of the window. But before we do so, take a good look +at their arms and skulls, Dias. You have often been with travellers to +the ruins; let us hear what you say." + +Dias, who was now assured that he had only to deal with human beings, +examined them carefully, looking at the ornaments that still hung round +their necks, and then said: "They are not the old people, senor; these +were Incas." + +"That is an important point; now let us see how this is to be +explained. Now," he said, as they sat down, "it is clear that the Incas +did know this building. They may have discovered treasures here or they +may not; but it would certainly seem that they were as anxious as the +Chimoos had been to keep its existence a secret, and it is certain that +they must have had some interest in doing so. We have reason to believe +that the Spaniards at least did not know of it. There is no doubt +whatever that these men were not killed in fight; on the contrary, +their sitting position proves that they died quietly, and probably at +the same time. We see no signs of food; we may find some as we search +the place. If we do not, we must take it that they either died from an +outbreak of some epidemic or from hunger. And it is quite probable that +the two skeletons on the steps were two of their companions who were +going out to seek for food, and that they fell from weakness; one +clearly died in the act of trying to lift the other. What do you think +of that, Dias?" + +"I think that what you say is likely. But why should they have died +from hunger?" + +"It is probable that others were in the secret, and were in the habit +of bringing provisions to them, and perhaps of relieving them at +certain periods. We know that there were fierce battles in the early +times of the Spaniards. In one of these battles the whole of those who +were acquainted with the secret may have fallen. Or it may have been +earlier after the conquest had been completed, when the Spaniards drove +tens of thousands of men to work as slaves in the mines. The people +here may have remained at their post, hoping for relief until it was +too late. Two of the strongest may have started at last, but have been +too weak to climb the steps, and died there. Their comrades may have +never known their fate, but have sat down to die here, as you see. I +should think it probable that the second of my suggestions is likely to +be the right one, and that this did not take place until perhaps a +hundred years after the arrival of the Spaniards, otherwise those +legends of men who came near this place being killed would never have +been handed down. If all this is as I suggest, either the Incas knew +that the Chimoos had buried treasure here, or they themselves buried +some, although, as you say, there is no tradition of treasure having +been taken here. But it is possible that that treasure ship, which +undoubtedly sailed from some place along the coast and was never again +heard of, really came here; that her treasure was landed, and the +vessel then destroyed. In either case, there is strong reason for hope +that there is treasure somewhere in this castle if we can but find it." + +"We will find it," Bertie said confidently. "What you say must be true. +These Indians would never have been fools enough to sit here and die +without some good reason for it. Well, I vote that before we do +anything else we clear these bones out." + +"We can do that the first thing to-morrow morning, Bertie. We can't +just throw them out of the window. The bones are of men who died doing +their duty to their country. We will leave them as they are to-day, and +to-morrow we will bring up one of the big leather bags, place the bones +in it, and take them down into the valley and bury them." + +"Then you won't sleep here to-night, Harry?" + +"No; I have not a shadow of superstition, but I do not think it would +be lively here with those things at the end of the room. Now, let us +look about a bit. + +"This was evidently the great hall of the place; do you not think so, +Dias?" + +"Yes, senor; the house gets narrower as it nears the sea. This is by +far the best lighted room on this side. No doubt the rooms on this +floor were the abode of the chief who built it, and his principal +followers; the others would be above." + +"Well, we will light the two torches. Yes, there is no doubt that this +was the room. You see there are brackets against all the pillars for +holding torches. Before we go farther we will see what they are made +of." + +He took his knife out of his pocket and went up to one of the brackets, +which consisted of bars of metal an inch and a half square and eighteen +inches long. They widened out at the end, and here was a round hole +about two inches in diameter, evidently intended to put the torch in. +The metal was black with age. He scraped a few inches off one of them +with his knife. "Silver!" he exclaimed. "It would have been better if +they had been gold. But as there are four on each pillar, and twelve +pillars, they would make a tidy weight. That is a good beginning, +Bertie. If they are the same in all the rooms there would be several +tons of it." + +There was but one door to the room; through this they passed. Dias, now +that there was some explanation for what he considered the work of the +demons, had a more assured air. One passage led straight on; two others +ran parallel to the wall of the room they had left. + +"We will examine these first," Harry said. "It is likely enough they +lead to the stairs to the lower room. There must be two floors below +us, one above the level of the top of the tunnel, the other below that +must be divided in two by it." + +As they advanced into the passage there was a strange and sudden +clamour, a roaring sound mingled with sharp shrieks and strange little +piping squeaks. Maria ran back with a shriek of alarm, and there was a +strange rush overhead. The torches were both extinguished, and Harry +and his brother discharged their rifles almost at the same moment. Dias +burst into a shout of laughter as they both dropped their weapons and +swung their double-barrelled guns forward. "What on earth is it, Dias?" + +"It is bats and birds, senor. I have seen them come out of caves that +way many times. I dare say the place is full of bats. The birds would +only come into rooms where there is some light." + +Turning round they saw quite a cloud of bats flying out through the +door. + +"Confound it!" Harry said. "They have given me the worst fright I ever +had in my life." + +They went back to the room, they had left. Both Harry and Bertie had +lost every tinge of colour from their faces. + +"I am very glad, Harry," Bertie said, with an attempt at a laugh, "that +you were frightened. I was scared almost out of my life." + +Maria had thrown herself down on her face. + +"Ah, senors," Dias said triumphantly, "you thought they were demons!" + +"I did not think they were demons, Dias, but what they were I could not +tell you. I never heard any such sound before. I am not ashamed to say +that I did feel badly frightened. Now, see to your wife, Dias." + +"There is nothing to be afraid of, Maria. What are you lying there for?" + +The woman raised herself slightly. "Are you alive?" she said in a dazed +way. + +"Alive? of course I am! You don't suppose I am going to be frightened +at a lot of bats? There, look at them, they are still streaming out." + +"It is all right, Maria," Harry said. "You have had a fright; and so +have Bertie and I, so you need not be ashamed of yourself. It is all +very well for Dias to laugh, but he says he has seen such things +before." + +"If you were afraid, senor, I need not be ashamed that I was; I really +did think it was the demons." + +"There is no such thing, Maria; but it was as good an imitation of them +as you are ever likely to see." + +"I was in a horrible funk, Maria," Bertie said, "and I am only just +getting over it; I feel I am quite as pale as you. What are you looking +so pleased about, Dias?" he asked almost angrily. + +"I am pleased, senor, now I have got even with Maria. The first time +she says to me 'demons', I shall say to her 'bats'." + +"Now, let us start again," Harry said as they all laughed. "But instead +of going down, we will go upstairs. I have not pulled myself quite +together yet, and I don't suppose you have." + +"No, my knees are quite wobbling about, and if I saw anything, I +certainly could not aim straight just at present. And it's rum; we had +the main-mast struck by lightning off the Cape one voyage I made, and I +did not feel a bit like this." + +"I dare say not, Bertie. We all feel brave in dangers that we are +accustomed to; it is what we don't know that frightens us. We will sit +here on the window-sill for another five minutes before we move again. +Jose, you have got some pulque in your gourd, I suppose?" + +"Yes, senor." + +"Then we will all take a drink of it. I don't like the stuff, but just +at present I feel that it won't come amiss at all." + +Some of the spirit was poured into a tin mug they had with them, and +mixed with water, with which they had filled their water-bottles from +the stream before starting. + + + + +CHAPTER XVI + +THE SEARCH BEGINS + + +In a few minutes all were ready to go on again. Harry had asked Maria +if she would like to go down the ladder and wait till they returned. + +"No, senor, I should not like it at all. I don't care how full of bats +the rooms are, now that I know what they are. As for Dias, I have no +doubt that the first time he heard them he was just as frightened." + +"No, I was not; but I dare say I should have been if the man I was +with--I was then only about Jose's age--had not told me that the cavern +was full of bats. There was a great storm coming on, and he proposed +that we should take shelter there. We brought the mules into the mouth +of the cave, and he said, 'Now, we will light a torch and go in a bit +farther, and then you will be astonished. It is a bat cavern, and I +have no doubt there are thousands of them here. They won't hurt us, +though they may knock out our torch, and the noise they make is enough +to scare one out of one's senses, if one does not know what it is.' +Though I did know, I own I was frightened a bit; but since then I have +been into several such caves, so I knew in a moment what it was. I +ought to have warned the senors, for an old house like this, where +there is very little light, is just the place for them." + +"But there were birds too, Dias." + +"Yes, I expect they were nearer. Perhaps some of them were in the other +rooms, where they would be close to the openings. But they were +probably scared too by the noise of the bats, and as the windows behind +were too small for them all to fly out together, they made for the +light instead." + +"Well, now, let us start," Harry said, getting up. They again lit +their torches, and this time found everything perfectly quiet in the +passage. Two or three yards beyond the spot at which they had before +arrived they saw a staircase to the left. It was faintly lighted from +above, and, mounting it, they found themselves in a room extending over +the whole width and depth of the house. The roof at the eastern end was +not supported by pillars, but by walls three feet wide and seven or +eight feet apart. The first line of these was evidently over the wall +of the room they had left. There were four lines of similar supports +erected, they had no doubt, over the walls of rooms below. The light +from the four windows in front, and from an irregular opening at the +other end some three feet high and six inches wide, afforded sufficient +light for them to move about without difficulty. There were many signs +of human habitation here. Along the sides were the remains of mats, +which had apparently divided spaces six feet wide into small +apartments. Turning these over they found many trifles--arrow-heads, +bead-necklaces, fragments of pots, and even a child's doll. + +"I expect this is the room where the married troops lived and slept," +Harry said; "there is not much to see here." + +The two stories above were exactly similar, except that there were no +remains of dividing mats nor of female ornaments. They walked to the +narrow end. Here the opening for light was of a different shape from +those in the rooms below. It had apparently been originally of the same +shape, but had been altered. In the middle it was, like the others, +three feet high and six inches wide, but a foot from the bottom there +was a wide cut, a foot high and three feet wide. As they approached it +Dias gave an exclamation of surprise. Two skeletons lay below it. "They +must have been on watch here, senor, when they died," he said as they +came up to them. + +"It is a rum place to watch," Bertie said, "for you cannot see out." + +"You are right, Bertie, it is a curious hole." + +The wall was over two feet thick; all the other openings had been +driven straight through it, and, as they had noticed, were doubtless +made in the stones before they were placed there, for inside they were +cleanly cut, and it was only within three inches of the outer face that +the edges had been left rough. This opening was of quite a different +character. It sloped at a sharp angle, and no view of the open sea +could be obtained, but only one of the line of rocks at the foot of the +cliffs. It was roughly made, and by the marks of tools, probably of +hardened copper, it had evidently been cut from the inside. + +Harry stood looking for some time. "I cannot understand their cutting +the hole like this. It could not be noticed from the sea that there was +an opening at all; that is plain enough. But why make the hole at all +when you can see nothing from it? And yet a watch has been placed here, +while there was none at the other places where they could make out any +passing ship." + +"Perhaps," Bertie said, "it was done in order that if from the other +places boats were seen approaching, they could chuck big stones down +from here and sink any boat that might row inside the rocks into the +entrance to the passage, which, as this is in the middle of the room, +must be just under us." + +"In that case they would have kept a supply of big stones here. I have +no doubt whatever that it was made some time after the castle was +built, and I should say, judging by its unfinished state, the work was +done in haste. But what for, goodness only knows. Well now, having made +no discoveries whatever on the upper floor, we will go down. It is +certain that there can be no great treasure hidden under any of these +floors, there is not depth enough for hiding-places. I counted the +steps as we came upstairs, and there cannot be much more than two feet +between the floor of one room and the ceiling in the next. I fancy that +this is of single stones, each the flooring length of the space between +the half-walls. You see that there is a long beam of stone running on +the top of the dividing wall, and the ends of these stones appear to +rest on it. It is below that we must look for hiding-places." + +They descended to the first floor. They found that the space behind the +great room was divided into a number of chambers. All of these, with +the exception of the small one on the sea-face, were necessarily in +absolute darkness, and in all were brackets for torches, similar to +those in the principal chamber. Bertie counted them, and found that, +including those first met with, they numbered one hundred and +twenty-three. + +"How much do you think they weigh apiece?" he asked Harry when the tour +was finished. + +"I have not the slightest idea, Bertie. I should think about fifteen +pounds, but it may be five pounds less than that. They would certainly +give a very nasty knock on the head." + +"Oh, I was not thinking of knocks on the head. If there are a hundred +bars at fifteen pounds apiece, it is a big amount of silver; if they +are only ten pounds each--and really I think that is nearer the +mark--they weigh a thousand pounds. What is silver worth a pound?" + +"It varies. You can put it at five shillings an ounce; that would be +three pounds sterling for one of silver--three thousand pounds in a +rough calculation for the lot." + +"Well, that is not a bad beginning, Harry; it would pay all the +expenses and leave a couple of thousand over." + +Harry shrugged his shoulders. "A drop in the ocean as far as I am +concerned, Bertie. Still, it is a beginning; and you may be sure that +they did not take all this trouble to guard this castle for the sake of +three thousand pounds' worth of silver." + +They now went down to the next floor. Here there were two staircases, +and the space was divided into two parts by a wall along the centre. +There were no openings whatever for light. One half had evidently been +devoted to arms. Here still lay hundreds of spear-shafts, tens of +thousands of arrows, piles of hide shields, and caps of the same +material. + +"This store must have been larger than was required for the garrison of +the place," Harry said, "it must have been a reserve for re-arming a +whole tribe." + +Besides the arms there were great bales of rough cloth and piles of +skins, all in a marvellous state of preservation owing to the dryness +of the air. After thoroughly examining the room they went up the stairs +leading into it and descended those into the adjoining chamber. This +was divided into compartments by transverse walls four feet shorter +than the width, thereby leaving a passage through from end to end. Here +in confusion--for the most part turned inside out--were sacks of +matting and bags of leather. One of the compartments was filled with +great jars arranged in tiers. Some of the compartments were quite empty. + +"I think, senor, that these were stores of loose grain, probably maize. +I do not see a single grain left." + +They looked carefully round with the torches. "This carries out our +idea, Dias, that the people upstairs died of hunger. I have no doubt, +as you say, that the sacks did contain grain. If these had been cleared +in the ordinary way there would certainly remain a good deal loosely +scattered about. They might have been full or half-full at the time the +place was left as we found it. Possibly, instead of ten men, the +garrison may have been ten times as strong at first, but in the fifty +or hundred years before the last survivors died they may have dwindled +to a tenth of that number. However, it is plain that, as you say, the +store of food was not carried away, but was consumed to the last grain. +In the same way you can see, by the way the sacks and bags are tumbled +about and turned inside out, how careful was the search for any remnant +that might have been overlooked when they were first emptied. It all +points to starvation." + +Three of the largest divisions bore evident traces that at some time or +other, animals, probably llamas or vicunas, had been closely penned +there. Another had been occupied by a store of hay, some of which still +remained. When they had thoroughly examined this room, Harry looked at +his watch and said, "It is late in the afternoon--our torches are +nearly finished; however, there is time for a casual look round at the +cellars below. To-morrow we will begin a regular search there." + +They descended by the staircase to the basement. + +"How narrow this place is!" Bertie exclaimed. "It is not much more than +half the width of the room above." + +"Of course it is not; the two rooms above occupied the whole width of +the house, these only occupy the width between the passage and the +rock-wall on each side. You see, the tunnel is twelve feet wide, and we +may take it that these walls are at least three feet thick--it is not +as if they had been built of brick, or even of stones cut to shape. +They knew nothing of the arch, and, as you saw outside, this came up +nearly to a point. The stones were longer and longer with each course, +each projecting over the one below it, until, when they were within two +feet of joining, a very long slab was laid across them. The stones may +be three feet wide at the bottom and ten feet at the top, and you see +the wall extends over here in the same way--as of course it must have +done, otherwise the whole thing would have overbalanced and fallen in +before that slab at the top was added. So, you see, there is the width +of the tunnel, twelve feet, and the two walls, say six feet more, to be +taken off the fifty feet. So the cellars by the side of the passage can +only be about sixteen feet and a half at this end, which is what they +seem to be, and will go away to nothing at the other end, as we shall +see presently." + +The first thing they saw was a sunken tank in the floor. This was full +of water. It was about four feet square, and on sounding it with one of +the ramrods, they found it was about the same in depth, the water +coming to within a foot of the top. It was against the wall facing the +ravine. + +"This must have some connection with the stream. Otherwise it would +have been dry long ago." + +"We did not see any hole when we went down the passage," Bertie said. + +"No. Most likely a hole something like this was cut in the rock +outside, and a pipe driven to the bottom of this cistern. They would +only have to fill the one in the tunnel with cut blocks to within a +foot of the surface, and with smaller stones to the same level as the +bed of the stream; then the water in the cistern would always be level +with that outside. They put it in this end so as to be well out of +reach of the salt water farther in. They were no fools who built this +place. However closely they were besieged, and even if the enemy +occupied the space in front of the house, their water-supply was +secure." + +"But in time of floods, Harry, if the water rose a foot in the +passage--and we saw it did more than that--it would flood the whole of +this basement." + +"That is so, Bertie; but you may be sure that there was some provision +against that. They would have some valve that they could shut, or +possibly there was a block of wood covered with leather that they could +push into the pipe at the bottom of this cistern." + +Beyond a considerable store of firewood, in large and small blocks, +nothing could be seen in the chamber. + +"I expect these two places were used as prisons," Harry said, "though +in case a very large force were assembled some may have slept here. At +ordinary times the upper rooms would be quite sufficient. But you see +they had to build the whole height of the rocky arch, and they wanted +the entrance to the place to be so far above the ground-level that it +would be extremely difficult for an enemy to climb into it. A hostile +force could only have come in at that entrance, and a small body of +determined men might have held it against a host. These lower chambers +were simply cellars; the store-rooms were above them, and the habitable +part of the castle. Now let us look at the chamber on the other side; +no doubt we shall find it just like this." + +This proved to be the case. There were another cistern and more piles +of firewood, otherwise it was empty. After a short survey they returned +to the main chamber, bringing up with them two of the empty leather +bags. In these they placed the bones of the dead, the remains all +crumbling when touched, as the first skeleton had done. The bags were +lowered to the ground, and the four searchers descended and carried +them to the mouth of the ravine. In a spare bag which they brought with +them they placed the bones of the two skeletons on the steps, and then +carried them all out to the open valley. + +"We will bury them when we move the camp down here to-morrow morning," +Harry said. "We forgot the two up at that window. That is no matter, we +can throw them out to-morrow; they will lie as well at the bottom of +the sea as in the earth here." + +Not much was said as they returned to the castle. They had been a very +silent party all day. The gloom and darkness, the way in which their +voices echoed in the empty hall, had exercised a depressing effect on +them; and Donna Maria, generally the most talkative of the party, had +not quite recovered from the shock which the exit of the bats had given +her. It was not until she had cooked a meal, and they all sat down to +it, that they quite recovered their spirits. They had found Jose +awaiting their return. He had a blazing fire, having brought down as +much firewood as he could carry, and Dias had briefly told him the +result of their explorations. + +"Well, Harry, what do you think altogether?" Bertie asked after the +meal was over. + +"I think we ought to be very well satisfied," he replied. "Everything +has borne out the ideas we had. The castle may have been built as a +fortress by some great chief, certainly before the time of the Incas, +or it may have been used for a prison. The ornaments and things we +found showed that it was known to the Incas. They would have had no +occasion to use it when they were undisputed masters of the country, +but when the troubles came with the Spaniards a garrison was placed +here, and possibly some of their chiefs took refuge in the place. Then +came the time when all opposition to the invaders ceased, and only a +small body of men were left here to guard the secret, and the treasure +if there were any. Generations may have passed before the last of the +garrison died of hunger, and probably all others who were in the secret +fell in some insurrection or died in the mines. All this seems plain +enough, except that possibly there was no treasure. That left by the +Chimoos may have been discovered by the Incas. I should think it +extremely likely that the ship Dias mentioned as setting out with a +large amount of treasure was intended to land its stores here. + +"It may have done so, or it may have sunk at sea. I am inclined to +think that it was lost, because the traditions concerning these hidden +treasures seem to be extremely accurate; and yet, as Dias says, none +tell of any Inca treasure being concealed here. However, it is quite +possible that the treasure did come here and was landed, and that the +ship was then broken up, so that it might be supposed she was lost at +sea, and that this was kept so profound a secret by the men here, that +the news was never generally known even among the natives. So far our +search to-day has been successful, but I see that a hunt for the +treasure will be a very difficult one. Certainly in the upper chambers +there doesn't appear any possibility of such a hiding-place existing. +The whole space is accounted for. The walls are all of solid stone, and +have no special thickness. If the roofs had been arched there might be +empty spaces on each side of the spring of the arch, but they are +supported by pillars or walls, with only just space between the floors +for the beams of solid stone. Of course it is in the lowest room that +one would expect to find hiding-places like those we saw at +Pachacamac." He paused. + +"Well, why should they not be there, Harry?" + +"Because, as we saw, the floor is at most twelve inches above the +water-level. How is it possible that they could have constructed +chambers below that level, that is in the bed of a torrent? It is +probable that the solid rock lies many feet below the bed of the +stream. A portion of that great arch must from time to time have fallen +into it; and it may be that the river once ran forty or fifty feet +below its present level. In all the places that we have seen these +treasure chambers were formed in solid adobe foundations, as the +temples always stood on artificial terraces. With all our appliances at +the present time it would be next to impossible to sink in a stratum of +great rock fragments below the water level, and I do not believe that +the old people here could have done so even had it been a solid rock. +The difficulties of excavating chambers in it would have been enormous. +They could split rocks with the grain, and all the stone walls we have +seen were made of regular pieces, and evidently formed of stone so +split. They were able to give them a sort of facing with great labour, +but the tools they had were not made of material hard enough to work in +solid rock, and the labour of excavating such chambers would have been +stupendous. Therefore I am at a loss to imagine where any such chambers +can be in that castle." + +Dias nodded gravely. He had been with travellers who had done a great +deal of excavation, and he was able to understand Harry's argument. +Maria, who was listening attentively, also understood it. Jose simply +rolled cigarettes and smoked them. It was a matter for his elders, and +he did not even try to follow what Harry was saying. There was some +minutes' silence, and then Bertie said, "But the floors are all even." + +"What do you mean, Bertie?" Harry asked in a puzzled tone. + +"I mean, Harry, that they run straight along. There is no dip in them." + +"Of course there isn't. Who ever heard of building floors on the slope?" + +"Yes, that is what I mean. We know that the tunnel slopes down its own +height. It is twelve feet high at the entrance, and at the lower end it +is some inches below the level, so it falls twelve feet at least. At +the end where the cistern is, the floor of the basement is only a few +inches above the bottom of the passage; therefore at the other end it +must be twelve feet above the water-level." + +"You are right, Bertie!" Harry exclaimed. "What a fool I was not to +think of it! There must be a space underneath it a hundred feet long, +sloping from nothing down to twelve feet. There is room for a dozen +chambers such as those we saw on each side of the tunnel. Well done, +Bertie! you have given me fresh hope. It would be a splendid +hiding-place, for any searchers who came down and saw the water in the +cistern would believe at once that, as neither the Chimoos nor the +Incas could have known how to build under water, there was no use in +searching for hidden chambers under this floor. You see, neither of +them had any knowledge of cement or mortar. All their bricks and stones +are laid without anything of the sort; and whatever amount of labour +was available no chamber could be made under water, for as fast as +holes were dug the water would come in, and even if they could line it +with stone-work the water would penetrate through the cracks. Now, +Dias, that we see with certainty where we have to dig, we can make our +preparations. I will write down a list of the things we decided the +other day we should want:--Six kegs of powder, two hundred feet of +fuse, four boring-tools, six steel wedges, the smallest smith's fire +you can buy--for we shall have to sharpen the tools,--six borers, a +large bundle of torches, four sledge-hammers--we have enough pickaxes +and shovels,--and another fifty fathoms, that is a hundred yards, of +rope. I don't know anything else that we shall want in the mining way. + +"You and your wife had better settle what provisions you must get. We +shall certainly need a good supply of flour--a couple of sacks, I +should think--tea, coffee, and sugar, dried or salted meat. And you +might get a supply of smoked fish. I have no doubt that we shall catch +fresh fish here in the sea, but we shall all be too busy to spend much +time on that. You had better get three or four gallons of pulque; one +cannot be always drinking coffee. We have still got a good stock of +whisky and brandy. Your wife will certainly want a good supply of red +pepper and other things for her stews. It would not be a bad thing to +have a couple of crates of poultry. Don't pack them too closely, or +half of them will be smothered before you get them here. Dead meat +would be of no use, for it won't keep in this heat. We can turn them +all out in the courtyard in front of the castle, and they can pick up +their living there among the lower slopes of the cliffs. We can give +them a few handfuls of grain a day. Don't get too many cocks, and let +the hens be young ones. They ought to supply us with plenty of eggs and +some broods of chickens. You must calculate what the weight will be, +and take the mules accordingly." + +"Very well, senor. I need not be away more than three days at most. It +is only about twenty miles to Ancon." + +"You might take the two llamas down with you and sell them there. They +have done good work, and I should not like to kill and eat them. So +mind you sell them to someone who wants them for carriage work. We +shall not require them any more for that purpose. Will you want to take +Jose with you?" + +"I think not, senor, for I should say that four baggage mules will be +ample, and I can lead them myself; and certainly you will find Jose +useful here." + +Dias and his wife then withdrew a short distance from the fire, and +engaged in an animated conversation as to the things she required. + +"Don't stint matters," Harry said, raising his voice. "We may be here +for the next two or three months, and the less frequently you have to +go down to buy things the better. It would be easy to account for your +first purchases by saying that you were going on an expedition to the +mountains, but you could not go to the place with the same story again." + +"There are other places I can go to, senor; but I will get a good store +of everything this time." + +Dias started at daybreak with four mules and the two llamas. The others +rolled up the tent-beds and the remaining stores, loaded up the other +mules, and moved down to the mouth of the ravine. Here they pitched the +little tents again. + +"They will form a central point for the mules to come to," Harry said. +"We will leave the sacks of maize here, but give the animals a good +feed now. They will be sure to keep close to the spot. All the other +things we will carry into the castle; but before we start we will bury +these bags of bones." + +When this was done, and the saddles taken off and piled together +against the rocks, the other things were made up in portable packets, +and they started up the ravine. They made three journeys before +everything was brought to the foot of the ladder leading up to the +window. Then the two brothers mounted, and hauled the things up with a +rope which Jose, who remained below, fastened to them. When the last +was up he went to the foot of the rock and brought several armfuls of +the wood he had thrown down on the previous day. This was also hauled +up. + +"You had better fetch some more, Jose. We mean to keep a big fire +burning here night and day; it will make the place cheerful. I will +have a fire also burning where we are at work below. Now, senora, we +will rig up some blankets on a line between the pillars at the end of +the room opposite to that in which we found the skeletons, so as to +make a special apartment for you and Dias. We will spread our beds at +night near the fire." + +The screen was soon made. A cord was run from the wall to the pillar +next to it, some five feet above the floor, and three blankets were +sufficient to fill the space. + +Harry was about to make another line from the pillar, when Maria said: + +"I would rather not, senor; I am not a bit afraid. This screen is quite +large enough, and it will be more cheerful not to be shut up +altogether, as then, when I am lying down, I can see the reflection of +the fire on the walls, and it will be much more cheerful." + +Then a blazing fire was lit. The wood was almost as dry as tinder, and +burnt without smoke. It was built almost touching the back wall, in +which, some five feet above the fire, Harry with a pick made a hole +four inches deep. + +While he was doing this, Jose went down and cut a sapling four inches +in diameter, growing in a cleft on the rock, and from this cut off two +six-foot lengths and brought them up. One end of the thickest of these +was driven into the hole and tightly wedged in there, the other end was +lashed securely to an upright beam. + +"There, Maria," he said when it was finished, "you will be able to hang +your pots and kettles from that at any height you like above the fire. +Now, you can set to work as soon as you like, to get breakfast for us. +We have been at work for four or five hours, and have good appetites." + +"I have the cakes ready to bake, senor, and I sha'n't be long before I +get an olla ready for you." + +"Well, Jose, what do you think of the place?" Harry asked. + +"I should like it better if it were not so big," the lad said. "I shall +want a broom, senor, to sweep out the dust." + +"It is three inches deep," Maria said. + +"I should not bother about that, Maria; it would be a tremendous job to +sweep such a big room, and the dust is so fine that it would settle +again and cover everything. Besides, it will be a good deal softer to +lay our beds on than the stones would be, so I think you had better let +it remain as it is, especially as you are fond of going about without +your shoes. I think I will rig up a blanket against the doorway. It +will make the place look a good deal more snug, and will keep the bats +from returning." + +"I am not afraid of the bats, now I know what they are; but I should be +constantly expecting them to rush out again." + +"I expect a good many went back last night," Harry said. "We won't put +the blankets up till after dark. They are sure to come out again; then, +as soon as they have gone, we will close it, and they won't be able to +get in when they come back before daybreak." + +Harry's expectations were fulfilled. At dusk a stream of bats rushed +out again, but this time quite noiselessly. The rush lasted for three +or four minutes. As soon as they had gone, the blankets were hung up, +and fastened across the doorway. + +"They will be puzzled when they come back." + +"Yes, senor," Maria said; "but when they find that they can't get in +here, they will come in through the openings above." + +"So they will; I did not think of that. But when they once find that +they cannot get out here in the evening, they will go out where they +came in, and we shall have no more trouble with them. I don't know +whether they are good to eat?" + +Maria gave a little cry of horror. + +"Oh, senor! I could not eat such horrible things!" + +"Their appearance is against them, Maria; but when people eat +alligators, frogs, snakes, and even rats, I don't see why a bat should +be bad. However, we won't touch them unless we are threatened by +starvation." + +"I should indeed be starving before I could touch bats' flesh, senor." + +"Well," Harry said, "if people eat monkeys, rats, and squirrels--and it +seems to me that a bat is something of a mixture of the three--one +might certainly eat bats, and if we are driven to it I should not mind +trying; but I promise you that I won't ask you to cook them." + +They chatted for another hour, and then Maria went off to her corner. +The brothers spread their beds by the fire, and Jose had his blanket +and poncho, and it was arranged that any of them who woke should put +fresh logs on the fire. + +They were all roused just before dawn by a squeaking and twittering +noise. They threw on fresh logs, and as these blazed up they could see +a cloud of bats flying overhead. They kept on going to the doorway, and +when they found they could not get through they retired with angry +squeaks. The light was gradually breaking, and in a few minutes all had +flown out through the opening. Harry and his brother followed them, and +could see them flitting about the upper windows. Presently, as if by a +common impulse, they poured in through the various openings. + +"I don't suppose we shall see any more of them," Harry said, "and I own +that I shall be glad. There is something very weird in their noiseless +flitting about, and in the shadows the fire casts on the ceiling." + +"They are a great deal larger than any bats I have seen," Bertie said. + +"I have seen as large, or larger, at Bombay and some of the towns on +the coast." + +"They bite people's toes when they are asleep, don't they?" + +"Yes, the great vampire bat does, but I have never heard of any others +doing so. They live on insects, and some of them are, I believe, +vegetarian." + +"Are vampire bats found here?" + +"I do not think so; I fancy that they inhabit Java and other islands in +the Malay Archipelago. However, they are certainly rare, wherever they +come from, and you can dismiss them altogether from your mind." + +"I was glad when I heard your voices, senors," Maria said when she +appeared a quarter of an hour later. "I knew they would not hurt me; +but I was horribly frightened, and wrapped myself up in my blanket and +lay there till I heard you talking, and I heard the logs thrown on the +fire; then I felt that it was all right." + +"I don't suppose they will come again, Maria." + +After drinking a cup of coffee, with a small piece of maize cake, +Bertie said: + +"What is the programme for to-day?" + +"We can't do much till Dias comes back. We may as well go down and have +a look at the lower rooms. I don't think there is much dust on the +floor there, but while Jose is away looking after the mules we will cut +enough bushes to make a couple of brooms. We shall want the place swept +as clean as possible, so that we can look about, but I don't think +there is the least chance of our being able to move the stones. Before +we do anything we will go down to the pool and have a swim, and dive +out through the entrance and have a look at those rocks." + +"That is right," Bertie said. "I was longing for one yesterday morning, +but of course the first thing to be done was to examine this place." + +"Would it be safe for me to bathe, senor?" + +"Quite safe, Maria; the slope is very gradual, and you need have no +fear of getting out of your depth suddenly. We will be off at once, +Bertie." + + + + +CHAPTER XVII + +AT WORK + + +Harry and his brother went to the edge of the pool, where they +undressed and waded out. They found that the bottom of the passage +sloped more gradually at the edge of the water than it did higher up, +and they were able to walk out till they came to the point where the +roof dipped into the water. They dived, and in a few strokes came up +beyond the roof. + +"This is glorious!" Bertie said. "We have often bathed in pools, but +this is a different thing altogether. It is more than a year since we +had our last dip in the sea, the day we arrived at Callao." + +Although there was little or no wind, the rollers were breaking on the +line of rocks outside, pouring over the lower points in volumes of +foam, and coming in broken waves up the passage. + +"We mustn't go beyond the point, Bertie, or we may be dashed against +the foot of the cliff. We will climb up that rock to the left; it is +not too steep, and I think we can manage it. From there we shall get a +good view of this side of the house and of the situation in general." + +It required considerable care to climb the rocks, and more than once +they hurt their feet on sharp projections. The top of the rock, +however, was smooth by the action of time and sea, and they were able +to sit down on it in comfort. + +"The castle is just as you described it, Bertie; and certainly no one +sailing past, however close he came outside these rocks, would be able +to detect it. No doubt the stone of which it is built is the same as +that of the cliffs. Most likely it was taken from the ravine where the +passage now is, and had fallen from the arch above. It might have been +more noticeable at first, but now it is weathered into exactly the same +tint as the cliffs. The openings are very dodgily placed, and a +stranger would not dream that they went many inches in. Now, from where +we stand we can look up into that curious opening on the top story. I +have been puzzling over that ever since I saw it, but can't think of +any possible reason for its having been cut like that, except to enable +them to throw stones on to any boat that came into this passage behind +the rocks; and yet that can hardly have been the case, for, as I +remarked, there are no stones piled up there. Certainly they had a very +large number of arrows, but stones would be very much more useful than +arrows against a boat almost under their feet. However, that does not +concern us now. This line of rocks must greatly aid in hiding the house +from the sea. They are higher than you thought they were, looking down +at them from above. We are quite thirty feet above the water, and at +two or three points they are at least ten or twelve feet higher. Of +course a short way out no one would be able to see that they were +detached from the cliff, or that there was any passage whatever behind +them. + +"Besides, they break the force of the waves. If it was not for them it +would be impossible for any boat to come up close to the face of the +house, and a heavy storm might even break down the wall altogether. A +tremendous sea would roll in here in a westerly gale; and if it hadn't +been for these rocks it would have been necessary to build the lower +part of the house absolutely solid to resist the sea. It is possible +that the rocks were higher than they now are when the place was first +constructed, in which case the house might have been almost entirely +hidden from sight. Well, we may as well go back again, Bertie; we know +all there is to be known about this side." + +They swam back into the tunnel, dressed, and went out. + +"We have come out, Maria," Bertie called. "The coast is clear for you. +The water is not so deep as we thought it was, and you can walk out to +the point where the roof comes down on to the water without getting out +of your depth." + +It did not take them long to cut a number of switches to serve as +brooms, and a couple of handles. They carried them up into the house, +and lashed the switches firmly on to the handles. The work was rough, +but the brooms when completed were large, and, although not strong +enough for heavy work, would do well to sweep aside the thin layer of +almost impalpable dust on the floor below. + +"Shall we take wood down there, Harry?" + +"No; I think a fire would be a drawback rather than an assistance. It +would be very valuable if we were working at one spot, but it could +give no general light in a place a hundred feet long. We will take a +torch down, and hold it and sweep by turns. We shall only want, to +begin with, to make a clear path a couple of feet wide down the middle. +Of course later on we shall clear it all. That will be sufficient to +enable us to see how the floor is constructed, whether with big blocks +or small ones, how closely they are fitted together, and so on. It is +certainly unlikely that we shall find any indication as to where +chambers exist." + +It took but a very short time to clear the path; the dust was so light +that one sweep of the broom cleared it away. When they got to the +farther end they returned to examine the floor. For four or five feet +from the cistern the rock had been evidently untouched, except to cut +off any projecting points. Then there was a clear line running across +the path. Bertie held the torch down close to it. Harry knelt down and +examined it. + +"This is a clean cut, Bertie. It is evidently solid above this, but the +stone is not quite the same colour on each side of it, and it looks as +if they had cut away the rock here and begun to build so as to keep the +floor level. The cut may be six inches deep and it may be a foot, that +doesn't matter. The face of this stone is very smooth, but it is not +cut; it is, I think, the face of the natural fracture. Move the torch +along and let us see where the next join is. Ah, here it is!" + +The slab was four feet across. + +"You had better sweep the dust off both ways, Bertie, so that we may +see what size it is." + +It was, they found, about eight feet long. + +"It has straight edges, Harry, almost as straight as if it had been +sawn." + +"Very likely it was sawn, Bertie; They could have had no tools that +would cut a hard stone like this regularly, but as they were certainly +clever builders they must have employed some means to do it. Possibly +they used a saw without teeth, for however much they might have +hardened the copper, the teeth could not have stood, but if they had a +hard copper band fixed like the saw some masons use, and kept the stone +moistened with fine sand, they might have cut into it. Of course it +would have been a slow process; but they would not have needed to go +far into the stone, for when they got down two or three inches they +might have broken it through by dropping a heavy weight on the end. It +would not have mattered if the fracture had not been straight below the +cut, for only on the surface would they have wanted to fit accurately +to the next stone. In another way they might have got a straight edge, +that is, by driving very dry wedges into the cut made by the saw, and +then moistening them. I know that great stones can be split in that +way. They may have used both methods. However, it doesn't matter to us +much how they did it. It is clear that they could in some way or other +cut stones. As they took the trouble to do so here, we may conclude +that they were anxious to have a smooth floor that would be extremely +difficult to get up. + +"They would never have taken all this trouble if they had merely been +making a floor for a cellar. For that purpose it would only have been +necessary to throw rocks and stones of all sizes into the vacant space +below, and when it was nearly full, to level it with small stones and +sand. That they chose to undertake such tremendous labour as the making +of so regular a floor as this must have been, shows that they had some +very strong motive for doing so." + +Going carefully along the track they had cleared, they found that the +stones were of different sizes; some were but two feet wide, others as +much as ten, but all fitted so closely together that it was difficult +to see the joints. + +"It is going to be a hard job to get these out, Bertie," Harry said, +when they had completed their examination, "and it is lucky for us that +the room gradually narrows from sixteen feet wide to two at the other +end, and when we stepped it we made it eighty feet long. We need not +take up the stones near the rock wall, for the ravine would naturally +narrow as it went lower, and the depth would be greatest by the side of +the wall of the tunnel." + +"Well, we shall soon blow up the stones when we have got the powder." + +"I hope so, Bertie; but I see that we shall have difficulty unless +these top stones are extraordinarily thick." + +Bertie looked surprised. "Why, I should have thought the thicker they +were the more difficult to break up." + +"Beyond a certain point that would be so. But suppose they are six +inches thick, you may take it for granted that underneath there will be +rubble, loose stuff, except where any chambers may be built. If we were +to bore a hole through this top layer the powder, instead of splitting +the stones up, would expend its force among the loose stuff beneath it; +and besides, instead of remaining in its place, it might get scattered, +and we would then get no explosion at all." + +"Then we should only have to make the hole four inches deep, Harry?" + +"As a result of which there would only be two inches of tamping over +the powder, and this would blow right out, as if from a little mortar, +and would have no effect whatever upon the stone. I have no doubt that +we shall find some way to get over these difficulties, but it is +evident that the work will not be all clear sailing." + +"Of course we shall manage it somehow, Harry, even if we have to smash +up all the stones with the sledge-hammers Dias will bring us." + +"Is breakfast nearly ready, senora? That swim in the sea has given us a +prodigious appetite. Did you enjoy it?" + +Maria nodded. + +"It is very nice, senor; but I should have liked it better if the water +had not been so blue. It seems so strange bathing in blue water." + +"You will soon get accustomed to it," Bertie laughed. "There are no +pools except that one two miles up the valley. Besides, it is much +nicer to have a great bathing chamber all to yourself. Here comes Jose!" + +"Well, Jose, are the mules all right?" he shouted. + +"Yes, but I had difficulty in catching them. They had evidently been +frightened by something, and were three miles up the valley with their +coats all staring. It must have been either a puma or a jaguar. Of +course they must have got wind of him in time; but as, fortunately, +they were not tethered, they were able to get away from him." + +"I should think he must be up somewhere among the bushes, Jose," Harry +said. "We had better go down tonight and see if he returns again. We +shall be losing some of the mules if we don't put a stop to his +marauding. Besides, it will be very dangerous for you, Jose, cutting the +wood up there, if he is lurking somewhere. It is fortunate that you +escaped yesterday." + +"I expect he was on the other side of the ravine, senor; and even if he +had not been, the sound of the chopping would have scared him. They +will not often attack in the daytime." + +When they had finished their breakfast Jose asked what he should do +next. + +"There is nothing else to do, so it would be as well to take our +pickaxes and get some of those brackets out of the walls. We will begin +with the other rooms of this floor and leave these here till the last." + +"I will come and hold a torch for you, senors," Maria said. "I like to +be doing something. I will wash up first, and then I shall have nothing +to do till it is time to get ready for dinner. Now I know there is a +savage beast about I should not like to go down the ladder." + +"There is very little chance of his coming down the rocks," Harry said. +"He is more likely to be lying somewhere on the other side watching the +mules." + +No move was made until the woman was ready to start. Then they lit two +torches. She took one and Bertie the other, while Jose and Harry took +two picks. It was hard work, for the brackets were driven far into the +pillars and walls. It was necessary to knock away the stones round them +to a depth of two or three inches before they could be got out. They +worked one at each side of a bracket, relieving each other by turns, +and after four hours' work only eighteen brackets had been got out. As +far as they could tell by lifting them, the weight was somewhat greater +than they had at first supposed. Harry could hold one out in each hand +for a minute and a half, Bertie and Jose for a little over half a +minute, and they agreed that they must be about twenty pounds each. + +By this time their shoulders ached, and it was agreed that they had +done a good day's work. For the rest of the day they did nothing but +sit on the sill of the window and smoke quietly. The next day's work +was similar, and twenty more brackets were got out. Late in the +afternoon they saw Dias coming down the steps, and at once went down +the ladder to meet him. + +"Have you got everything, Dias?" + +"I think so, senor, and I can tell you that the mules have had a pretty +heavy load to bring back." + +"Well, we will go with you at once, Dias, and bring some of the things +up. I expect you have had nothing to eat since the morning. Before you +do anything else you had better go in. Your wife has been keeping a +dish hot for you, as she did not know when you might arrive." + +"I shall not be long before I come and help you, senor. I have +unsaddled the mules and turned them out to graze." + +"It is just as well, Dias, for there is a beast somewhere about that +gave them a fright last night. We will get all the eatables up +to-night, the powder and drills and hammers we can very well leave till +to-morrow morning." + +It took them four trips to bring the provisions over, for it required +two of them to carry each sack of flour, and indeed all had to give +their aid in getting them up the rocky slope at the foot of the wall. + +"No one seemed to think it unusual, your taking so large a load, I +hope, Dias?" Harry said as they sat down to their evening meal. + +"No, senor. The man I bought the powder of was a little surprised at +the amount I wanted; but I said that I might be absent many weeks in +the mountains, and might want to drive a level in any lode that I might +discover. I led him to believe that I had seen a spot in the mountains +that gave good indications, and that two of my comrades were waiting +there for my return to begin work at it. I sold the llamas to a man who +carries goods from Ancon up to Canta, and got the same price that you +gave for them." + +Harry then told him the work on which he had been engaged since he had +been away. + +"Of course there is no hurry about the brackets, but as we could do +nothing else without the powder and drills, it was just as well to get +them out, as otherwise we might have been delayed when we had done our +other work. We think that they weigh twenty pounds each, so that +altogether they will be worth nearly four thousand pounds. Not a bad +start. I am afraid we sha'n't make such quick work down below." + +"We shall see," Dias said cheerfully, for now that his fear of the +demons had passed he was as eager as Harry himself to begin the search +for the treasure. + +"Has Maria seen any more bats?" + +"Yes, she has seen some more bats," his wife said, "but no demons. +Dias, what do you think? Don Harry suggested that we might eat the +bats." + +"I have heard of their being eaten," Dias said, "and a man who ate them +raw told me that he had never enjoyed anything more. But I should not +like to try it myself, unless I were driven to it as he was." + +"How was that, Dias?" + +"He was a muleteer, senor, and was up in the mountains. He had a cargo +of silver on his mule, and during the day he had seen some men who he +doubted not were brigands on the top of the ravine he passed through. +He knew of a cavern where he had once taken refuge with the animals +during a storm. It lay on the hillside some twenty or thirty yards away +from the road. The entrance was hidden by bushes, and he had first +noticed it by seeing a bear come out as he was passing along. He had +his pistols, and thought that it was better to risk meeting a bear than +a brigand. He arrived opposite the cave just as it became dark, and at +once led the mules up there. He first lighted a torch--the muleteers +always carry these with them--and then went in with his pistols ready, +but there were no signs of a bear anywhere near the entrance. + +"He drove the mules in and put out his torch. The entrance had been +only wide enough for the laden animals to pass, but it widened out a +great deal inside. He took off the loads, piled them up in the narrow +part to make a barricade, and then sat down at the entrance and +listened. He soon heard five or six men come down the road talking. +They were walking fast, and one was saying that he could not be more +than half a mile ahead, and that they should soon catch him. When they +had gone, he went some distance in the cave and relighted his torch. He +went on and on. The cave was a very large one, and when he had gone, as +he thought, four or five hundred yards, it branched off into three. He +took the middle one, and followed it for a long way. At last it opened +into a large chamber from which there were several passages. Here he +found a large number of things that had evidently been stolen from +muleteers. There were at least a dozen mule loads of silver; goods of +all kinds that had been brought up from the coast; the ashes of fires, +and a great many bones and skins of llamas, and some sacks of flour. + +"He thought he would now return to the mules; but apparently he entered +the wrong passage, for he went on till he felt sure he ought to be in +the chamber where he had left the animals, and he was turning to go +back when he tripped over a stone and fell, and his torch went out. +Then he felt in his pocket for his box of matches, and to his horror +found that it had gone. It must have dropped out when he was examining +the passages. He did not think much of it at first, but he had passed +several openings on his way, and in the dark he probably turned down +one of these. At any rate he lost his way somehow, and wandered about, +he thinks, for hours; but it might have been much less, for he told me +that he quite lost his head. At last he came out into a place where he +could only feel the rock on one side of him, and knew that he must be +in a large chamber. + +"Looking up he saw, to his joy, a faint light, and moving a little, +caught sight of a star. He was utterly worn out, and threw himself +down. He was awakened by a strange rustling sound, and looking up saw +that daylight was breaking, and that a stream of bats was pouring in +through a hole, which was about three feet wide. He made several +efforts to climb up to it, but failed. The bats hung thickly from every +projecting point in the rocks. He hurt himself badly in one of the +attempts to get up, and twisted his foot. All day he lay there. Then +the idea struck him that he would kill a bat, cut it open, and use it +as a poultice to his foot. The creatures did not move when he touched +them, and he cut off the head of one of them and split it open. He did +this three or four times during the day, and felt that the application +was easing the pain of his ankle. + +"When it became dusk the bats flew out again, and he knew his only +chance was to keep his ankle perfectly rested. In the morning he killed +some more bats. He was by this time tortured with thirst, and sucked +the blood of one of them, and in the afternoon ate one raw. Another +night passed, and in the morning he felt so much better that he could +make another trial. He ate another bat to give him strength, and in the +middle of the day made a fresh attempt. He had while lying there +carefully examined the wall of rock, at the top of which was the +opening, and had made up his mind at what point would be best to try. +This time he succeeded. He made his way down the hillside, and found +that he was a quarter of a mile higher up the pass than the spot at +which he had left the mules. He hobbled down, and to his delight found +his animals still in the cavern. + +"He had when he first got there opened their sack of grain in order to +ensure their keeping quiet. There was still some remaining at the +bottom. He lost no time in loading them and leading them out, and made +his way down the pass without seeing anything of the robbers. +Afterwards he went back there with a good supply of torches, found his +way to the cave, and brought down two mule-loads of silver. Gradually +he brought the rest of the goods down, and today he is a rich man." + +"Well, I think under those circumstances, Dias, I would have eaten bats +myself. It was certainly a clever idea of his to convert them into +poultices, though the general opinion is that cold bandages are the +best for a sprained ankle." + +Then they discussed their plans for the next day. "I know nothing about +blasting, senor. You give me instructions, and I will do my best to +carry them out; but it is useless for me to talk of what I know nothing +about." + +"There is a lot of common sense in that, and yet in every work, Dias, +sometimes while a skilled man is puzzling how to do a thing a looker-on +will suggest a satisfactory plan. That treasure has been buried there I +have no doubt whatever. They would never have gone to the labour of +paving those cellars as carefully as they have done unless for some +special purpose. The floor was undoubtedly made when the house was +built, and if we find treasure-chambers there they will be those of the +old people. Of course they may have been discovered by the Incas, and +when they in turn wanted to bury treasure this place might occur to +them as being particularly well fitted to escape search by Spaniards. +However, to-morrow we shall learn something more about them. The first +thing to do in the morning, when we have brought up the rest of the +goods, is to sweep the floors of those chambers carefully. When we have +done that we will determine where to set to work." + +Two trips brought up the powder and instruments. + +"We will take one of the kegs of powder down with us," said Harry, "and +leave the other five in the empty room behind this. It is just as well +not to have them in this room; the sparks fly about, and some things +might catch fire. I don't think there is any real danger, but, at the +same time, it is best to be on the safe side." + +"There are a dozen pounds of candles in this bundle, senor. You did not +tell me to get them, but I thought they might be useful." + +"Thank you, Dias! they certainly will be useful. What are +they?--tallow?" + +"Yes, senor." + +"Then before we go down we will get a couple of pieces of flat wood, +and drive a peg into each, sharpened at the upper end. Candles stuck on +these will stand upright, and we can put them down close to where we +are working. They will give a better light than a torch, and leave us +all free to use the tools. Did you think of buying some more tinder?" + +"Yes, senor, I have five boxes, and half a dozen more flints." + +They carried the keg of powder, the sledges, drills, and wedges +downstairs, and then Dias and Jose set to work to sweep out the two +chambers. The work was easy, but they were obliged to stop several +times, being almost choked with the light dust. Harry and Bertie +offered to take their turn, but the others would not hear of it, and +they were glad to go up to what they called their drawing-room until +the work was done and the dust had settled a little. Then they examined +the pavement carefully with their torches. They had hoped that they +might find either copper rings, or at least holes where rings had been +fastened, but there were no signs whatever of such things in either of +the chambers. + +"We will begin to work half-way down," Harry said. "Of course the +treasure may lie near the cistern end, but the depth below the floor +would be very shallow there. More likely the chambers would be at the +deep end. If we begin in the middle we may be pretty sure that we have +not passed them. We will begin rather nearer the passage wall than the +other, as the depth there will be greater. It does not matter which +stone we take, one is as likely as another. Step ten paces from the +cistern, Bertie, and the stone you stop on we will try first." + +When Bertie came to a stand-still they carefully examined the pavement. +"You are standing on one of the cracks, Bertie; I will stay there while +you all bring the tools along." + +"Shall I open the powder?" Bertie asked. + +"No. It is no good doing that until we have quite decided what we are +going to do. The wedges certainly won't go into this crack. I think our +best plan will be to sink a bore-hole about two inches from the crack. +We will drive it in in a slanting direction towards the edge, and in +that way it will have more chance of blowing a piece out. First of all, +we must make a slight indentation with a pick, otherwise we sha'n't get +the bore to work. I will begin." + +He took a pick and struck several blows. + +"It is very hard stone," he said. "I have scarcely made a mark upon it." + +He worked for some time, and then let Bertie take the pick. The lad +struck a blow with all his strength, and then dropped the pick with a +loud cry, wringing his hands as he did so. + +"You have jarred your hands, Bertie; you should not hold the haft so +tightly." + +"It did sting!" Bertie said. "I feel as if I had taken hold of a +red-hot poker. It has jarred my arm up to the shoulder; I can't go on +at present." + +"You try, Dias." + +Dias went more carefully to work, knelt down on one knee, and proceeded +to give a number of what seemed light blows. + +"That is better than I did, Dias. The stone is crumbling into dust, and +we shall be able to use the borer in a short time. Perhaps it will be +better after all to drive the hole down straight. It will be easier to +begin with; when we see how thick the stone is we shall know better how +to proceed." + +In ten minutes Dias had made a hole a quarter of an inch deep. + +"Now, give me one of the borers--that one about two and a half feet +long. I will hold it, and you strike to begin with, Dias, only mind my +fingers. Keep your eye fixed on the top of the borer, and take one or +two gentle strokes to begin with; then, when you know the distance you +have to stand from it, do your best. You needn't really be afraid of +striking my fingers. I shall hold the drill at least a foot from the +top." + +Dias began very carefully, gradually adding to the strength of the +blows as he got the right distance, and was soon striking hard. After +each blow Harry turned the borer a slight distance round. When he heard +the native's breath coming fast he told Jose to take a turn. The lad +was nervous; the first blow he struck only grazed the top of the borer, +and narrowly missed Harry's fingers. Jose dropped the sledge. "I can't +do it, senor; I am afraid of hitting your fingers. I will sit down and +hold it; it does not matter if you hit me." + +"It would matter a good deal, Jose. No, no; you have got to learn." + +"Would it not be well, senor," Dias said, "to take the borers and three +hammers outside, and try them in soft ground? We could work them there +till we all got accustomed always to hit them fair. There would be no +occasion for them to be held, and we should get confident. I could have +hit twice as hard as I did, if I hadn't been afraid of missing it." + +"I think that is a very good plan, Dias. The loss of a day or two will +make no difference. We shall make up for it afterwards." + +Accordingly the drills and hammers were all taken up, and they were +soon at work. Two or three gentle taps were given to the borers, to +make them stand upright, and then all four began work. At first they +often either missed the heads of the borers or struck them unevenly. + +"It is well, Dias, that we carried out your suggestion, as I see I +should have had an uncommonly good chance of getting my fingers +smashed, or a wrist broken. I have missed as often as any of you." + +They stopped frequently for breath, and at the end of an hour were glad +to lay down their hammers. Dias was comparatively fresh; his practice +as a woodsman now did him good service. + +"I should have thought from the number of trees that I have helped to +cut down," Bertie said, "that I could hit pretty hard, but this is a +great deal stiffer work. I should say that this hammer is at least +twice the weight of the axe, and it is the lightest of the four. I ache +a good deal worse than I did when I first chopped that tree down." + +"So do I, Bertie. We will stick at this till we get accustomed to the +work. By doing so we shall gain strength as well as skill." + +"I will get some grease, senor, from Maria, and then I will rub your +shoulders, and arms; that will do you a great deal of good." + +"Thank you, Dias! It would be a good plan." + +Dias did this to Jose as well as to the brothers, and then Jose in turn +rubbed him. + +They waited half an hour, and then Harry said: "Let us have another +spell." This time a quarter of an hour sufficed. "It is of no use, +Harry; I can't go on any longer," Bertie said. "I feel as if my +shoulders were broken." + +"I am beginning to feel the same, Bertie. However, we are all hitting +straighter now. We will go up into the shade and take it quietly for +two or three hours; then we will have a spell again." + +However, after the rest, they all agreed that it would be useless to +try again, for they could not lift their arms over their heads without +feeling acute pain. Three days were spent at this exercise, and at the +end of that time they had gained confidence, and the heads of the +drills were no longer missed. + +After the first day they only worked for a quarter of an hour at a +time, taking an hour's rest. The pain in their arms had begun to abate. +On the following day they practised striking alternately, three +standing round one borer. They found this at first awkward, but by the +end of the day they were able to strike in regular order, the blows +falling faster after each other on to the drill. + +"I think we shall do now," said Bertie. "No doubt we shall hit harder +with a fortnight's practice, and shall be able to keep it up longer. +However, I think that even now we have sufficient confidence in +striking to be able to hold the borer without any fear of an accident." + +The next day they began work early in the cellar. Jose volunteered to +take the first turn to hold the drill. + +"You understand, Jose, you must turn it round a little after each +stroke, and in that way it will cut the hole regularly." + +Harry took his place on one side of Jose, who sat with a leg on each +side of the drill. Dias stood facing Harry, Bertie behind Jose holding +the torch so that its light fell strongly on the head of the drill. At +first the two men struck gently, but gradually, as they grew confident, +increased the weight of their strokes until they were hitting with +their full power. After ten minutes they stopped. "Let us look at the +hole," Harry said. "How far has it got down?" + +Jose moved his position and Harry examined the hole. "About an eighth +of an inch," he said. "Let us scrape the dust out of it." + +"Shall we take a spell now, Harry?" Bertie said. + +"No, we will wait five minutes and then go on again, and after that we +will change places with you, relieving each other every twenty minutes." + +The work went on, and at the end of two hours the hole was three inches +deep. Another hour and a half and the drill suddenly went down. + +"We are through it," Bertie said, "and I am not sorry." + +"Now I will lift the drill up gently, Bertie; do you kneel down, and +when I stop, take hold of it close to the floor, so that we may see the +thickness of the stone." + +"Five inches," he said as he measured it. "Now put on a little grease, +Dias. I will lower it again, and we shall be perhaps able then to get +some idea of what is underneath." + +He lowered the drill and turned it round two or three times, and then +carefully raised it. Some sand and little stones were sticking to it. + +"Sand and gravel," he said. "That settles that point. Now we have done +a good morning's work, and let us go up and have breakfast." + +Maria looked enquiringly at them. "I was just coming down for you. +Well, what have you done?" + +"We have drilled one hole, Maria, and none of us have got our fingers +smashed, so I think we have every reason to be satisfied with our first +experience at the work." + +As they breakfasted they talked matters over. Harry said that he was +certain that the thickness of the stone was not sufficient for them to +break it up by blasting. "We shall have to try some other plan. It is +equally certain that we cannot smash the stone with the sledge-hammers, +and I don't think that the wedges would break it. Of course if we got +one stone out it would be comparatively easy to lift the next, as we +could put the crowbars under it. If we can do it in no other way, we +must drill a line of holes close to each other right across the stone, +and we might then break off the piece between them and the crack and +get our crowbars under the slab. It might be worth while to drill holes +a foot apart, from the point where we have begun to the other end of +the room. Of course if we found that gravel and stones were everywhere +under the slabs we should learn nothing; but the opening to the +chambers is probably covered by another stone, and if we found that, we +could put in one or two more holes so as to be sure that it was flat, +in which case we might smash it somehow. Of course, if we don't come +upon a flat stone we shall conclude that they put a layer of sand and +fine gravel over the slabs covering the vaults, and must then, as I +say, get up one stone and gradually lift all the rest, clearing out the +gravel as we go to the depth of a foot or so. In that way we shall make +sure that we shall not miss any chamber there may be. + +"I think that would certainly be the best plan. At present we are +groping altogether in the dark, and it will take us a fortnight at +least to make that row of holes close to each other, as you propose." + + + + +CHAPTER XVIII + +DISAPPOINTMENT + + +Six more days were spent in driving holes according to Harry's plan. +The result was in all cases the same. Sand and small stones were +brought up attached to the grease. They had now sunk the holes at a +much more rapid rate than at first, for they were accustomed to the +work, their muscles had hardened, and they were able to strike more +frequently and with greater force. They would have got on still more +quickly had it not been for the trouble in sharpening the drills. These +were heated in the small blacksmith's fire Dias had brought. They were +first placed in the fire, but this was not sufficiently hot to raise +them beyond a dull red glow. When this was done a shovelful of glowing +fragments was taken from the fire and placed on the hearth, and among +these the small bellows raised the ends of the drills to a white heat, +when of course they were easily worked. At first they had some +difficulty in tempering them. Sometimes, when cooled, the points were +too soft, at other times too brittle; but at the end of a week they had +arrived at the proper medium. But one of the party had to work steadily +to keep the drills in good order. + +Bertie was daily employed at this work, as Jose generally failed to +give the proper temper to the tools. Bertie, however, generally managed +to get in two or three hours' work below. Although perfectly ready to +do his share, he was by no means sorry to be otherwise employed for a +part of the day, and as he was now able to talk Spanish with perfect +fluency he and Donna Maria maintained a lively conversation whenever +they were together. All the party, however, were glad when Sunday came +round and gave them a day of complete rest; then they would bathe, +fish, shoot pigeons, or lie in the shade, each according to his fancy, +and recommence work with fresh vigour the next morning. + +Just a fortnight after they had begun work they were about to begin a +hole in a fresh stone. Talking it over, they had come to the conclusion +that this was the most likely spot in the cellar for the situation of +an underground chamber. Farther on there would scarce be width for one, +for it was here but eight feet across. Where they had already tried +there would scarcely have been depth enough. This seemed to them to be +the happy medium. + +Before setting to work Dias passed his torch over the stone. Presently +he stopped. "Will you light two of the candles, senor; the torch +flickers too much to see very plainly." + +Somewhat surprised, for no such close examination had been made before, +the candles were lighted and handed to him. Dias knelt down, and, with +his face close to the stone, moved about carefully, examining it for +some minutes without speaking. + +"This stone, senor, is broken," he said at last, "broken into a dozen +pieces, and they have been so carefully fitted together again that the +dust that settled upon it quite prevented our seeing it till we swept +it again just now, and it was only because there was a tiny chip out +where I first looked that I noticed it." + +Harry knelt down and also examined the stone. Like all the others, it +had not been faced with tools. Consequently, although roughly even, +there were slight irregularities in the surface. Now, as Dias pointed +them out to him, he saw that there were lines running through it here +and there. + +"Look here, senor. The stone has been struck here. Here are some dents." + +These were scarcely noticeable. The surface had taken the same colour +as the rest of the stone. They were of irregular size, and from a +quarter of an inch to an inch in diameter, and nearly in the centre of +the stone, from which point several of the cracks started. + +"It certainly looks as if the stone had been struck with something +heavy," Harry said. "I should think, by the appearance, some very heavy +piece of rock must have been dropped upon it." + +"Yes, senor, very heavy rock--so heavy that there must have been many +men to lift it." + +"It must have been heavy indeed to break up this slab." + +"Perhaps it is not so thick as the others," Dias suggested. + +"I don't like it, Dias. Well, let us set to work. We will try the +wedges there. They were no use against the solid stone, but they might +move these pieces. Put one of the borers just at the place from which +these cracks start--at least, I suppose they are cracks--and let us +drive it in for an inch. You hold it, Jose. Don't turn it, we want it +to go in just in a line with this crack. I know we cannot drive it in +far, but at least we may make it go deep enough to give a wedge a hold +in it." + +Five such small holes were made in a crack that seemed to form a rough +circle, then the wedges were put in, and they began to work with +sledges. In ten minutes Harry, examining the place carefully, said: +"The bit of stone is breaking up. There are lines running across it +from the wedges. Give me the heaviest sledge." He swung it round his +head and brought it down half a dozen times in the centre of the +wedges. The cracks opened so far that he could see them without +stooping. + +"Now we will try with the crowbars," he said. + +In ten minutes a fragment of the stone was got up; then they hammered +on the wedges again, and a piece of rock, which was roughly seven or +eight inches in diameter, broke completely off. + +"It is only about two and a half inches thick," Harry said as he drew +one of the fragments out. And, holding the candle to the hole, he went +on: "And there is another slab underneath. That settles it. We are at +the top of one of these vaults. The question is, is it empty? I am +afraid it is. This stone has evidently been broken up and fitted in +again with wonderful care." + +"Why should it be fitted in carefully if they emptied the chamber?" + +"That I can't tell you, Dias, and it is of no use trying to guess now. +First of all, we will get the rest of the stone up. It won't be +difficult, for now that we have made a start we can use our crowbars. +Jose, run up and tell my brother to come down. We shall want him to +help with the crowbar; and besides, he would, of course, wish to be +here, now that we are on the point of making a discovery one way or the +other." + +In a minute Bertie came down with Jose, and Donna Maria followed. "Jose +tells me you have broken a hole in one of the stones," Bertie exclaimed +as he ran up. + +"We have got a bit out of a broken stone, Bertie. This stone had been +broken before, and evidently not by accident. It is only half the +thickness of the others, and, as you can see, there is another slab +underneath." + +"Who can have broken it, Harry?" + +"That question we cannot decide, but I should say probably the Incas. +We agreed that it was very possible they discovered the hidden +treasures of the Chimoos. They must have learned, as the Spaniards did, +how cleverly these places were hidden, and it must have been as evident +to them as it is to us, that if there was a hiding-place here, this +must be the spot." + +When one or two more pieces of the stone had been got out by the aid of +crowbars, the rest was removed without the least difficulty. Another +slab two feet square was exposed. In the middle of this was a copper +ring, and the slab fitted, into a stone casing about eighteen inches +wide. As soon as this casing was cleared, Dias and Jose took their +places on one side, the two brothers on the other. A crowbar was thrust +through the ring, and all of them, taking hold of the ends, lifted with +all their strength. At first the stone did not move, but at the second +effort it lifted suddenly. It was the same thickness as the one they +had broken, and, on being moved, was easily handled. The torches were +thrust down, and all peered eagerly into the vault. So far as they +could see it was empty. + +"Shall I jump down, senor?' + +"No, the air may be bad, Jose. Run up and bring down a short length of +rope, twenty feet will be ample. Now, let your torch drop down, Dias. +If it burns, it will be safe for us to go down; if not, we must keep on +dropping blazing brands into it till they burn." + +As, however, the torch burnt brightly, Harry lay down, and, saying, +"Hold my legs, Bertie!" looked down into the vault. Eighteen inches +below the surface, the hole widened out suddenly. A minute later +Harry's head appeared above the surface again. + +"It is empty," he said in as cheerful a voice as he could manage. "Of +course it is a disappointment," he went on, "but I felt certain that it +would be so directly we found the stone was cracked. The only hope was +that the first finders of the treasure afterwards used the place for +the same purpose. That they thought it possible they might do so is +clear by the care with which they fitted the stones together." + +None of the others spoke. The disappointment was a heavy one. Bertie +broke the silence by saying; "Well, better luck next time. They may +have found out this place, but there may be others which they did not +find." + +"Quite so, Bertie. Now we have got up one stone, It will be +comparatively easy work getting up the others. We will take up every +stone to the end, and then work back till we get to a place where there +is not more than a couple of feet between the bottom of the stone and +the top of the rock." + +At this moment Jose ran into the room with the rope. Harry took it, and +dropped one end until it nearly touched the floor below. "Hold on," he +said, "and I will slip down first." Half a minute later he stood at the +bottom of the chamber, beside the torch, which was still burning. + +"It is only about three feet across at the bottom," he said; "the wall +by the passage goes straight up, on the other side it is the bare rock, +so it is almost wedge-shaped. It is twenty feet long, and five feet +high up to its roof, that makes it nearly seven to the upper part of +the mouth." The vault was absolutely empty. He moved about for a minute +and then said: "Gold has been stored here. There are particles of gold +at the bottom, and there is gold-dust in the cracks of the broken face +of the rock. Now I will come up again. Hold the rope tight; I will +climb about a yard, and then I can get my fingers on the ledge." + +He was soon up. "Now, do any of you want to go down?" Dias and Jose +shook their heads; and Bertie grumbled, "I don't want to look at the +beastly hole; it has been trouble enough to get at it." + +"Well, I think we will not do any more to-day, Dias. It has rather +taken the heart out of one. Still, we could not expect to hit upon the +treasure for the first time. We will go up and talk it over, and when +we have smoked a pipe or two we shall be more inclined to take a +cheerful view of the matter. We won't talk about it till we have got to +the end of our second pipe." + +The tobacco did its usual work, and it was with quite a cheerful voice +that Bertie broke the silence: "The Incas must have been pretty sharp +fellows to find that hole, Harry?" + +"Well, very likely they heard that the Chimoos had treasure there. +Indeed they must have known, because, you see, not one of the other +stones is broken, so they evidently knew where that chamber was +situated." + +"Yes, I suppose that was it. Well, we are in fine working order now, +and we sha'n't be very long getting the other stones up." + +"Not very long this side anyhow, Bertie. We shall want some short +blocks of wood to put under the stones as we raise them. I expect they +are all five inches thick, and they must be a very big weight. +Evidently it is going to be a longish job. As we have been a fortnight +without fresh meat, Dias had better go off and buy half a dozen sheep. +We won't have dead meat this time. He can bring them slung over the +mules, and we can kill them as we want them." + +"We have not had fresh meat, but we have not done badly, Harry; we have +generally had a good many eggs and some pigeons, and Jose has brought +us in fish from that pool. But they have dwindled down lately. He only +brought in a couple of fish yesterday evening." + +"Well, the pigeons are getting scarcer too, Bertie. We have killed a +good many, but the rest are getting very shy, and I think most of them +must have gone off and settled in new places on the face of the rocks +above the ravine. While Dias is away, we will try and lay in a stock of +sea-fish. We can swim out and sit on the rocks during the day, and lay +our lines at night. We have worked very hard for a fortnight, and we +deserve a holiday." + +Dias, when he was spoken to, said he would start at once with four +mules for Huacha. "It is not above fifteen miles," he said, "and I can +get there this evening. I should think that I could buy the sheep +there; if not, I must go on to Huaura. Each mule will bring two sheep. +Of course I could drive them, but that would seem more singular." + +"You had certainly better take the mules, Dias. Tie the sheep carefully +on them, so that they will not be hurt." + +"I will take eight of the leather bags, senor. The sheep are not large, +and I will sling one on each side of the mules." + +"Yes, it would be as well, while you are about it, to bring eight. You +may as well get some more coffee. We drink a lot of that, and like it +strong. If your wife thinks we shall want more sugar, or anything else, +by all means get some." + +As soon as Dias started, the lines were got ready. They cut a couple of +saplings to serve as rods, and Jose, digging among the rocks, found +plenty of worms, beetles, and grubs for bait. In addition, they took a +cake or two of maize, to break up and throw in to attract the fish. + +"We had better swim out in our flannel shirts and trousers," Harry +said. "They will soon dry, and they will keep off the sun. If we were +to sit there without them, we should get blistered from head to foot." + +"Shall we fish outside the rocks, or inside, Harry?" + +"We will try both; but I think we are likelier to catch most inside. I +should think a back-water like that would attract them." + +They met with equal success on both sides of the rocks, and by evening +had caught over forty fish, at least half of which weighed over four +pounds. Then they set the long lines, each carrying forty hooks, and +returned to the castle with as many fish as they could possibly carry. +Maria was delighted with the addition to her larder, and she and Jose +set to work at once to clean and split them. In the morning they were +hung in strings from the broad window. Maria said they would get the +benefit of the heat from the walls, and any air there might be would be +able to pass round them. + +By means of the night-lines they caught almost as many fish as they had +done with their rods, and that day they had the satisfaction of +bringing in more than they could carry in one journey. + +"We have got plenty now to keep us going for another three weeks," +Harry said, "and we can always replenish our stock when we choose." + +Dias returned at sunset carrying one sheep over his shoulders. + +"I have left the others out there, senor; I don't think there is any +fear of their straying. There is no fresh grass anywhere except near +the stream, and moreover, being strange to the valley, they will +naturally keep near the mules." + +Another month passed in continuous labour. The stones had all been +taken up in the basement they had first visited, but no other chamber +had been found. The parallel chamber had given them much trouble at +starting, as no stone had been found showing any cracks upon it, and +they had had to blast one stone to pieces before they could begin to +cut up the others. No chamber whatever had been discovered until they +were within six feet of the farther end. Then one was found, but it +showed no signs whatever of having ever been used. "So far so bad," +Harry said when the supper had been eaten almost in silence; "but that +is no reason why we should be disheartened. If the Incas buried a +treasure they may have thought it prudent to choose some other spot +than that used by the old people." + +"But where could it be, Harry? You agreed that there was not sufficient +depth between the floors for any place of concealment." + +"That is so, Bertie, of course. I have been thinking of it a lot during +the past few days, when the chances of our finding a treasure under the +basement were nearly extinguished. There are still the side walls." + +"The side walls!" Bertie repeated. "Surely they are built against the +rock?" + +"Yes, but we don't know how straight the wall of rock is. You see, they +did not build against it at all in the basement, but above that the +side walls begin. The rock must have been irregular, and as the walls +were built the space behind may have been filled in or may not. When +they came to build they may have found that there was a cavern or +caverns in the rock--nothing is more likely--and they may have left +some sort of entrance to these caverns, either as a place of refuge to +the garrison if the place were taken, or as a hiding-place. They might +have thought it more secure for this purpose than the underground +chamber, which was their general hiding-place. At any rate it is +possible, and to-morrow I vote that we have a thorough inspection of +the walls of the storeroom below this. That would be the most likely +place, for near the sea-level the chances of finding caverns would be +much greater than higher up." + +Bertie's face brightened as Harry proceeded. + +"It certainly seems possible, Harry. Of course the other place seemed +so much more likely to us that we have never given the side walls a +thought. We may find something there after all. I do hope we may, old +boy. I cannot believe that after things have gone altogether so well +with us, and we have been twice so near finding treasure, that we +should fail after all. Which side shall we begin on?" + +"We will have a look at them before we decide, Bertie. We have not +really examined them since the first day; I really forget what stores +we found in the two side-rooms." + +An examination in the morning showed that the passage near the entrance +to the rock on the left-hand side had been used for fuel, that on the +other side was filled at the upper end with skins for some distance, +and spears and sheaves of arrows were piled against the outer wall +along the rest of the distance. + +"Which do you think is the most likely hiding-place?" + +"I should say the right-hand passage. The other with the fire-wood in +it might be visited every day, but the spears and arrows would only be +wanted in case of any attacks upon the castle, or to arm a large force +going out to give battle there. They would naturally put anything they +wanted to hide in the passage less likely to be visited." + +"That does seem probable," Bertie agreed; "therefore, hurrah for the +right-hand side!" + +"I still think, senor," Dias said, "that there must be treasure +concealed somewhere. I should not think a guard would have been placed +here, and remained here so many years still keeping watch, as we find +they did at that big loophole on the top floor, unless there was +something to watch." + +"Quite so, Dias. I have thought that over in every way, and I can see +no possible motive for their being here except to prevent the place +from being examined. That was needless if there was nothing to guard, +and nothing to take away, except these silver brackets, which in those +days would scarcely have been worth the trouble of getting out and +carrying away. There must be treasure somewhere. We know now that it is +not in the basement, and we will try these side walls, even if we have +to blow half of them in; there is no doubt that the stones are at least +as thick as those at the end, but they will not be difficult to manage. +I noticed in the upper story that they had not taken the trouble to fit +them nearly so accurately as they did those of the outer walls. I don't +say that they didn't fit well, but the stones were of irregular sizes, +and I have no doubt that in many places we could prize them out with a +crowbar. Once an opening is made, there will be no difficulty in +getting a lot of them out, as the old people did not use cement or +mortar. Well, to-morrow morning we will move all the spears and arrows +across to the other side of that passage and have a good look at the +stones, but we will go up first and look at the side walls of all the +other rooms and see if they are of the same build. There may be some +difference which we have not noticed. You see all the side walls of +this room are built like those in front. I didn't notice whether it was +the same in the other rooms." + +"I will look at once," Dias said, lighting a torch at the fire. + +"No, senor," he said, when in ten minutes he returned; "none of the +walls on this floor are built of stone like this. This was the grand +chamber, the stones are all nearly one size, and so well fitted that +you can hardly see where they join each other. In the other rooms they +are not so, but the stones are, as you noticed above, irregular in +size, and although they fit closely, there is no attempt to conceal the +cracks." + +"Thank you, Dias! Well, we won't look any more to-night; we shall see +in the morning if the room below us is built in the same way. I have no +doubt it is. At any rate we have done enough for to-day. There is some +whisky left in that bottle, Bertie, and we may as well make ourselves a +glass of grog. Maria, you had better get down that jar of pulque. We +will drink to better luck next time." + +The woman smiled faintly. She did not often do so now, her spirits had +gradually gone down as the hopes of success faded. + +"Now, Maria," Harry said, "you had better take a glass of pulque for +yourself. I know you don't often touch it, but you have been working so +of late that I think you want it more than any of us." + +"I cannot help feeling low-spirited, senor," she said. "I have so hoped +that you would find the treasure you wanted, and marry this lady you +love, and it would be such joy for us to have in some small way repaid +the service you rendered us, that I felt quite broken down. I know I +ought not to have been, when you and your brother bear the +disappointment so bravely." + +"'It is of no use crying over spilt milk', which is an English saying, +Maria. Besides, it is possible that the milk may not be spilt yet, and +until lately your good spirits have helped us greatly to keep ours up. +If I were once convinced that we had failed, I have no doubt I should +feel hard hit; but I am a long way from giving up hope yet. There is +treasure here, and if I have to blow up the whole of the old place I +will find it. I have got six months yet, and in six months one can do +wonders. Anyhow, these brackets will pay us very well for our work. I +certainly should not have earned half the sum in any other way in the +same time. And even if I fail in my great object, I shall have the +satisfaction of knowing that I have done all in my power to gain it. +She will know that I have done my best. I have always told her, when I +have written, how much I owe to you and Dias, how faithfully you have +served me, and how you have always been so bright and pleasant. I have +no doubt it has cheered her up as well as me." + +Maria was wiping her eyes now. "You are too good, senor; it is so +little I can do, or Dias either, to show our gratitude." + +"Nonsense! You show it in every way, even in the matter-of-fact way of +always giving us excellent food, which is by no means unimportant. Now +we will all turn in, and make a fresh start to-morrow morning." + +They were up at daybreak, and after taking their usual cup of coffee +lit the torches and descended the stairs to the floor below. + +As soon as they reached the right-hand wall, Harry exclaimed: "Why, +this is built in the same way as the one we have left! The stones are +squared and fitted together as closely as those in the drawing-room. +Then why should that be, except in that one room? The side walls all +the way up are roughly built. Why should they have taken the trouble on +this floor to build these, which are only meant as store-rooms, when +even in the rooms above, which were meant for the habitation of the +chief and his family, the rough work was deemed sufficiently good? +There must have been some motive for this, Dias." + +"There must have been, senor; it is certainly strange." + +"First of all, let us clear the wall and take a general view of it. +Guessing won't help us; but I have the strongest hopes that behind one +of these stones lies a cavern. By the way, Dias, take a torch and go +into the next chamber and see if the stones are solid there." + +"They are just the same as those here," Dias said when he returned. + +"I would rather that it had been the other way," Harry said, "for then +I should have been more sure that there was some special reason for +their building them in this way here." + +It took them all half an hour's work to move the spears and arrows to +the other side. + +"Do you think, Harry, if we were to tap the stones we should be able to +find whether there is a hollow behind any of them?" + +Harry shook his head. + +"Not in the least. I have no doubt these stones are two or three feet +thick, and there could be no difference in the sound they would make if +struck, whether they were filled in solid behind or had no backing. To +begin with, we will make a careful examination of the walls. Possibly +we shall see some signs of a stone having been moved. It would be very +much more difficult to take one of the great blocks out and put it in +again than it would be to get up one of the paving-stones." + +When they had gone about half-way along, examining each stone with the +greatest care, Bertie, who was ahead of the rest, and passing the +candle he held along the edge of every joint, said, "Look here! this +stone projects nearly half an inch beyond the rest." + +The others gathered round him. The stone was of unusual size, being +fully two and a half feet wide and four feet long, the bottom joint +being two feet above the floor. + +Bertie moved along to let the others look at the edge. He was keeping +his finger on the joint, and they had scarcely come up when he said, +"The other end of the stone's sunk in about as much as this end +projects." + +"Something certainly occurred to shift this stone a little," Harry +said, examining it carefully. "It is curious. If others had been +displaced, one would have put it down to the shock of an earthquake--a +common enough occurrence here--but both above and below it the stones +are level with the others, and nowhere about the house have we seen +such another displacement. Look! there is a heap of rubbish along the +foot of the wall here. Stir it up, Dias, and let us see what it is." + +"It is sand and small stones, and some chips that look like chips of +rock." + +"Yes, these bits look, as you say, as if they had been chipped off a +rock, not like water-worn stones. Though how they got here, where +everywhere else things are perfectly tidy, I cannot say. However, we +can think that over afterwards. Now for the stone! Let us all put our +weight against this projecting end. I don't in the least expect that we +can move it, but at any rate we can try." + +They all pushed together. + +"I think it moved a little," Harry said, and looked at the edge. + +"Yes, it is not above half as far out now as it was." + +"That is curious, for if it is as thick as we took it to be, it would +weigh at least a couple of tons. We won't try to push it in any +farther. I am sorry we pushed it at all. Now, give me that heavy +sledge, Jose, possibly there may be a hollow sound to it. I will hit at +the other end, for I don't want this to go in any farther." + +He went to the stone beyond it first and struck two or three blows with +all his strength. Then he did the same with the stone that they were +examining. + +"I don't think it gives such a dead sound," he said. + +The others were all of the same opinion. + +"Good! This is another piece of luck," he said. "We have certainly hit +on something out of the way." + +"Your hammering has brought this end out again, Harry," Bertie said. + +"So it has, and it has pushed this end in a little. Let us try again." +But although all took turns with the sledges, they could make no +further impression on the stone. + +"Well, we will try the drills," Harry said. "In the first place, we +will find out how thick it is." + +They at once set to work with the drill. Progress was slower than it +had been before, because, instead of striking down on the head of the +drill, they had now to swing the hammer sideways and lost the advantage +of its weight; and they were obliged to work very carefully, as a miss +would have seriously damaged the one holding the drill. It took them +four hours' steady work to get the hole in three inches. Ten minutes +later, to their astonishment, the drill suddenly disappeared. Dias, who +was striking, nearly fell, for instead of the resistance he had +expected, the drill shot forward; the hammer hit Jose, who had this +time been holding the drill, a heavy blow on the arm, causing him to +utter a shout of pain. + +Harry, who was sitting down having breakfast, having just handed his +hammer to Bertie, jumped to his feet. + +"How did you manage that, Dias? I suppose it slipped off the head. You +must have hit Jose a very heavy blow." + +"I have hit him a heavy blow, senor, and nearly tumbled down myself; +but I struck the drill fairly enough, and it has gone." + +"Gone where, Dias?" + +"I think it must have gone right through the hole, senor." + +"Then there is an empty space behind!" Harry shouted joyfully. +"However," he went on in changed tones, "we must see to Jose first. +That blow may have fractured his arm. Let me look, Jose. No, I don't +think anything is broken, but there is a nasty cut on the wrist. It is +fortunate that you were not striking straight down, Dias, for I am sure +we have not put anything approaching the strength into our blows, now +we are hitting sideways, that we exerted before. You had better go up +to Maria, Jose, and get her to bathe your wrist with cold water, and +put on a bandage." + +"Now, senor, what shall we do next?" + +"Well, now that we know that its weight cannot be anything very great, +and that certainly to some extent it can be moved, we will try +hammering again at that end. Do you stand three or four feet beyond it, +so as to be able to bring your sledge down with all your strength just +on the lower corner. I will face you and strike six or eight inches +above where you hit. Of course we must both bring our hammers down at +the same instant. We shall be able to do that after two or three +trials. Stand at the other end of the stone, Bertie, and tell us if it +moves at all." + +After one or two attempts the two men got to swing their hammers so as +to strike precisely at the same moment, and when half a dozen blows had +fallen, Bertie said: "It comes out a little at each blow. It is not +much, but it comes." + +Three or four minutes later he reported, "It is an inch and a half out +now, and there is room to get the end of a crowbar in here." + +"That is curious," Harry said as he lowered his sledgehammer, and, +taking up the candle, examined the end where he had been striking. + +"This is sunk about the same distance, Bertie. The stone must work +somehow on a pivot." + +They now put a crowbar into the end Bertie had been watching, and all +three threw their weight on the lever. Slowly the stone yielded to the +pressure, and moved farther and farther out. It was pushed open until +the crowbar could act no longer as a lever, but they could now get a +hold of the inside edge. It was only very slowly and with repeated +efforts that they could turn the stone round, and at last it stood +fairly at right angles to the wall, dividing the opening into equal +parts about two feet four each. + +"There is a pivot under it; that is quite evident. It may be a copper +ball in the stone below, or it may be that a knob of the upper stone +projects into a hole in the lower. However, it does not matter how it +works. Here is an opening into something. Dias, will you go upstairs +and tell your wife and Jose to come down? They had better bring half a +dozen more torches. Our stock here is getting low, and we shall want as +much light as possible. It is only fair that we should all share in the +discovery." + +Dias went off. + +"Now, Bertie, we must not let our hopes grow too high. I think it is +more likely than not that we shall find nothing here." + +"Why do you think so, Harry? I made sure we had as good as got the +treasure." + +"I think, if there had been treasure," Harry went on, "that this stone +would have been closed with the greatest care. They would hardly have +left it so carelessly closed that anyone who examined the wall would +have noticed it, just as we did. We found the other places most +carefully closed, though there was nothing in them." + +"Perhaps there was something that prevented them from shutting--a +little stone or something." + +"But we know that that wasn't so, Bertie, because the stone yielded to +our weight; and if it did so now, it could have been shut with the +greatest ease originally, when no doubt the pivot was kept oiled, and +the whole worked perfectly smoothly. It is almost certain that they +were able in some way to fasten it securely when it was shut. What is +that piece of square stone lying there?" + +"It fell down from above just as the slab opened." + +Harry took it up. It was about six inches long by two inches square. + +"It is a very hard stone," he said--"granite, I should say. I expect +you will find that it fits into a hole in the stone above." + +"Yes, there is a hole here," Bertie said, feeling it; "the stone goes +right in." + +"Well, I think, Bertie, you will find a hole in that end of the stone +we moved that it will fit." + +Bertie crept in, and felt along the top of the stone. + +"Yes, there is a hole here about the same size as the stone, but it is +not more than three inches deep." + +"Then, that stone was the bolt, Bertie. You see it was pushed up, and +the door then closed; and when the stone was exactly in its place, it +would drop into the hole and keep it from moving, and nothing short of +breaking up the bolt would give an entrance. It is lucky that we did +not push it quite to; another quarter of an inch and that bolt would +have fallen, and we could not have moved it unless by smashing the +whole thing into bits. That was why they did not quite close the stone; +they wanted to get in again." + +"Here come the others!" + +Maria had been washing some clothes in the stream, and they had +therefore been longer in coming than if she had been in the room. They +all looked greatly excited. + +"So you have found it, senor!" Dias exclaimed in delight. + +"We have found an entrance into somewhere, but I am afraid it will be +as empty as the other chambers." + +"Why do you think so, senor?" Dias asked in dismay. + +Harry repeated the reasons he had given Bertie for his belief that the +stone must have been left in such a position as to be easily opened +when required. + +"Why should it have been left so?" + +"Because the treasure they expected had never arrived. It is possible +that when the Incas discovered the treasure in that chamber we +searched, they may also have found this entrance. It may have been +shown to them by one of the prisoners, and they may have broken the +stone here into pieces as they broke that over the chamber afterwards. +Seeing what a splendid hiding-place it was, they may have, when the +Spaniards first arrived, made another stone to fit, with the intention +of using it for a hiding-place themselves. The fact that the stone was +left so that it could be at once opened is conclusive proof to my mind +that the treasure never came. That heap of sand, small stones, and +chips of rock is another proof that they were ready to receive +treasure, and it was probably swept out of the chamber that is behind +here, and would, of course, have been removed when the treasure was put +in and the door closed; but as the treasure never did come, it was left +where it lay. However, we will now go and see. I have only kept you +waiting because I did not want you to be disappointed." + +One by one they crept through the opening. For four feet in, the +passage was the same width as the stone, but two feet deeper; then it +at once opened into a large cavern. + +"This wall was four feet thick, you see, Dias. Apparently squared stone +was only used for the facing, as the stones are of irregular shape on +the back. This would be a natural cavern, and a splendid hiding-place +it makes. No doubt its existence was one of the reasons for building +this castle." + +The cavern was some twelve feet wide and thirty feet high at the mouth; +the floor sloped up sharply, and the sides contracted, and met forty +feet from the mouth. The floor had been cut into steps two feet wide, +running across the cave and extending to the back. These steps were +faced with a perfectly flat slab of stone. The cave was empty. + +The natives uttered loud exclamations of disappointment and regret. + +Harry had so thoroughly made up his mind that nothing would be found +there that he surveyed the place calmly and in silence. Bertie imitated +his example with some difficulty, for he too was bitterly disappointed. + +"You see, Dias," Harry went on quietly, "this place was prepared to +receive treasure. The steps have all been swept perfectly clean. You +see, the gold could be piled up, and no doubt the steps were cut and +faced with stone to prevent any gold-dust that might fall from the +bags, in which, no doubt, it would be brought, and small nuggets, from +falling into the cracks and crevices of the rock. I should say that in +all probability they expected that treasure ship that was lost, and had +everything in readiness for hiding the cargo here directly it came. It +never did come. The door was shut as far as it could be without the +bolt falling down and fastening it; then they waited for the ship; and +if it did not arrive, other treasure might be brought by land. Well, it +cannot be helped. So far we have failed. There may still be treasure +hidden somewhere. We cannot say that we have searched the place +thoroughly yet." + +For another six weeks they worked hard. The wall was broken through in +several places, but no signs of the existence of any other cavern or +hiding-place was discovered. + +"I should give it up," Harry said, when at the end of that time they +were sitting gloomily round the fire, "but for one thing: I can see no +possible explanation why a party of men should have been left here, and +a guard kept, for perhaps a hundred years, perhaps more, and the +stories about demons been circulated, and people who ventured to +approach been murdered, unless there had been some good reason for it. +That reason could only have been, as far as I can see, that there was a +treasure hidden here. I have turned it over and over in my mind a +thousand times, and I can think of no other reason. Can you, Bertie, or +you, Dias?" + +"No," Bertie replied. "I have often thought about it; but, as you say, +there must have been some good reason, for no people in their senses +would have spent their lives in this old place, and starved here, +unless they had some cause for it." + +Dias made no reply beyond shaking his head. + +"You see," Harry went on, "they kept up their watch to the end. There +were those two skeletons of men who had died at their post at that +curious window where nothing could be seen. I hate to give up the +search, and yet we seem to have tried every point where there was a +possibility of a hiding-place existing." + + + + +CHAPTER XIX + +THE TREASURE + + +The next morning Harry said: + +"I will go upstairs to that look-out place again. I have been up there +pretty nearly every day, and stared down. I can't get it out of my mind +that the key of the mystery lies there, and that that hole was made for +some other purpose than merely throwing stones out on to any of those +who might go in behind the rocks. I have puzzled and worried over it." + +"Shall I come up with you, Harry?" + +"No, I would rather you didn't. I will go up by myself and spend the +morning there; some idea may occur to me. You may as well all have a +quiet day of it." + +He lit his pipe and went upstairs. Jose went off to the mules, and +Bertie descended the ladder, and strolled round what they called the +courtyard, looking for eggs among the rocks and in the tufts of grass +growing higher up. Dias scattered a few handfuls of maize to the +chickens and then assisted Maria to catch two of them; after which he +descended the ladder and sat down gloomily upon a stone. He had become +more and more depressed in spirits as the search became daily more +hopeless; and although he worked as hard as anyone, he seldom spoke, +while Harry and his brother often joked, and showed no outward signs of +disappointment. An hour passed, and then Harry appeared suddenly at the +window. + +"Bertie, Dias, come up at once, I have an idea!" + +They ran to the ladder and climbed up. The excitement with which he +spoke showed that the idea was an important one. "Now, Dias," he broke +out as they joined him, "we know, don't we, that a part of the Incas' +treasure was sent off by boat, and the belief of the Indians was that +it was never heard of again." + +"That is so, senor. There was certainly a storm the day after it +started, and, as I have told you, it was never heard of again. Had it +been, a report of it would surely have come down." + +"I believe, Dias, that the boat was dashed to pieces against that line +of rocks outside the entrance to the passage. We have reason to believe +that the people here were expecting the treasure to arrive, and had the +entrance to the cave in readiness to receive it. Certainly no better +place could have been chosen for concealment. The boat may have been +coming here when the storm broke and drove them towards the shore. They +probably attempted to gain the mouth of the cove, but missed it, and +were dashed to pieces against the rocks. The Indians on guard here no +doubt saw it, and would be sure that the heavy sacks or boxes +containing the gold would sink to the bottom. They would lie perfectly +secure there, even more secure than if they had been removed and placed +in the cave, and could always be recovered when the Spaniards left, so +they were content to leave them there. Still, they obeyed the orders +they had received to keep watch for ever over the treasure, and to do +so knocked that strange hole through the wall and always kept two men +on guard there. + +"So it must have gone on. They and those who succeeded them never +wavered. Doubtless they received food from their friends outside, or +some of them went out, as you have done, to fetch it in. Then came a +time when, for some reason or other--doubtless, as I supposed before, +when the Spaniards swept pretty nearly all the natives up to work in +the mines, and they themselves dared not issue out--the attempt to get +food was made, when too late, by the men whose skeletons we found on +the steps when we first came here; and the rest were all too feeble to +repeat the experiment, and died--the two sentinels at their post, the +rest in the room where we found them." + +"Hurrah!" Bertie shouted, "I have no doubt you have hit it, Harry. I +believe, after all, that we are going to find it. That is splendid! I +shall dance at your wedding, Harry, which I had begun to think I never +should do." + +"Don't be a young ass, Bertie. It is only an idea, and we have had +several ideas before, but nothing has come of them." + +"Something is going to come of this, I am convinced; I would bet any +money on it. Well, shall we go and have a trial at once?" + +"What do you think, Dias?" Harry said, paying no attention to Bertie's +last remark. + +"I think it is quite possible, senor. Certainly, if the Indians had +been told to guard the treasure, they would do so always. You know how +they kept the secrets entrusted to them whatever tortures they were put +to. If the gold had been, as you say, lost amongst the rocks, I do +think they would have still watched the place. I thought it strange +that they should have made that hole, but when you said that they might +have made it to throw stones down it seemed to me to be likely enough; +but the other suggestion is more probable. Well, senor, I am ready to +try it, but I am not a very good swimmer." + +"My brother and I are both good swimmers, and we will do that part of +the work. The hardest part will be getting it up, and you will be able +to give us your help at that." + +"Well, let us be off," Bertie said; "I am all on thorns to begin. We +shall soon find it out. If it is there, it is almost certain to be at +the foot of the rocks, though, of course, it is possible that the boat +sank before striking them. At any rate, I feel sure she went down +somewhere within the area that can be seen through that hole. It won't +take many days' diving to search every yard of the bottom." + +They hastily descended the ladder, and, divesting themselves of their +clothes, swam out through the opening. Dias climbed up on the rocks, +the others swam round by the ends of the barrier. The water was so warm +that they would be able to remain in it for any time without +inconvenience. + +"We need not begin here, Bertie; we are outside the line of sight. From +that hole I could not see the end of these rocks. We will start at the +middle, and work in opposite directions." + +On arriving off the centre of the wall both dived. The depth was about +twelve feet, and as the water was perfectly clear, Harry could see four +or five feet round him. He was obliged to swim carefully, for the +bottom was covered with rocks, for the most part rounded by the action +of the sea. For an hour he continued his search, by which time he had +reached nearly the end of the line of rocks. Then he landed on a ledge +of rock and sat down, calling to Bertie to join him. + +"We will rest for a quarter of an hour," he said, "and then begin +again. This time we will keep twenty or thirty feet farther out; it is +more likely to be there than close in. If the boat struck, the next +wave would sweep over her, and she would probably go down stern first, +and her cargo would fall out that way." + +After their rest they started again, swam out a few strokes, and then +dived. Harry had gone down five or six times, when, on his coming to +the surface, he heard a shout, and saw Bertie swimming towards him. + +"I have found them, Harry! There are a number of ingots, but they were +so heavy that I could not bring one of them to the surface." + +As Harry reached him the lad turned round and swam back. "There they +are, just opposite that cleft in the rock! I looked directly I came up +so as to know the exact spot." + +Harry trod water for half a minute, then took a long breath and dived. + +It was as Bertie had said. Scattered among the rocks were a score of +ingots. They had lost their brilliancy, but shone with a dull copperish +hue, with bright gleams here and there where rocks had grated against +them. Putting one hand on a block of rock he lifted one of them with +the other. + +"About twenty pounds," he said to himself. "Thank God, Hilda is as good +as won!" Then he rose to the surface. "Shake hands, Bertie; there is +enough there to make us all rich for life. Now we will get back again. +We have to think matters over, and see how they are to be got ashore. +There is no hurry; they have lain there for three hundred years, and +would lie there as much longer if we did not take them. We have found +them, Dias!" he shouted; and the latter gave a yell of delight. "Swim +ashore, and we will join you there." + +Not another word was spoken until they had dressed and walked out. + +"I am too excited even to think," Harry broke out. "It is time for +dinner. When we have had that and smoked a pipe I shall be able to talk +calmly over it." + +Maria was wild with delight at the news, and laughed and cried by +turns. Even Jose, who was accustomed to take all things quietly, was +almost as excited. The woman was only called to herself when Harry +said, laughing, "Maria, for the first time since we started from Lima, +you are letting the dinner burn." + +"To think of it!" she cried. "It is your fault, senor; you should not +have told me about it till we sat down." + +"You won't have to cook much longer, Maria. You will be able now to +have a servant, and a house as big as you like, and a beautiful garden." + +"I should not like that, senor; what should I do all day with myself?" + +"I am glad, senor, glad for your sake," Dias said gravely. "To us it +will make no difference. You said there was enough there to make us +rich. Assuredly that is so; but not one peso of it will we touch. No +man with Indian blood in his veins, not even the poorest in Peru, would +have aught to do with an ounce of the Incas' treasures. When they were +buried, a curse was laid upon any who betrayed their hiding-place or +who ever touched the gold. It has brought a curse upon Spain. At the +time the Spaniards landed here they were a great nation. Now their +glory has departed; they no longer own the land they tyrannized over +for three hundred years, and we have heard that their power in Europe +has altogether gone. It must be the curse of the gold, or they would +never have allowed your great Englishman, Cochrane, with but two or +three ships, to conquer them here. My mind is easy as to the finding of +the treasure. You came here in spite of my prayers that you would not +do so. It is you who have made the discovery, not me. But I will take +no share in the gold. From the day I took it I should be a cursed man; +my flesh would melt away, I should suffer tortures, and should die a +miserable death." + +"Well, Dias, I will not try to persuade you. I know that, Christian +though you be, your native belief still clings to you, and I will not +argue against it; but I have money of my own, and from that I will give +you enough to make you comfortable for life, and that you can take +without feeling that you have incurred any curse from the finding of +this treasure." + +"I thank you heartily," Dias said gratefully; "I thank you with all my +heart. I have ever been a wanderer, and now I will gladly settle down. +I do not desire wealth, but enough to live on in comfort with my wife, +and only to travel when it pleases me." + +"You shall have enough for that and more, Dias." + +After some more meat had been cooked and eaten, and he had smoked a +pipe, Harry said: "A boat would, of course, be the best thing, but +there are difficulties connected with it. There is no spot, as far as I +know, where we could land for fifteen miles on either side, and there +would only be small villages where everything we did would be seen and +talked about. There is no place where we could keep a boat here, for if +even a slight breeze sprang up the swell coming in round the passage +between the rocks and the cliff would smash her up in no time." + +"That is so, senor." + +Harry was silent again for some time, and then said: "The only plan I +can think of is to get some strong leather bags. Then we could take one +down with us when we dive, with a strong cord tied to it, put a couple +of the ingots into it, and you could haul it up on to the rocks, and so +on until we have finished a day's work. Then we could carry them to +this side of the rocks; there you could put them, three or four at a +time, into the bag, and drop them down in the water. We would swim up +the tunnel and haul them in, and then bring the bag back again. We +sha'n't be able to get anything approaching all the ingots, for a great +many of them must have gone in between the crevices of the rocks, and +unless we broke it up with powder, which would be next to impossible +without a diving-dress and air-pumps and all sorts of things, which +cannot be bought in this country, we could not get at them. However, we +have only just begun to look for them yet; we may come across a pile. +Heavy as the sea must be on this coast in a gale, I hardly think it +would much affect a pile of ingots; their weight would keep them steady +even were big rocks rolled about. + +"I think the best thing, Dias, would be for you to go off with two or +three mules. We shall soon be running short of provisions, and you had +better get enough flour and dried meat to last us for a month. I don't +suppose we shall be as long as that, but it is as well to have a good +store so as not to have to make the journey again. Then you had better +get twenty leather bags, such as those in which they bring the ore down +from the mountains. We have plenty of stout rope, but we shall want +some thin cord for tying the necks of the bags. You may as well bring +another keg of spirits, brandy if you can get it, a bag of coffee, and +some sugar, and anything else you think of. Now I am a millionaire we +can afford to be comfortable. By the way, we might as well this +afternoon get the rest of those silver brackets out. These are not a +part of the Incas' treasure, and you can take them as your share +without fear of the curse. It would be best for you to smelt them down; +I know all of you natives can do that." + +"Do you think that they are not part of the Incas' treasure, senor?" +Dias said doubtfully. + +"Certainly not; they were undoubtedly here before the Incas' time. But +even had they been put there by Incas, you could not call them hidden +treasure. They might be part of the Incas' property, but certainly not +part of the treasures they hid." + +"But it is altogether too much, senor; it is noble of you to offer it +me." + +"Not at all; we owe everything we find to you, and it would be only +fair that you should have at least a third of the gold. But still, if +you won't touch that, you must take the silver." + +"But I heard you say that it was worth four thousand pounds." + +"Well, if we are lucky we shall get twenty times as much, Dias." + +"Certainly we will take it, senor, and grateful we shall both be to +you," Maria said; "and so will Jose, who will inherit it all some day, +as he is the only relative we have. I agree with Dias about the gold. I +have heard so often about the curse on it that I should be afraid." + +"Well, Maria, you see there is a lot of nonsense in all your +superstitions. You know it was one of them that this place was guarded +by demons. Now you have seen for yourself that it was all humbug. If +you are afraid about the silver, I will take it to England and sell it +there and send you the money it fetches; but that would give a great +deal of trouble. It will be difficult to get the gold safely away, +without being bothered with all this silver. + +"You had better buy some bags of charcoal, Dias. I suppose you will use +that small hearth we have?" + +"No, senor, it would take an immense time to do it in that. I will load +one of the mules with hard bricks." + +"You will want two mules to carry a hundred, Dias--I think they weigh +about four pounds and a half each. Will that be enough?" + +"Plenty, senor; but I shall want another bellows. Jose and I can work +the two of them, and that will make a great heat. We can melt two or +three hundred pounds a day. I have helped to make many a furnace up in +the mountains, and I know very well all about the way to build and work +them." + +"Very well, then, that is settled. You had better start to-morrow +morning with Jose, and we will spend the day in finding out a little +more about the gold." + +Dias started the next morning, and the two brothers were in the water +most of the day. Harry found, as he had expected, that a great deal of +the treasure had sunk out of reach between the rocks; but he came upon +one pile, which had apparently been originally packed in sacks or +skins, lying in a heap a little farther out than they had before +searched. He had no doubt that this was the point where the stern of +the boat had sunk, and a considerable portion of the contents had been +shot out, while the rest had been scattered about as the boat broke up, +and as the skins rotted their contents had fallen between the rocks. +There were, as nearly as he could calculate, two hundred and fifty to +three hundred ingots in the pile. + +"I need not trouble about the rest," he laughed to himself. "Each +ingot, if it weighs twenty pounds, is worth a thousand. Two hundred of +them would make me as rich as any man can want to be. I can hardly +believe in my luck; it is stupendous. Fancy a half-pay lieutenant with +two hundred thousand pounds! Old Fortescue will become one of the most +complaisant of fathers-in-law." + +The evening before Dias left, Harry had written a letter for him to +post at Callao, telling Hilda to keep up a brave heart, for that he +hoped to be at home before the end of the second year with money enough +to satisfy her father. + +"I should not tell you so unless I felt certain of what I am saying. I +told you before I left that it was almost a forlorn hope that I was +undertaking, and that the chances were ten thousand to one against me. +I think now that the one chance has turned up, and I hope to be home +within two months of the time that you receive this letter." + +He did not say more; but even now he could scarcely believe that the +good fortune had befallen him, and feared that some unlucky fate might +interfere between him and the fulfilment of his hopes. When Dias +returned after two days' absence the work began. Each morning they +worked together at bringing up the gold and piling the ingots on the +rock. It was slower work than Harry had expected, for on hauling the +bag to the rocks it was often caught by the boulders, and he and Bertie +sometimes had to dive four or five times before they could free it and +get it ashore. The gold was piled in the tunnel just beyond the water. +In a fortnight the last ingot they could get at was stored with its +fellows--two hundred and eighty-two in all. + +They had repeatedly talked over the best plan of getting the gold away, +and finally concluded that it would be risking too much to take it into +a town, and that the best plan would be for Harry to buy a boat at +Callao, which, as a naval officer, would be natural enough. They +decided to procure three times as many bags as the ingots would really +require, and that they should put in each bag three ingots only, +filling it up with pieces of stone, so that the weight should not +exceed what it would have been were the contents heavy ore. Harry +arranged that he would go down to Callao, buy a large boat, and after +having made several excursions, to accustom the officials at Callao to +seeing him going about, he would make a bargain with the captains of +two ships about to sail to England, to carry about two tons each of +ore, which he could put on board them after dark, so as to avoid the +extortion he would have to submit to before the port officials and +others would allow him to ship it. The question that puzzled them most +was the best way of taking the bags into the boat. Dias was in favour +of their being carried on the mules to a point lower down the coast, at +which they could be loaded into the boat. + +"It would be only necessary to carry the gold," he said, "the stones to +fill the bags could be put in there." + +The objection to this was that they might be observed at work, and that +at most points it would be difficult both to run the boat up and to get +her off again through the rollers. If the boat were brought round into +the inlet she could be loaded there comfortably. The only fear was of +being caught in a gale. But as gales were by no means frequent the risk +was small; and should a sudden storm come on when she was lying there, +and she were broken up, it would be easy to recover the gold from the +shallow water behind the rocks. This was therefore settled. Only half +the treasure was to be taken away at once, and not till this had been +got on board a ship and the vessel had sailed would the boat come back +for the rest of their treasure. + +Dias was at once to start with the mules and carry the silver, in two +journeys, to a safe place among the mountains. There he could bury it +in three or four hiding-places, to be fetched out as he might require +it, only taking some fifty pounds to Lima. Here he was to dispose of a +portion of it to one of the dealers who made it his business to buy up +silver from the natives. As many of these worked small mines, and sent +down the produce once a month to Lima, there would be nothing +suspicious in its being offered for sale, especially as it would be +known that Dias had been away for a very long time among the mountains. +It was necessary that the sale should be effected at once, because +Harry's stock of money was running very low, and he would have to pay +for the passages of Bertie and himself to England, and for the freight +of the gold. Dias was to dispose later on of all the remaining stores, +the powder and tools, and the three riding mules. + +Two days later the last of the silver brackets had been melted, and +Dias and Harry started with the eight mules, six of them being laden +with the silver. They struck back at once into the hills, and after +travelling for two days, ascended a wild gorge. "It is not once a year +that anyone would come up here, senor. There is no way out of it. We +can bury the silver here with a certainty that it will be safe from +disturbance." + +"Yes, it will be safe here; and as you want it you have only to make a +journey with a couple of mules to fetch as much as you require, carry +it home, and bury it in your garden or under the house; then you could +from time to time take a few ingots into the town and dispose of them. +But to begin with, I will borrow fifty pounds weight of it, and get you +to dispose of it for me at Lima. My money is beginning to run short. I +shall have to pay for the freight of the gold and my own passage home, +and to buy a boat large enough to carry half the treasure. It is not +likely that there will be two vessels sailing at the same time, in +which case I shall make two trips. As I should not put it on board +until the night before the ship sailed, of course I could go home with +the second lot." + +"I shall never know what to do with a tenth part of this silver, senor. +It would never do for me to make a show of being rich; the authorities +would seize me, and perhaps torture me to make me reveal the source of +my wealth." + +"Well, there are thousands of your countrymen in the deepest poverty, +Dias; you could secretly help those in distress; a single ingot, ten +pounds in weight, would be a fortune to them. And when you die you +might get a respectable lawyer to make out a will, leaving your +treasure to some charity for the benefit of Indians, giving, of course, +instructions where the treasure is to be found." + +"That is good," Dias said. "Thank you, senor! that will make me very +happy." + +They had brought a pick and shovel with them, and, dividing the bags, +buried them at some distance apart, rolling stones to cover up the +hiding-places, and obliterating any signs of the ground having been +disturbed. A hundred pounds were left out, and with this in their +saddle-bags they arrived at Lima two days later. + +Harry went on alone into Callao. He had no difficulty in purchasing a +ship's boat in fair condition. She carried two lug-sails, and was amply +large enough for the purpose for which she was required, being nearly +thirty feet long with a beam of six feet. He got her cheaply, for the +ship to which she belonged had been wrecked some distance along the +coast, and a portion of the crew had launched her and made their way to +Callao; the mate, who was the sole surviving officer, was glad to +accept the ten pounds Harry offered for her, as this would enable the +crew to exist until they could obtain a passage home, or ship on board +some British vessel short of hands. The boat was too large to be worked +by one man, and seeing that the mate was an honest and intelligent +fellow, Harry arranged with him to aid him to sail the boat, and each +day they went out for some hours. After spending a week in apparent +idleness, and getting to know more of the man, Harry told him that he +had really bought the boat for the purpose of getting some ore he had +discovered on board a ship homeward-bound. + +"You know what these Peruvians are," he said, "and how jealous they are +of our getting hold of mines, so I have got to do the thing quietly, +and the only way will be to take the ore off by night. It is on a spot +some eighty miles along the coast. I am going off tomorrow to get it +ready for embarkation, and I shall be away about a week. I find that +the _London_ will leave in ten days, and I shall get it put on board +the night before she sails. While I am away, look after the boat. The +_Nancy_ will sail five days later. I am going to put half on board each +ship, as I am anxious to ensure that some at least of the ore shall +reach home, so as to be analysed, and see if it is as rich as I hope. +But be sure not to mention a word of this to a soul. I should have +immense trouble with the authorities if it got about that I had +discovered a mine." + +"I understand, sir. You may be quite sure I shall say nothing about it." + +"How are your men getting on?" + +"Four are shipped on board the _Esmerelda_, which sailed yesterday, the +others are hanging on till they can get berths. I hope a few will be +able to go in the two ships you name, but they haven't applied at +present. Some of the crew may desert before the time for sailing comes, +and of course they would get better paid if they went as part of the +crew than if they merely worked their passage home." + +"I am sorry for them," Harry said. "Here is another five pounds to help +them to hold on. As an old naval officer I can feel for men in such a +place." + +Dias, after selling the silver, had, a week before, returned with the +mules to the castle, and on his arrival there had sent Jose to join +Harry and bring news to them of the day on which the boat would arrive. +Dias and Bertie were packing half the bags, of which the former took +with him an ample supply, to get the gold out on the rocks facing the +entrance, so that they could be shipped without delay. Great pains were +taken in packing the bags so that the three ingots placed in each +should be completely surrounded by stones. Anyone who might take a +fancy to feel them, in order to ascertain their contents, would have no +reason to suppose that they carried anything beyond the ore they were +stated to contain. + +Harry had had no difficulty in arranging with the captain of the London +to take from a ton and a half to two tons of ore the night before he +sailed, and three days before this Harry started with the mate. There +was but a light breeze, and it was daylight next morning before they +arrived. A pole had been stuck up at the edge of the cliff just above +the cavern, and as it became dark a lantern was also placed there, so +they had no trouble in finding the entrance of the little cove. + +"It is a rum-looking place, sir," the man said. "As far as I can see +there is no break in the cliffs." + +"It is a curious place, but you will find the bags with the ore on the +rocks inside here ready for us, and my brother and one of my men +waiting there. They will have made us out an hour ago, so we can load +up at once and get out of this tiny creek. I don't want to stay in +there any longer than is necessary, for if there is anything of a swell +we could not get out again." + +As they approached the place Harry gave a shout, which was at once +answered. The sails were lowered, and the boat passed round the edge of +the rocks. + +"It is a rum place," the mate repeated. "Why, one might have rowed past +here fifty times without thinking there was water inside the rocks. Of +course you must have lowered the sacks down from the top?" + +"It was a difficult job," Harry said carelessly; "but we were anxious +to get the things away quietly. If we had taken them down to the port +we should have had no end of bother, and a hundred men would have set +off at once to try and find out where we got the ore." + +Bertie and Dias had everything ready, and as the boat drew up alongside +the rocks on which they were standing the former said, "Everything all +right, Harry?" + +"Yes, I hope so. We are to put the ore on board the _London_ to-morrow +after dark; she will get up her anchor at daylight. You have got all +the bags ready, I hope?" + +"Everything; the others will be ready for you when you come back for +them." + +"The next ship sails in about a week. Now, let us get them on board at +once, I don't want to stop in here a minute longer than is necessary. +There is scarcely a breath of wind now; if it doesn't blow up a bit in +the morning, we shall have a long row before us to get there in time. +This is my brother, Owen; the other is a mule-driver, who has been my +guide and companion for the past year, and whom I am proud to call my +friend." + +"You don't want anything in the way of food, do you?" Bertie asked. + +"We have got some here," Harry laughed. "I am too old a sailor to put +to sea without having provisions in my craft. Now, let us get the bags +on board." + +It did not take them long to transfer the sacks into the boat. + +"They are pretty heavy," the mate said, "I should say a hundredweight +each." + +"About that," Harry said carelessly. "This ore stuff is very heavy." + +As soon as all was on board Harry said: "Now we can put out at any +moment, but I don't want to leave till dark. We may as well begin to +get the rest of the bags out here at once. We might finish that job +before we start. Then you could come down with us, Bertie, and Dias +could pack up the remaining stores to-morrow and start for Lima with +the mules, and his wife and Jose. + +"Very well, Harry. I think we can leave the sacks here safely." + +"Just as safely as if they were ashore. So far as we know no one has +been in here for the past two hundred years, and no one is likely to +come in the next week." + +By evening all the work was done. The mate had been greatly surprised +at the manner in which the bags had been brought on board, but had +helped in the work and asked no questions. As soon as it was dark they +rowed out from the cove. There was not a breath of wind. Bertie +volunteered to take the first watch, the mate was to take the next. + +Harry was not sorry to turn in. He had had but little sleep for the +past week. Everything had seemed to be going well, but at any moment +there might be some hitch in the arrangements, and he had been anxious +and excited. Wrapping himself in his poncho he lay down in the stern of +the boat and slept soundly until morning. + +"I have had a sleep," he said on waking. "I have slept longer to-night +than I have done for the past fortnight. Now I will take the helm. How +fast have we been moving?" + +"We have not gone many miles, and if what tide there is hadn't been +with us we should not have moved at all, for the sails have not been +full all night. A breeze only sprang up an hour ago, and we are not +moving through the water now at more than a knot and a half; but I +think it is freshening." + +"I hope it is," Harry said. "It is not often that we have a dead calm; +but if it doesn't spring up we shall have to row. With two tons and a +half of stuff on board it is as much as we can do to move two knots an +hour through the water." + +"All right, sir! when you think it is time to begin, stir me up." + +In half an hour the breeze had increased so much that the boat was +running along three knots an hour. By eight o'clock she was doing a +knot better. So she ran along till, at four o'clock in the afternoon, +the wind died away again, and they could just see the masts of the +ships at Callao in the distance. + +"I should think that we are about fifteen miles off," Harry said. + +"About that," Bertie replied. "We had better get our oars and help her +along, she is not going much more than a knot through the water an +hour." + +They got out the oars and set to work. Occasionally a puff of wind gave +them a little assistance, but it was one o'clock before they arrived +alongside the _London_. + +A lamp was alight at the gangway as arranged, and two sailors were on +watch. + +"The captain turned in an hour ago, sir," one of them said. "He left +orders that the mate was to call him if you arrived. We will soon have +him up." + +In five minutes the mate and four other sailors were on deck. + +"We have got a whip rigged in readiness," the officer said. "How much +do the packages weigh, sir?" + +"They are leathern bags, and weigh about a hundredweight each." + +"How many are there?" + +"Forty-six." + +"We have got the fore-hatch open, and can hand them down in no time. If +you will pass the boat along to the chains forward we shall be ready +for you. Shall I send a couple of hands down into the boat to hook them +on?" + +"No, you needn't do that." + +As soon as the boat reached her station a rope with a couple of small +chains attached descended. One of the chains was fastened round a bag, +and this was at once run up. By the time the rope came down again the +other chain was passed round another bag, and in a quarter of an hour +the whole were on board and down in the hold. The captain had now come +out. + +"So you have got them off all right, Mr. Prendergast?" + +"Yes. There are forty-six bags. We will say, roughly, two ton and a +half; though I doubt whether there is as much as that. At any rate, I +will pay you for the freight agreed upon at once. They have all got +labels on them, and on your arrival, after being handed into store, are +to remain till called for. I am coming on in the _Nancy_. I do not know +whether she is faster than you are or not. At any rate, she is not +likely to be long behind you." + +"I think that possibly you will be home first, sir; the _Nancy_ made +the voyage out here a fortnight quicker than we did; but it depends, of +course, on what weather we meet with. I was on board her this +afternoon, and her captain and I made a bet of five pounds each as to +which would be in the port of London first. I shall have the anchor up +by daylight. Now, gentlemen, will you come down into the cabin and we +will take a glass together." + +Harry did so, and after emptying a tumbler and wishing the captain a +quick and pleasant voyage, he got into the boat and rowed two or three +miles along the shore, as a landing at that time of night might cause +questions to be asked; and then they lay down and slept by turns until +morning broke. A light breeze then sprang up, and hoisting sail they +returned to Callao. The _London_ was already far out at sea. + + + + +CHAPTER XX + +HOME + + +Two days later, Dias, Jose, and Maria arrived at Callao, having left +the mules at Lima. + +"Was it got off all right, senor?" Dias asked. + +"Yes. It was a pretty near touch, for we had to row nine hours, and +only saved our time by an hour." + +"And when will you start again?" + +"The _Nancy_ sails in four days, so I shall go down tomorrow morning. I +don't want to run the risk again of losing the boat." + +"Well, we shall be stronger handed," Bertie said. "Of course I shall go +down with you; Dias says he will too; so we will be able to man four +oars, if necessary." + +"What have you done with the goods?" Harry asked. + +"I sold them all at Lima, senor, to the man I got them from. He took +off a third of the price, and said he could not have taken them if it +had not been that he had just got an order down from the Cerro mines, +and was short of some of the things they had ordered." + +"That is all right, Dias." + +Harry secured two rooms at the hotel, and they all sat talking far into +the night. "I hope you will get your silver down as comfortably as we +have got the gold." + +"I have no fear about doing that, senor. The difficulty will be for me +to know what to do with it. I can never spend so much." + +"Oh, nonsense, Dias!" + +"I mean it, senor. Maria and I are quite agreed that we don't want any +larger house than we have got; and I know that if we did want a big +one, there would be all sorts of questions as to where I had got the +money from." + +"There would be no difficulty in answering that, Dias. You told me how +your friend found five mule-loads of silver in the bats' cave. You have +only got to say that you found yours hidden away, which would be the +truth. Jose is nineteen now, and you will want to provide him with some +good mules, and to put by some money for him when he wants to marry and +settle. I know you spoke very highly of an institution at Lima for the +orphans of natives. You can hand them over some, and when you and Maria +don't want it any longer you can leave them the rest." + +Maria cried bitterly in the morning when they said goodbye. "I shall +love you and pray for you always, senors," she sobbed. "I shall never +forget all your kindness." + +"We owe you more than you owe us," Harry said. "You have always been +ready to do everything, and you have kept us alive with your merry talk +and good spirits. You may be very sure that we shall never forget you." + +Jose was almost equally affected. "You will never come back, senor," he +said, as the tears rolled down his cheeks. + +"I may some day, Jose. I think it likely that I shall some day get up a +company to drain that lake in the golden valley. The gold will be more +useful as money than lying there. It must depend partly upon whether +the country is settled. People will not put money into Peru as long as +you are always fighting here." + +Maria and Jose would have accompanied them down to the boat the next +morning, but Dias pointed out to them that they were apparently only +going out for a day's sail, and that if there were any partings on the +shore it would at once attract the suspicions of the customs-house +officials there. + +Accordingly, after a painful farewell, Dias and the two brothers went +down to the boat, where the mate was already awaiting them. The voyage +was as successful as the previous one had been. On the return journey +the wind held, and they arrived alongside of the _Nancy_ by eleven +o'clock; the bags were all safely in the hold by midnight. The first +mate of the ship had two days before been taken with fever and sent +ashore, and the captain had gladly accepted the offer of Harry's +assistant to take the berth of second mate, that officer having +succeeded to the post of the first. Harry had told him that he could +sell the boat, and he had, before starting on the trip, done so, on the +understanding that it would be found on the beach in charge of Dias +when the _Nancy_ had sailed. + +Harry had given him another ten pounds to provide himself with an +outfit, and had also asked him to distribute twenty among his former +shipmates for the same purpose, as these had lost all their clothing +except what they stood in. The ship's dinghy, with a couple of hands, +towed the boat, with Dias in it, to the shore. The muleteer was greatly +affected at parting with Harry and his brother. + +"It has been a fortunate journey for us both," Dias said, "and I shall +always look back to the time we spent together with the greatest +pleasure." + +"Here is a piece of paper with my address in London. I know that you +will have no difficulty in getting letters written for you. Let me hear +from you once every six months or so, telling me how you are getting +on, and I will write to you. Good-bye! We shall always remember you, +and be thankful that we had so faithful a guide here, and, I may say, +so faithful a friend." + +The voyage home was an uneventful one, save that they met with a heavy +storm while rounding the Horn, and for some days the vessel was in +great danger. However, she weathered it safely, and when she arrived in +the Thames she found that the _London_ had come up on the previous tide. + +"If it hadn't been for that storm we should have beaten her easily," +the captain said. "But I don't mind losing that fiver, considering that +we have gained four days on her." + +On landing, Harry went straight to the Bank of England and informed the +managers that he had two hundred and eighty-two ingots of gold, +weighing about twenty pounds each, which he wished to deposit in their +vaults until they could weigh them and place their value to his credit, +and he requested them to send down one of their waggons to the docks +the next day to receive them. On the following evening he had the +satisfaction of knowing that the whole of the treasure was at last in +safe-keeping. Then he took a hackney-coach and drove to Jermyn Street, +where he had taken rooms, having the night before carried there the +trunks which he had stored before he left England. He smiled as he +spread out suit after suit. + +"I don't know anything about the fashions now," he said, "and for aught +I can tell they may have changed altogether. However, I don't suppose +there will be such an alteration that I shall look as if I had come out +of the ark. Certainly I am not going to wait till I get a new outfit. + +"It did not seem to me," he said to himself, "that I left a +ridiculously large wardrobe before I went. But after knocking about for +two years with a single change, it really does seem absurd that I +should ever have thought I absolutely required all these things. Now, I +suppose I had better write to the old man and say that I have returned, +and shall call upon him to-morrow. The chances are ten to one against +my catching him in now, and as this is rather a formal sort of +business, I had better give him due notice; but I cannot keep Hilda in +suspense. I wonder whether she has the same maid as she had before I +went away. I have given the girl more than one half-guinea, and to do +her justice I believe that she was so attached to her mistress that she +would have done anything for her without them. Still, I can't very well +knock at the door and ask for Miss Fortescue's maid; I expect I must +trust the note to a footman. If she does not get it, there is no harm +done; if he hands it to her father, no doubt it would put him in a +towering rage, but he will cool down by the time I see him in the +morning." + +He sat down and wrote two notes. The first was to Mr. Fortescue; it +only said:-- + +"Dear Sir,--I have returned from abroad, and shall do myself the +pleasure of calling upon you at eleven o'clock tomorrow morning to +discuss with you a matter of much importance to myself." + +The note to Hilda was still shorter:-- + +"My darling,--I am home and am going to call on your father at eleven +o'clock tomorrow morning. I am two months within the two years.--Yours +devotedly, + +"HARRY PRENDERGAST." + +Having sealed both letters, he walked to Bedford Square. When the door +opened, he saw that the footman was one of those who had been in Mr. +Fortescue's service before he left. + +"You have not forgotten me, Edward, have you?" + +"Why, it is Mr. Prendergast! Well, sir, it is a long time since we saw +you." + +"Yes, I have been abroad. Will you hand this letter to Mr. Fortescue. +Is he in at present?" + +"No, sir; he and Mrs. Fortescue are both out. Miss Fortescue is out +too." + +"Well now, Edward, will you hand this letter quietly to Miss Fortescue +when she comes in?" and he held out the note and a guinea with it. + +The man hesitated. + +"You need not be afraid of giving it to her," Harry went on. "It is +only to tell her what I have told your master in my letter to him, that +I am going to call tomorrow." + +"Then I shall be glad to do it," the man said--for, as usual, the +servants were pretty well acquainted with the state of affairs, and +when Harry went away, and their young mistress was evidently in +disgrace with her father, they guessed pretty accurately what had +happened, and their sympathies were with the lovers. Harry returned to +Jermyn Street confident that Hilda would get his note that evening. He +had no feeling of animosity against her father, It was natural that, as +a large land-owner, and belonging to an old family, and closely +connected with more than one peer of the realm, he should offer strong +opposition to the marriage of his daughter to a half-pay lieutenant, +and he had been quite prepared for the burst of anger with which his +request for her hand had been received. He had felt that it was a +forlorn hope; but he and Hilda hoped that in time the old man would +soften, especially as they had an ally in her mother. Hilda had three +brothers, and as the estates and the bulk of Mr. Fortescue's fortune +would go to them, she was not a great heiress, though undoubtedly she +would be well dowered. + +On arriving the next morning Harry was shown into the library. Mr. +Fortescue rose from his chair and bowed coldly. + +"To what am I indebted for the honour of this visit, Mr. Prendergast? I +had hoped that the emphatic way in which I rejected your--you will +excuse my saying--presumptuous request for the hand of my daughter, +would have settled the matter once and for all; and I trust that your +request for an interview to-day does not imply that you intend to renew +that proposal, which I may say at once would receive, and will receive +as long as I live, the same answer as I before gave you." + +"It has that object, sir," Harry said quietly, "but under somewhat +changed conditions. I asked you at that time to give me two years, in +which time possibly my circumstances might change. You refused to give +me a single week; but your daughter was more kind, and promised to wait +for the two years, which will not be up for two more months." + +"She has behaved like a froward and obstinate girl," her father said +angrily. "She has refused several most eligible offers, and I have to +thank you for it. Well, sir, I hope at least that you have the grace to +feel that it is preposterous that you should any longer stand in the +way of this misguided girl." + +"I have come to say that if it is her wish and yours that I should +stand aside, as you say, I will do so, and in my letters I told her +that unless circumstances should be changed before the two years have +expired I would disappear altogether from her path." + +"That is something at least, sir," Mr. Fortescue said with more +courtesy than he had hitherto shown. "I need not say that there is no +prospect of your obtaining my consent, and may inform you that my +daughter promised not to withstand my commands as far as you are +concerned beyond the expiration of the two years. I do not know that +there is anything more to say." + +"I should not have come here, sir, had there not been more to say, but +should simply have addressed a letter to you saying that I withdrew all +pretensions to your daughter's hand. But I have a good deal more to +say. I have during the time that I have been away succeeded in +improving my condition to a certain extent." + +"Pooh, pooh, sir!" the other said angrily. "Suppose you made a thousand +or two, what possible difference could it make?" + +"I am not foolish enough to suppose that it would do so; but at least +this receipt from the Bank of England, for gold deposited in their +hands, will show you that the sums you mention have been somewhat +exceeded." + +"Tut, tut, I don't wish to see it! it can make no possible difference +in the matter." + +"At least, sir, you will do me the courtesy to read it, or if you +prefer not to do so I will read it myself." + +"Give it me," Mr. Fortescue said, holding out his hand. "Let us get +through this farce as soon as possible; it is painful to us both." + +He put on his spectacles, glanced at the paper, and gave a sudden +start, read it again, carefully this time, and then said slowly: + +"Do you mean that the two hundred and eighty-two ingots, containing in +all five thousand six hundred and forty pounds weight of gold, are your +property? That is to say, that you are the sole owner of them, and not +only the representative of some mining company?" + +"It is the sole property, Mr. Fortescue, of my brother and myself. I +own two-thirds of it. It is lost treasure recovered by us from the sea, +where it has been lying ever since the conquest of Peru by Pizarro." + +"There is no mistake about this? The word pounds is not a mistake for +ounces?--although even that would represent a very large sum." + +"The bank would not be likely to make such a mistake as that, sir. The +ingots weigh about twenty pounds each. I had a small piece of the gold +assayed at Callao, and its value was estimated at four pounds per +ounce. Roughly, then, the value of the sum deposited at the bank is two +hundred and seventy thousand pounds." + +"Prodigious!" Mr. Fortescue murmured. + +"Well, Mr. Prendergast, I own that you have astounded me. It would be +absurd to deny that this altogether alters the position. Against you +personally I have never had anything to say. You were always a welcome +visitor to my house till I saw how matters were tending. Your family, +like my own, is an old one, and your position as an officer in the +King's Naval Service is an honourable one. However, I must ask you to +give me a day to reflect over the matter, to consult with my wife, and +to ascertain that my daughter's disposition in the matter is unchanged." + +"Thank you, sir! But I trust that you will allow me to have an +interview with Miss Fortescue now. It is two years since we parted, and +she has suffered great anxiety on my account, and on the matter of my +safety at least I would not keep her a moment longer in suspense." + +"I think that after the turn the matter has taken your request is a +reasonable one. You are sure to find her in the drawing-room with her +mother at present. I think it is desirable that you should not see her +alone until the matter is formally arranged." + +Prendergast bowed. + +"I am content to wait," he said with a slight smile. + +"I will take you up myself," the other said. + +Harry could have done without the guidance, for he knew the house well. +However, he only bowed again, and followed the old man upstairs. + +The latter opened the door and said to his wife: "My dear, I have +brought an old friend up to see you;" and as Harry entered he closed +the door and went down to the library again. + +"Nearly two hundred thousand pounds!" he said. "A splendid fortune! +Nearly twice as much as I put by before I left the bar. How in the +world could he have got it? 'Got it up out of the sea,' he said; a +curious story. However, with that acknowledgment from the bank there +can be no mistake about it. Well, well, it might be worse. I always +liked the young fellow till he was fool enough to fall in love with +Hilda, and worse still, she with him. The silly girl might have had a +coronet. However, there is no accounting for these things, and I am +glad that the battle between us is at an end. I was only acting for her +good, and I should have been mad to let her throw herself away on a +penniless officer on half-pay." + +Mrs. Fortescue waved her hand as Harry, on entering, was about to speak +to her. + +"Go to her first," she said; "she has waited long enough for you." + +And he turned to Hilda. + +He made a step towards her and held out his arms, and with a little cry +of joy she ran into them. + +"And is it all right?" she said a minute later. "Can it really be all +right?" + +"You may be quite sure that it is all right, Hilda," Mrs. Fortescue +said. "Do you think your father would have brought him up here if it +hadn't been? Now you can come to me, Harry." + +"I am glad," she said heartily. "We have had a very bad time. Now, +thank God, it is all over. You see she has only had me to stand by her, +for her brothers, although they have not taken open part against her, +have been disposed to think that it was madness her wasting two years +on the chance of your making a fortune. Of course you have done so, or +you would not be in this drawing-room at present." + +"I have done very well, Mrs. Fortescue. I was able to show Mr. +Fortescue a receipt for gold amounting to nearly three hundred thousand +pounds, of which two-thirds belong to me, the rest to my brother." + +Mrs. Fortescue uttered an exclamation of astonishment. + +"What have you been doing, Harry?" she asked--"plundering a Nabob?" + +"Nabobs do not dwell in Peru," he laughed. "No, I have discovered a +long-lost treasure, which, beyond any doubt, was part of the wealth of +Atahualpa, the unfortunate monarch whom Pizarro first plundered and +then slew. It had been sent off by sea, and the vessel was lost. It is +too long a story to tell now." + +"And Papa has quite consented, Harry?" + +Harry smiled. + +"Virtually so, as you might suppose by his bringing me up here. +Actually he has deferred the matter, pending a consultation with you +and Mrs. Fortescue, and will give me his formal answer to-morrow." + +The two ladies both smiled. + +"If he said that, the matter is settled," the elder said; "he has never +asked my opinion before on the subject, and I have never volunteered +it. But I am sure he has not the slightest doubt as to what I thought +of it. So we can consider it as happily settled after all. If I had +thought that there was the slightest chance of your making a fortune +quickly I should have spoken out; but as I thought it absolutely +hopeless, I have done what I could privately to support Hilda, always +saying, however, that if at the end of the two years nothing came of +it, I could not in any way countenance her throwing away the chances of +her life." + +"You were quite right, Mrs. Fortescue. I had fully intended to write to +Hilda at the end of that time releasing her from all promises that she +had made to me, and saying that I felt that I had no right to trouble +her further; but from what she wrote to me, I doubt whether her father +would have found her altogether amenable to his wishes even at the end +of the two years." + +A month later there was a wedding in Bedford Square. Among those +present no one was more gratified than Mr. Barnett, whose surprise and +satisfaction were great when Harry told him in confidence the result of +his advice, and especially of his introduction to the Indian guide. + +It had been arranged that nothing should be said as to the source from +which Harry had obtained his wealth, as it was possible that the +Peruvian government might set up some claim to it, and it was in Mr. +Fortescue's opinion very doubtful what the result would be, as it had +been discovered so close to the shore. + +Harry never took any steps with reference to the gold valley, for the +constant troubles in Peru were sufficient to deter any wealthy men from +investing money there. + +The correspondence between him and Dias and his wife was maintained +until they died full of years and greatly lamented by numbers of their +countrymen to whom they had been benefactors. + +Bertie never went to sea again except in his own yacht, but when he +came of age, bought an estate near Southampton, and six years later +brought home a mistress for it. + + + + + + + + + +End of Project Gutenberg's The Treasure of the Incas, by G. A. Henty + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE TREASURE OF THE INCAS *** + +***** This file should be named 7070.txt or 7070.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + http://www.gutenberg.org/7/0/7/7070/ + +Produced by Anne Soulard, Charles Franks and the Online +Distributed Proofreading Team. + + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License available with this file or online at + www.gutenberg.org/license. + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation information page at www.gutenberg.org + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at 809 +North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email +contact links and up to date contact information can be found at the +Foundation's web site and official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. +To donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For forty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. |